AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000/
AM-M5500 User's Guide
3
Contents
AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000/AM-M5500 User's Guide..................................................................... 19
Product Basics .......................................................................................................................................... 20
Product Parts Locations ..................................................................................................................... 20
Product Parts - Front and Inside .................................................................................................... 21
Product Parts - Back...................................................................................................................... 24
Product Parts - Options ................................................................................................................. 26
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts .............................................................................. 29
Using the Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 31
Control Panel Buttons and Lights .................................................................................................. 32
Status Icon Information ............................................................................................................. 32
Guide to the Home Screen ............................................................................................................ 34
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen ....................................................................................... 36
Selecting the Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 36
Selecting Your Country or Region ................................................................................................. 37
Changing LCD Screen Language.................................................................................................. 38
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds.................................................................................................... 38
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting .................................................................................. 39
Adjusting the Screen Brightness.................................................................................................... 39
Checking the Print Counter............................................................................................................ 39
Using Presets ................................................................................................................................ 40
Checking for Software Updates.......................................................................................................... 40
Using Power Saving Settings ............................................................................................................. 41
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings ............................................................................................... 41
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings ........................................................................................ 42
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More ......................................................... 42
Setting Up Epson Connect Services.............................................................................................. 43
Using Epson Email Print ............................................................................................................... 43
Using Epson Remote Print ........................................................................................................... 44
Using Epson Scan to Cloud........................................................................................................... 44
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App.......................................................................................... 45
4
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 46
Using the Mopria Print Service .......................................................................................................... 47
Using Mopria Scan ............................................................................................................................. 48
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler ................................................................................ 48
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking........................................................................................................................ 50
Network Security Recommendations ................................................................................................. 50
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup......................................................................................................... 51
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel ........................................................ 52
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup .................................................................................................................... 53
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode ........................................................................................................... 54
Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password ................................................................ 55
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)............................................................................................................. 56
Using WPS to Connect to a Network ............................................................................................. 56
Printing a Network Status Sheet......................................................................................................... 57
Printing a Network Connection Report ............................................................................................... 57
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages....................................................................... 58
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing.................................................... 65
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ....................................................................... 65
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ............................................................... 69
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ....................................................................... 69
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings ....................................................................... 70
PDL Print Configuration Options.................................................................................................... 70
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings ............................................................................ 73
Printing Language and Interface Options ...................................................................................... 73
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet ............................................................................... 74
Loading Paper ........................................................................................................................................... 75
Loading Paper in the Cassettes and Paper Tray ................................................................................ 75
Paper Loading Orientation............................................................................................................. 77
Using the Optional Paper Cassette Lock............................................................................................ 85
Paper Loading Capacity..................................................................................................................... 88
Double-sided Printing......................................................................................................................... 91
Compatible Epson Papers (U.S. and Canada)................................................................................... 92
Compatible Epson Papers (Latin America) ........................................................................................ 93
5
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software.............................................................................. 94
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel ........................................................... 95
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel ............................................................................................. 95
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator................................................................................ 96
Selecting the Default Printer Settings ............................................................................................ 96
Paper Source Settings Options................................................................................................. 97
Selecting the Universal Print Settings............................................................................................ 98
Universal Print Settings Options ............................................................................................... 98
Placing Originals on the Product ........................................................................................................... 100
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass ........................................................................................... 100
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder ...................................................................... 101
Copying .................................................................................................................................................... 102
Copying Documents or Photos......................................................................................................... 102
Copying Special Originals ................................................................................................................ 103
Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets.......................................................................................... 105
Copying and Creating Booklets ................................................................................................... 105
Copying and Creating Finished Booklets..................................................................................... 107
Creating Folded, Stapled, or Punched Copies............................................................................. 108
Stacking Copies Using Orientation .............................................................................................. 109
Stacking Copies Using Offset ...................................................................................................... 109
Inserting Slipsheets ..................................................................................................................... 110
Copying Options............................................................................................................................... 110
Saving Groups for Copying .............................................................................................................. 117
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group for Copying ................................................................................ 117
Omitting Red Characters in Originals When Copying....................................................................... 118
Printing from a Computer ....................................................................................................................... 119
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows ......................................................... 119
Synchronizing Printer Settings for Optional Units - Windows ...................................................... 120
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows .................................................................................... 121
Paper Source Options - Windows ........................................................................................... 124
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows................................................................................... 124
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows ................................................................... 125
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows............................................................................... 127
6
Selecting Finishing Options - Windows ....................................................................................... 127
Finishing Options - Windows................................................................................................... 129
Using the Manual Stapler........................................................................................................ 129
Selecting Additional Print Options - Windows.............................................................................. 131
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)................. 133
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows.................................................................. 134
Header/Footer Settings - Windows ......................................................................................... 135
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows......................................................................................... 136
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows ...................................................................................... 137
Extended Settings - Windows ................................................................................................. 138
Printing Your Document - Windows............................................................................................. 140
Printing Slip Sheets and Chapter Papers .................................................................................... 140
Saving Print Set Groups - Windows............................................................................................. 144
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group .............................................................................................. 144
Locking Printer Settings - Windows ............................................................................................. 147
Locked Setting Options........................................................................................................... 149
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing ............................................................................. 150
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows.................................................................................. 151
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens ....................................................... 152
Changing Automatic Update Options .......................................................................................... 153
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac................................................................. 154
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac ........................................................................................... 155
Paper Source Options - Mac................................................................................................... 157
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac .......................................................................................... 158
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac........................................................................................... 159
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac........................................................................... 159
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac........................................................... 160
Managing Color - Mac (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)......................................................... 161
Color Matching and Color Options - Mac (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000) ....................... 162
Selecting Finishing Options - Mac ............................................................................................... 162
Finishing Options - Mac .......................................................................................................... 163
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac .......................................................................................... 164
Printing Preferences - Mac...................................................................................................... 165
7
Printing Your Document - Mac..................................................................................................... 166
Checking Print Status - Mac.................................................................................................... 166
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows................................................................. 167
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ................................... 168
Selecting Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows .............................................. 169
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows.................................. 171
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows ............................................. 172
Epson Universal Print Driver Locked Setting Options ............................................................. 174
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows............................................. 174
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows ........................................................ 177
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows ...................................... 177
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows.................................... 180
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac ................................................................ 181
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac ............................................. 182
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet............................................................................................... 185
Cancelling Printing Using the Product Control Panel ....................................................................... 186
Scanning .................................................................................................................................................. 187
Starting a Scan................................................................................................................................. 187
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel ........................................................................ 187
Scanning to Email ................................................................................................................... 188
Scanning to a Memory Device ................................................................................................ 189
Scanning to the Cloud............................................................................................................. 190
Scanning to the Product's Hard Drive ..................................................................................... 191
Scanning to a Connected Computer ....................................................................................... 192
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7)....................................................................................... 193
Control Panel Scanning Options............................................................................................. 194
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server...................................................... 196
Creating a Shared Network Folder.......................................................................................... 197
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config ............................... 199
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel ........................... 200
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server.......................................................................... 201
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon ............................................................................. 202
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program................................................................................... 204
8
Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet.............................................................................. 206
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture .......................................................... 207
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows .............................................. 207
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows.................................................... 209
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows ............................. 210
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac ..................................................................................... 213
Scanning in Epson Scan 2 ............................................................................................................... 216
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab ....................................................................... 218
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab............................................................... 219
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2 ................................... 220
Image Format Options................................................................................................................. 221
Scan Resolution Guidelines ........................................................................................................ 222
Scanning Special Projects................................................................................................................ 223
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Windows.................................................... 223
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows ...................................................... 225
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning ............................................................................... 227
Faxing....................................................................................................................................................... 229
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine.............................................................................. 229
Setting Up Fax Features .................................................................................................................. 234
Setting Up Basic Fax Features .................................................................................................... 234
Using the Fax Setup Wizard ................................................................................................... 234
Selecting the Line Type........................................................................................................... 236
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer .................................................................................. 236
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings................................................................................................ 237
Basic Settings - Fax ................................................................................................................ 237
Send Settings - Fax................................................................................................................. 239
Receive Settings - Fax............................................................................................................ 240
Report Settings - Fax .............................................................................................................. 243
Security Settings - Fax ............................................................................................................ 244
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows............................................................................................ 245
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups......................................................................................... 248
Creating a Contact....................................................................................................................... 248
Editing or Deleting a Contact ....................................................................................................... 249
9
Creating a Contact Group............................................................................................................ 249
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group ............................................................................................ 250
Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................. 251
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel........................................................................... 251
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History...................................................... 251
Fax Sending Options .............................................................................................................. 253
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time ......................................................................................... 255
Sending a Fax on Demand (Polling Send/Box)....................................................................... 256
Sending a Fax on Demand (Bulletin Board Box)..................................................................... 257
Sending a Stored Fax ............................................................................................................. 258
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone ............................................................... 258
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows .......................................................................... 259
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac .................................................................................. 262
Sending IP Faxes Using the Control Panel.................................................................................. 265
IP Fax Destination Examples.................................................................................................. 266
Receiving Faxes............................................................................................................................... 267
Fax Reception ............................................................................................................................. 267
Receiving Faxes Automatically ................................................................................................... 267
Receiving Faxes Manually........................................................................................................... 267
Forwarding Received Faxes........................................................................................................ 268
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box)............................................................... 269
Receiving a Fax by Polling .......................................................................................................... 271
Checking Fax Status ....................................................................................................................... 271
Printing Fax Reports......................................................................................................................... 272
Fax Report Options ..................................................................................................................... 272
Using External USB Devices with Your Product................................................................................... 273
Connecting a USB Device................................................................................................................ 273
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen ...................................................................................... 273
Printing JPEG Photos.................................................................................................................. 273
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode......................................................................................... 274
Printing TIFF and PDF Files ....................................................................................................... 277
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode........................................................................................... 278
Print Setting Options - PDF Mode........................................................................................... 281
10
Transferring Files on a USB Device ................................................................................................. 283
Setting Up USB Device Access ................................................................................................... 283
Using Your Product's Internal Storage.................................................................................................. 285
Storage Folder Types....................................................................................................................... 285
Creating Shared Folders .................................................................................................................. 286
Printing a Stored File........................................................................................................................ 286
Saving Groups for Printing from Storage.......................................................................................... 288
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group ................................................................................................... 288
Saving Stored Files to an External USB Device ............................................................................... 289
Emailing Stored Files ....................................................................................................................... 289
Saving Stored Files to a Network Folder .......................................................................................... 290
Saving Stored Files to Cloud Services ............................................................................................. 290
Storage Menu Options ..................................................................................................................... 291
Searching for Folders and Files........................................................................................................ 297
Deleting Folders and Files from Storage .......................................................................................... 297
Changing the Storage Period of Files............................................................................................... 298
Restricting Shared Folder Access .................................................................................................... 298
Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers................................................ 300
Ink Safety Precautions ..................................................................................................................... 300
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status................................................................................. 302
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen...................................................................................... 303
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows .......................................................... 303
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status - Mac ............................................................. 304
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes........................................................................... 304
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box ............................................................... 305
Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers...................................................................... 305
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges ....................................................................................... 306
Replacing the Maintenance Box.................................................................................................. 306
Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers ................................................................................................... 307
Replacing the Optional Staple Cartridge .......................................................................................... 307
Adjusting Print Quality............................................................................................................................ 309
Printhead Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 309
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel .............................................................. 309
11
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel........................................................... 311
Automatically Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel ......................................... 311
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product ............................................................................................. 313
Cleaning Your Product ..................................................................................................................... 313
Cleaning the Scanner Glass............................................................................................................. 313
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder....................................................................................... 315
Moving or Transporting Your Product............................................................................................... 319
Solving Problems .................................................................................................................................... 320
Viewing the Help Screen .................................................................................................................. 320
Product Status Messages ................................................................................................................ 321
Job Status Error Codes .................................................................................................................... 324
Running a Product Check ................................................................................................................ 328
Resetting Control Panel Defaults ..................................................................................................... 329
Solving Setup Problems ................................................................................................................... 331
Product Does Not Turn On or Off................................................................................................. 331
Noise After Ink Installation........................................................................................................... 331
Software Installation Problems .................................................................................................... 331
Solving Network Problems ............................................................................................................... 332
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point .................................................. 332
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network................................................................. 333
Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac ................................................................... 334
USB Connection Problems.......................................................................................................... 335
USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable ............................................. 335
Wired Network Connection Becomes Unstable........................................................................... 335
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window ....................................................................... 336
Cannot Print Over a Network....................................................................................................... 336
Cannot Scan Over a Network ...................................................................................................... 338
Solving Network Security Problems ................................................................................................. 339
Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port................................................................................ 339
Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR ............................................................................. 339
Cannot Import a Digital Certificate............................................................................................... 340
Deleted a CA-signed Certificate .................................................................................................. 340
Digital Certificate Warning Messages.......................................................................................... 341
12
Solving Copying Problems ............................................................................................................... 342
Product Cannot Copy .................................................................................................................. 342
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies.................................................................................. 343
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While............................................................................. 343
Solving Copy Quality Problems........................................................................................................ 343
Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors......................................................................................... 343
Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect ....................................................................... 344
Solving Paper Problems................................................................................................................... 345
Paper Feeding Problems............................................................................................................. 345
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder.................................................... 346
Paper Jam Problems ................................................................................................................... 346
Paper Ejection Problems ............................................................................................................. 347
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer..................................................................................... 347
Nothing Prints.............................................................................................................................. 348
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar ................................................................... 349
Printing is Slow ............................................................................................................................ 350
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems.................................................................................... 352
Inverted Image............................................................................................................................. 352
Too Many Copies Print ................................................................................................................ 352
Blank Pages Print ........................................................................................................................ 352
Incorrect Margins on Printout....................................................................................................... 353
Incorrect Characters Print............................................................................................................ 353
Incorrect Image Size or Position.................................................................................................. 354
Slanted Printout........................................................................................................................... 355
Solving Print Quality Problems......................................................................................................... 355
White or Dark Lines in Printout .................................................................................................... 356
Blurry or Smeared Printout .......................................................................................................... 356
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps............................................................................................. 358
Grainy Printout............................................................................................................................. 359
Incorrect Colors (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000) .................................................................. 359
Solving Scanning Problems ............................................................................................................. 360
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly ......................................................................... 361
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2 ......................................................................................................... 361
13
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems ....................................................................................... 362
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only............................................................................................. 362
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images............................................................................... 363
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked ................................................................................ 363
Scanned Image Quality Problems ............................................................................................... 364
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges ........................................................................................ 365
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image............................................................................................ 365
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped ........................................................................................... 366
Solving Faxing Problems.................................................................................................................. 366
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes................................................................................................... 366
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product ........................................ 367
Fax Memory Full Error Appears................................................................................................... 368
Fax Quality is Poor ...................................................................................................................... 368
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size ................................................................................... 369
Received Fax is Not Printed ........................................................................................................ 369
Solving USB Device Problems ......................................................................................................... 369
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device..................................................................................... 369
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device ........................................................................................... 369
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device......................................................................... 370
Uninstall Your Product Software....................................................................................................... 370
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows.................................................................................... 370
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac............................................................................................ 371
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada) ............................................................................................. 372
Where to Get Help (Latin America)................................................................................................... 373
Administering Your Product................................................................................................................... 375
Accessing the Web Config Utility...................................................................................................... 375
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config...................................................................... 375
Configuring Product Settings............................................................................................................ 376
Checking Status Information ....................................................................................................... 377
Managing the Network Connection.............................................................................................. 377
Network Settings..................................................................................................................... 378
Setting Control Panel Options ..................................................................................................... 382
Locking Individual Settings .......................................................................................................... 382
14
Using an Email Server................................................................................................................. 383
Configuring an Email Server ................................................................................................... 383
Email Server Settings ............................................................................................................. 384
Checking the Email Server Connection .................................................................................. 384
Sending Email Notifications .................................................................................................... 385
Using an LDAP Server................................................................................................................. 385
Configuring the LDAP Server and Selecting Search Settings ................................................. 386
LDAP Server Settings ............................................................................................................. 386
LDAP Search Settings ............................................................................................................ 388
LDAP Connection Report Messages ...................................................................................... 388
Adjusting Power Saving Settings................................................................................................. 389
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds.................................................................................................. 390
Erasing Hard Drive Data.............................................................................................................. 390
Importing and Exporting Product Settings ................................................................................... 391
Exporting Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 391
Importing Settings Using Web Config ..................................................................................... 391
Updating Firmware Using Web Config ........................................................................................ 392
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server ................................................................. 392
Clearing the Internal Memory ...................................................................................................... 392
Adjusting the Contact List View Options...................................................................................... 393
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely ....................................................................... 393
Operating the Control Panel Remotely ........................................................................................ 393
Restoring Default Product Settings.............................................................................................. 394
Adjusting the Control Panel Layout ............................................................................................. 394
Configuring Security Settings ........................................................................................................... 394
Connecting an Authentication Device.......................................................................................... 395
Restricting Features Available for Users ..................................................................................... 395
User Feature Restriction ......................................................................................................... 395
Configuring User Feature Restrictions .................................................................................... 396
Disabling the External Interface................................................................................................... 397
Setting Up Password Encryption ................................................................................................. 397
Restoring the Password Encryption Key................................................................................. 398
Working with Audit Logs .............................................................................................................. 398
15
Setting a Password Policy ........................................................................................................... 399
Restricting Application Access .................................................................................................... 399
Restricting PDL File Operations .................................................................................................. 399
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up .................................................................................. 400
Restricting Domain Access.......................................................................................................... 400
Using Your Product on a Secure Network ........................................................................................ 401
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config ..................................................................... 401
Protocol Settings..................................................................................................................... 401
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication......................................................................................... 406
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings ................................................................................................ 406
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product...................................................................... 406
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering ...................................................................................................... 407
About IPsec/IP Filtering .......................................................................................................... 407
Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy..................................................................... 407
Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies ................................................................... 408
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings ............................................................................................ 408
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples.............................................................................. 414
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate ........................................................................... 415
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network................................................................... 415
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network ..................................................................................... 415
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings ............................................................................................... 416
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network ............................................................ 417
IEEE 802.1X Network Status .................................................................................................. 417
Configuring S/MIME Settings ...................................................................................................... 418
Configuring S/MIME Basic Settings ........................................................................................ 418
S/MIME Settings ..................................................................................................................... 419
Configuring a Certificate for S/MIME....................................................................................... 420
Using a Digital Certificate ............................................................................................................ 421
About Digital Certification........................................................................................................ 421
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate .................................................................... 422
CSR Setup Settings ................................................................................................................ 423
CSR Import Settings ............................................................................................................... 423
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate............................................................................................. 425
16
Updating a Self-signed Certificate........................................................................................... 425
Importing a CA Certificate....................................................................................................... 426
Deleting a CA Certificate......................................................................................................... 426
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft) .............................................................................................. 427
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software......................................................................... 427
Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 428
Windows System Requirements ...................................................................................................... 429
Mac System Requirements .............................................................................................................. 429
Paper Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 430
Printable Area Specifications ........................................................................................................... 432
Scanning Specifications ................................................................................................................... 433
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications .......................................................................... 434
Fax Specifications ............................................................................................................................ 434
Ink Cartridge Specifications.............................................................................................................. 435
Dimension Specifications ................................................................................................................. 436
Electrical Specifications ................................................................................................................... 437
Environmental Specifications ........................................................................................................... 437
Interface Specifications .................................................................................................................... 438
External USB Device Specifications................................................................................................. 438
Storage Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 439
Network Interface Specifications (U.S. and Canada) ....................................................................... 440
Network Interface Specifications (Latin America)............................................................................. 442
Safety and Approvals Specifications (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................. 444
Staple Finisher Specifications .......................................................................................................... 444
Inner Finisher Specifications ............................................................................................................ 451
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board Specifications ................................................................................... 456
10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet Specifications ................................................................................... 456
Inner Tray Specifications.................................................................................................................. 456
High-Capacity Unit Specifications .................................................................................................... 456
Optional Dual Cassette Specifications ............................................................................................. 457
HDD Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 457
Notices ..................................................................................................................................................... 458
Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................................ 458
17
General Product Safety Instructions ............................................................................................ 458
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions.................................................................................................. 460
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions ..................................................................................... 461
LCD Screen Safety Instructions................................................................................................... 461
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions ................................................................................... 462
FCC Compliance Statement............................................................................................................. 462
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver ............................................................................................... 465
Trademarks...................................................................................................................................... 468
Copyright Notice............................................................................................................................... 469
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment.............................................................................................. 469
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials................................................... 470
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products ............................................... 470
Copyright Attribution.................................................................................................................... 470
19
AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000/AM-M5500 User's Guide
Welcome to the AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000/AM-M5500 User's Guide.
For a printable PDF copy of this guide, click here.
20
Product Basics
See these sections to learn about the basic features of your product.
Note: This product contains an encrypted hard drive that is used for storing large and/or authenticated
print, copy, and scan jobs. You may erase data stored on the encrypted hard drive by following the steps
outlined in the link below. It is recommended that data is erased before disposing or giving away the
product.
Note: Printing software instructions in this manual are intended for use with the standard Epson printer
software. For more information on using the Printer Command Language (PCL) or PostScript (PS3)
printer software, please see the appropriate sections.
Product Parts Locations
Using the Control Panel
Checking for Software Updates
Using Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Using AirPrint
Using the Mopria Print Service
Using Mopria Scan
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler
Related tasks
Clearing the Internal Memory
Related topics
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Product Parts Locations
See these sections to identify the parts on your product.
Product Parts - Front and Inside
Product Parts - Back
Product Parts - Options
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
22
3 ADF edge guides
4 ADF input tray
5 ADF output tray
6 ADF paper stopper
7 Control panel
8 Cover (D1)
9 Edge guide
10 Paper tray (B)
11 Cover (E, H)
12 Edge guide
13 Paper cassette 1, 2, 3, 4 (C1, C2, C3, C4)
14 Front cover (A)
23
15 Face down tray (G)
1 Document cover
2 Scanner glass
3 Cover
4 Optional Wireless LAN interface USB port
5 Service USB port
6 External interface USB port
7 Cleaning stick
24
8 Document holder
9 Maintenance box
10 Ink cartridges (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)/Ink cartridge (AM-M5500)
11 Cleaning cloth holder (recommended location)
12 Cleaning cloth
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Product Parts - Back
Certain parts are labeled with a letter and number code.
1 Additional interface slot
25
2 USB port
3 LAN port
4 AC inlet
Note: If you are using a USB connection, make sure you insert the cable in the correct orientation.
27
Staple finisher
1 Staple finisher
2 Booklet tray
3 Finisher tray
4 Output tray (for received faxes)
5 Operation panel for manual stapling
6 Top output tray
7 Punch waste box (for use with optional hole punch unit)
8 Staple cartridge for flat stapling
9 Staple cartridge for saddle stitching
28
Inner finisher
1 Inner finisher
2 Finisher tray
3 Hole punch unit (additional option)
4 Punch waste tray (for use with optional hole punch unit)
5 Staple cartridge for flat stitching
29
Other optional items
1 Inner tray
2 Authentication device table
3 High capacity tray
4 Stabilizer
5 Caster table
6 Optional dual cassette
7 Paper cassette lock
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales), epson.ca (Canadian sales),
or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized
reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in
Canada.
30
To purchase replacement staple cartridges, contact your dealer.
Note: Availability of accessories varies by country.
Option or part Part number
Replacement maintenance box C12C937181
Paper cassette lock C12C936771
Optional dual cassette* C12C936871
Cabinet C12CFM70390
High-capacity tray* C12C936911
Inner tray* C12C936781
Inner finisher* C12C936961
C12C937421
2/3 Hole punch kit for inner finisher* C12C936981
2/4 Hole punch kit for inner finisher* C12C936971
Staple finisher* C12C936751
C12C937401
C12C937881
Saddle unit* C12C938001
2/3 Hole punch kit for staple/booklet finisher* C12C936821
2/4 Hole punch kit for staple/booklet finisher* C12C936811
Staple cartridge for staple finisher C12C935401
Staple cartridge for booklet/inner finisher C12C937001
Wireless LAN interface* C12C936861
Optional Super G3 fax board* C12C935251
Optional Ethernet board* C12C934471
Authentication device table* C12C937381
Hard drive for mirroring* C12C936791
31
Option or part Part number
OCR expansion board*/license C12C936801 (board)
EDS0200001 (license)
Print Sets feature license EDS0100001
Red Erase feature license EDS0100002
IP Fax license EDS0300001
* Must be installed by an Epson authorized reseller or technician.
Parent topic: Product Parts Locations
Using the Control Panel
See these sections to learn about the control panel and select control panel settings.
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Guide to the Home Screen
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Selecting the Date and Time
Selecting Your Country or Region
Changing LCD Screen Language
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
Checking the Print Counter
Using Presets
Parent topic: Product Basics
32
Control Panel Buttons and Lights
1 LCD screen
2 fax reception light
3
error light
4 data light
5
power button and light
Note: If the LCD screen is dark, touch the screen to wake the product from sleep mode.
Status Icon Information
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Related tasks
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
Updating Firmware Using Web Config
Status Icon Information
Your product displays status icons on the LCD screen for certain product status conditions. Press the
or icon to view or change the current network settings.
33
Icons Description
or
Job/Status
Displays the Job Status, Printer Status, Power Consumption and
Consumables/Others screens.
No Ethernet connection.
An Ethernet connection is established.
No Wi-Fi connection.
A Wi-Fi network error has occurred or the product is searching for a connection.
A Wi-Fi connection is established. The number of bars indicates the connection's signal
strength.
No Wi-Fi Direct connection.
A Wi-Fi Direct connection is established.
The Mute setting is enabled. The product does not make any sound when you press
buttons or select icons on the control panel. Select this icon to change the setting.
Quiet Mode is enabled. Noise is reduced during printing, but the print speed may be
reduced. Select this icon to change the setting.
Quiet Mode is disabled. Select this icon to change the setting.
Enables sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen.
Displays the help screen with how-to and troubleshooting topics.
Displays the Fax Data Information screen (models with optional fax board installed).
Enters job interruption mode. Select again to turn this mode off.
Displays the Paper Setting screen.
Displays additional information or instructions, such as loading paper or placing a
document.
34
Icons Description
The indicated setting has changed.
There is a problem with the indicated setting. Select the icon to resolve the problem.
Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users. Select the icon to log
in using a user name and password. Contact your administrator if you do not know the
login information.
Access to the product's functions are restricted to authorized users and a user is
currently logged in. Select the icon to log out of the current user account.
A firmware update is available.
Parent topic: Control Panel Buttons and Lights
Guide to the Home Screen
1 Title of the currently displayed screen
2 Status icons
35
3 Menus (depending on installed options and settings, menus may be displayed in a different order
or unavailable)
• Copy: Allows you to copy documents
• Scan: Allows you to scan documents and save them to various locations
• Fax: Allows you to send faxes (if the optional fax board is installed)
• Presets: Allows you to register frequently used settings for copying, scanning, or faxing
• Memory Device: Allows you to print TIFF, JPG, or PDF data from a USB flash drive
• Storage: Allows you to store data to the built-in hard drive and view, print, or save it
• Fax Box: Allows you to store received faxes, documents to be sent, or documents for polling
faxes
• Print Stored Documents: Allows you to temporarily save jobs sent from the printer driver
before printing them. You can print a password-protected job or test a print before printing
multiple copies.
• Quick Dial: Allows you to quickly send faxes to assigned contacts
• Settings: Allows you to make settings for maintenance, printer settings, administration, and
other operations
• Auto Cleaning: Displays options to improve print quality and maintenance functions
• Useful Features: Introduces useful functions
4 Displays the status of print jobs and the printer, including unread faxes, interrupted jobs, paper
settings, and other information. Select Job/Status to display a list of current and pending print
jobs.
5 Returns you to the home screen
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Related topics
Copying
Scanning
Faxing
36
Entering Characters on the LCD Screen
Follow these guidelines to enter characters on the LCD screen for passwords and other settings.
1 To move the cursor, select the left or right arrows.
2 When you are finished, select OK.
3 To delete the previous character, select Back Space.
4 Displays the current and maximum character count
5 To change the case of letters, select Shift.
6 To enter a space, select Space.
7 To enter a frequently used domain name or URL, select Domain Name and select it from the list.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Selecting the Date and Time
Before using your product, select the current date, time, and daylight saving phase in your area, and
choose your preferred date and time format.
37
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.
3. Select Daylight Saving Time.
4. Select the setting that applies to your area:
• Winter: it is winter or your region does not use Daylight Saving Time (DST)
• Summer: it is spring or summer and your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST)
Note: If your region uses Daylight Saving Time (DST), you must change this setting to match the
season. When you change from Winter to Summer, your product automatically sets its clock ahead
one hour. When you change from Summer to Winter, it sets its clock back one hour.
5. Select Date/Time.
6. Select the date format you want to use.
7. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the current date and select OK.
8. Select the time format you want to use.
9. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the current time and select OK.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Selecting Your Country or Region
Before using your product, select the country or region in which you are using your product.
Note: You must have the optional fax board installed to see this setting. If you change the country or
region, your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select them again. This setting can be
locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for
assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Country/Region.
3. Scroll up or down, if necessary, and select your country or region.
You see a confirmation screen.
38
4. If the setting is correct, select Yes. (If not, select No and retry.)
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Changing LCD Screen Language
You can change the language used on the LCD screen.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Language.
3. Select a language.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds.
3. Select Mute to turn off all control panel sounds, then go to step 7.
4. Select Normal Mode or Quiet Mode to adjust control panel sounds.
Note: You can also select the icon on the home screen to adjust sounds.
5. Select Button Press.
6. Select to decrease or to increase the sound and select OK when you are finished.
7. Select the back arrow to exit.
Note: You can also adjust the Sound Type and the sound level for various product functions.
39
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Turning Off the Operation Time Out Setting
The Operation Time Out setting causes the LCD screen to return to the Home screen after a few minutes
of inactivity. This feature is enabled by default, but you can turn it off.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Operation Time Out.
3. Set Operation Time Out to Off.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Adjusting the Screen Brightness
You can adjust the brightness of the LCD screen.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > LCD Brightness.
3. Select the – or + icons to decrease or increase the brightness.
4. Select OK to exit.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Checking the Print Counter
You can check the total number of prints, black-and-white prints, and color prints that have been printed.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > Print Counter.
3. Select Print Sheet if you want to print out the counter results.
4. Press the home button to exit.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
40
Using Presets
You can save frequently used copy, fax (models equipped with the optional fax board), and scan settings
as presets. This lets you easily reuse them whenever necessary.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change presets, contact your
administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Presets.
3. Select Add New.
Note: You can save up to 50 presets.
4. Select the function for which you want to set up a preset, such as Copy.
5. Select the settings you want to save and select Save.
6. Select the Name field.
7. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a name for the preset and select OK.
8. When you are done confirming the settings, select OK.
When you copy, fax (models with optional fax board installed), or scan, you can use the preset by
selecting the icon and selecting your preset name from the list.
Parent topic: Using the Control Panel
Checking for Software Updates
It's a good idea to check Epson's support website occasionally for free updates to your product software.
Visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
and select your product.
Note: Your printer is designed to work only with genuine Epson-brand ink cartridges. Other brands of ink
cartridges and ink supplies are not compatible and, even if described as compatible, may not function
properly or at all. Epson periodically provides firmware updates to address issues of security,
performance, minor bug fixes and ensure the printer functions as designed. These updates may affect
the functionality of third-party ink. Non-Epson branded or altered Epson cartridges that functioned prior
to a firmware update may not continue to function.
41
• Windows: Your printer software automatically checks for updates. You can also manually update the
software by selecting Software Update here:
• Accessing the Windows Desktop and right-clicking the icon for your product in the right side of
the Windows taskbar, or clicking the up arrow and right-clicking .
• On the Maintenance tab in the printer settings window.
You can also update the software by selecting EPSON Software Updater in the EPSON or Epson
Software program group, accessible by the Start button, or on the Start or Apps screens, depending
on your version of Windows.
• OS X: You can manually update the software by opening the Applications > Epson Software folder
and selecting EPSON Software Updater.
• macOS 10.12.x to 14.x: You can manually update the software by opening the App Store, selecting
Updates, searching for a software update option for Epson Software, and selecting Update.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Using Power Saving Settings
Your product enters sleep mode automatically and turns off the LCD screen if it is not used for a period
of time. You can make the time period shorter and select other options to save energy and resources.
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
Parent topic: Product Basics
Changing the Sleep Timer Settings
You can adjust the time period before your product enters sleep mode and turns off the LCD screen.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sleep Timer.
Note: Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
42
3. Do one of the following:
• Select the – or + icon to decrease or increase the number of minutes.
• Select the number of minutes on the LCD screen, select the number of minutes from the on-
screen keypad, and select OK.
4. Select OK.
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Changing the Power Off Timer Settings
You can have the product turn off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of time.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Power Off Timer.
3. Select a time period between 30minutes and 12h (12 hours).
Parent topic: Using Power Saving Settings
Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Use your smartphone, tablet, or computer to print and scan documents, photos, emails, and web pages
from your home, office, or even across the globe.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
Print from anywhere with these Epson Connect solutions:
• Epson Email Print
• Epson Remote Print
Scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online service directly from your Epson product with
Epson Scan to Cloud.
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
43
Using Epson Email Print
Using Epson Remote Print
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
If you did not activate your product's email address for use with Epson Connect when you set up your
product, you can activate it using the product control panel.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Web Service Settings > Epson Connect Services.
3. Select Register.
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to activate your product's email address.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Email Print
With Epson Email Print, you can print from any device that can send email, such as your smartphone,
tablet, or laptop. Just activate your product's unique email address. When you want to print, attach a
PDF, Microsoft Office document, or photo to an email and send it to your product. Both the email and the
attachments will print automatically.
1. Connect your product to your network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up Email Print when you installed your product software, see the link below
to use your product control panel to activate your unique email address. Or visit epson.com/connect
(U.S.), epson.ca/connect (Canada), or latin.epson.com/connect (Latin America) to learn more about
Email Print, create your Epson Connect account, and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
3. Now you are ready to send and print emails to your product's Email Print address.
Note: Go to epsonconnect.com and log into your Epson Connect account to personalize your product's
email, adjust print settings, and set up other Epson Connect services.
44
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Remote Print
With Epson Remote Print software, you can print from your laptop or desktop computer to an Epson
Email-enabled product anywhere in the world.
1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below.
2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to learn more about Remote Print and how to download the Remote Print
Driver software.
4. Download and install the Remote Print software.
5. Enter the email address and optional access key of your Epson product during Remote Print setup.
6. Now you are ready to print remotely. Select the print command in your laptop or desktop computer
application and choose the Remote Print option for your Epson product.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
The Epson Scan to Cloud service allows you to scan and send a file as an email or upload it to an online
service directly from your Epson product. Register an email address or online services such as Box,
DropBox, Evernote, or Google Drive with your Epson Connect account.
1. Connect your Epson product to your network. See the link below.
45
2. If you did not already set up an Epson Connect account when you installed your product software,
visit epsonconnect.com to create your account and register your product to the Epson Connect
service.
Note: Make a note of your product's email address and password.
3. Visit epsonconnect.com to sign into your account with the email address and password you
selected.
4. Select your product, select Scan to Cloud, and select Destination List.
5. Click Add, then follow the instructions on the screen to create your destination list.
6. Now you are ready to use Scan to Cloud. Select the setting for scanning to Scan to Cloud on your
Epson product control panel.
Parent topic: Epson Connect Solutions for Smartphones, Tablets, and More
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Use this free Apple and Android app to set up and control your Epson product. Epson Smart Panel also
lets you check product status.
Note: App features may vary depending on your Epson product.
1. Visit epson.com/connect (U.S.), epson.ca/connect (Canada), or latin.epson.com/connect (Latin
America) to learn more about Epson Smart Panel and check the compatibility of your mobile device.
2. Download Epson Smart Panel from the Apple App Store or Google Play.
3. Do one of the following:
• If your Epson product is already connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to
the same network. Then open Epson Smart Panel and select your Epson product, if necessary.
• If your Epson product is not connected to a wireless network, connect your mobile device to the
network you want to use, then open Epson Smart Panel and follow the instructions to set up your
Epson product.
Now you are ready to control your Epson product with your mobile device.
46
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using AirPrint
AirPrint enables instant wireless printing from iPhone, iPad, iPod touch, and Mac without the need to
install drivers or download software.
Note: If you disabled paper configuration messages on your product control panel, you cannot use
AirPrint. See the link below to enable the messages, if necessary.
1. Load paper in your product.
2. Set up your product for wireless printing. See the link below.
3. Connect your Apple device to the same wireless network that your product is using.
4. Print from your device to your product.
Note: For details, see the AirPrint page on the Apple website.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related references
Paper Source Settings Options
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
47
Using the Mopria Print Service
Mopria Print Service enables printing to Mopria certified printers and multifunction printers from many
manufacturers. Mobile printing from your Android phone or tablet may be accomplished using the Mopria
Print Service app in the Google Play Store.
Note: For details and support on the Mopria Print Service, visit https://mopria.org.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Related topics
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
48
Using Mopria Scan
Mopria Scan enables scanning from Mopria certified multifunction printers and scanners from many
manufacturers. Mobile scanning from your Android phone or tablet may be accomplished using the
Mopria Scan app in the Google Play Store.
Note: For details and support on Mopria Scan, visit https://mopria.org.
Parent topic: Product Basics
Android Printing Using the Epson Print Enabler
You can wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web pages right from your Android phone
or tablet. With a few taps, your Android device will discover your nearby Epson product and print.
Note: Operations may differ depending on the device.
1. Connect your Epson product to your wireless network. See the link below.
2. On your Android device, download the Epson Print Enabler plug-in from Google Play.
3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and enable the Epson plug-in, if necessary.
4. Connect your Android device to the same wireless network as your product.
5. Now you are ready to print. From an Android application such as Chrome or Gmail, tap the menu
icon and print whatever is on the screen.
Note: If you do not see your product, tap All Printers and select your product.
Parent topic: Product Basics
50
Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
See these sections to use your product on a Wi-Fi or wired network.
Network Security Recommendations
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Printing a Network Connection Report
Network Security Recommendations
To help deter unauthorized access to your product over a network, you should protect your network
environment using appropriate security measures.
Security measures such as these can help deter threats such as loss of user data, use of telephone and
fax lines, and other intrusions:
• Enable security on your wireless LAN
Enable the appropriate security on the wireless LAN you plan to use with your product. Network
security such as a network password can deter interception of traffic over the wireless LAN. Your
router may already have a default password enabled by your Internet service provider (ISP). See your
ISP and router documentation for instructions on how to change the default password and better
secure your network.
• Connect your product only to a network protected by a firewall
Connecting your product directly to the Internet may leave it vulnerable to security threats. Instead,
connect it to a router or other network connection protected by a firewall. Your router may already
have a firewall set up by your Internet service provider; check with your ISP for confirmation. For best
results, set up and use a private IP address for your network connection.
• Change the default administrator password on your product
If your product has the option to set an administrator password, change the default administrator
password to deter access by unauthorized users to personal data stored on your product, such as IDs,
passwords, and contact lists.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Related tasks
Accessing the Web Config Utility
51
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config
Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate with your computer using a wireless router or access point.
The wireless router or access point can be connected to your computer over a wireless or wired network.
1 Epson product
2 Wireless router or access point
3 Computer with a wireless interface
4 Computer
5 Internet
6 Ethernet cable (used only for wired connection to the wireless router or access point)
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
52
Selecting Wireless Network Settings from the Control Panel
You can select or change wireless network settings using your product control panel.
To install your product on a wireless network, install the necessary software by downloading it from the
Epson website. The installer program guides you through network setup.
Note: This feature requires the optional wireless LAN interface.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select Router.
4. Select Start Setup or Change.
5. Select Wi-Fi Setup.
6. Select Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.
7. Select the name of your wireless network or select Enter Manually to enter the name manually. Use
the on-screen keyboard to enter your network name.
8. Select the Enter Password field and enter your wireless password using the on-screen keyboard.
Note: The network name and password are case sensitive. Be sure to correctly enter uppercase and
lowercase letters, and numeric or special characters.
• To move the cursor, press the left or right arrows.
• To change the case of letters, select Shift.
• To delete the previous character, select Back Space.
• To enter a space, select Space.
9. Select OK when you finish entering your password.
10. Confirm the displayed network settings and select Start Setup to save them.
A message appears when setup is complete.
53
11. If setup was unsuccessful, select Print Check Report to print a network setup report, or select Re-
enter to try again.
12. Press the home button to exit.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly
from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you
installed the network software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the icon, you may have selected the wrong network name or entered the
password incorrectly. Repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Infrastructure Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
You can set up your product to communicate directly with your computer or another device without
requiring a wireless router or access point. In Wi-Fi Direct Mode, the product itself acts as a network
access point for up to 8 devices.
Note: This feature requires the optional wireless LAN interface.
1 Epson product
2 Computer with a wireless interface
54
3 Other wireless device
Note: The product normally uses W52 (36ch) as the channel when connecting to Wi-Fi Direct (Simple
AP). Since the channel for wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) connection is selected automatically, the channel used
may differ when used at the same time as a Wi-Fi Direct connection. Sending data to the printer may be
delayed if the channels are different. If it does not interfere with use, connect to the SSID in the 2.4 GHz
band. In the 2.4 GHz frequency band, the channels used will match.
When setting the wireless LAN to 5 GHz, we recommend disabling Wi-Fi Direct.
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Enabling Wi-Fi Direct Mode
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct mode to allow direct communication between your product and computer or
other devices without a wireless router or access point.
Note: This feature requires the optional wireless LAN interface.
Note: This product normally uses W52 (36ch) as the channel when connecting to Wi-Fi Direct (Simple
AP). Since the channel for wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) connection is selected automatically, the channel used
may differ when used at the same time as a Wi-Fi Direct connection. Sending data to the printer may be
delayed if the channels are different. If it does not interfere with use, connect to the SSID in the 2.4 GHz
band. In the 2.4 GHz frequency band,the channels used will match. When setting the wireless LAN to 5
GHz, we recommend disabling Wi-Fi Direct.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Press the icon.
3. Select Wi-Fi Direct.
4. Select Start Setup.
5. Do one of the following:
• For iOS devices, select iOS. Scan the QR code with the camera app on your device and follow the
instructions on your device. Select Next on the LCD screen to verify the product information, then
55
open the Epson Smart Panel app on your device and select the product displayed on the LCD
screen. Select Complete on the LCD screen.
• For Android devices, select Android. Open the Epson Smart Panel app on your device and follow
the on-screen instructions. Select Complete on the LCD screen.
• For other types of devices, select Other OS Devices. Use your device to select the Wi-Fi network
name (SSID) displayed on the LCD screen, and enter the password shown. Select Next on the
LCD screen to verify the product information, then open the Epson Smart Panel app on your
device and select the product displayed on the LCD screen. Select Complete on the LCD screen.
Note: If you want to change the network name or password, or disable Wi-Fi Direct, select Change.
6. When you are finished, the Network Connection Settings screen returns.
You should see the number of connected devices (for example, 1/8).
7. Select the back arrow to return to the home screen.
The Wi-Fi Direct icon is displayed on the LCD screen and indicates if Wi-Fi Direct is enabled
on the product.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Related tasks
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Modifying the Wi-Fi Direct Network Name or Password
You can modify the Wi-Fi Direct name and password to create a more descriptive and secure Wi-Fi
Direct network.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select Wi-Fi Direct.
4. Select Start Setup.
5. Select Change.
6. Do one of the following:
• To change the Wi-Fi Direct network name, select Change Network Name, and select Yes. Select
Change, then use the on-screen keyboard to enter the new network name.
56
• To change the Wi-Fi Direct password, select Change Password, then select Yes. Use the on-
screen keyboard to enter your new Wi-Fi Direct password.
Note: Your password must be at least 8 and no more than 22 characters long.
Note: If you have already connected devices or computers to your product via Wi-Fi Direct, they will
be disconnected when you change the network name or password.
7. Use your computer or wireless device to select the Wi-Fi network name (SSID) displayed on the
LCD screen, then enter the password shown.
Note: Make a note of the SSID and password that appear.
8. Press the home button to return to the home screen.
Computers and wireless devices can now access the product using the new network name and
password.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Direct Mode Setup
Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
If your network uses a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can quickly connect your
product to the network using Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS).
Note: To check if your router is WPS-enabled, look for a button labeled WPS on your router or access
point. If there is no hardware button, there may be a virtual WPS button in the device's software. Check
your network product documentation for details.
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
If you have a WPS-enabled wireless router or access point, you can use Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) to
connect your product to the network.
Note: This feature requires the optional wireless LAN interface.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
57
2. Select the icon.
3. Select Router.
4. Select Start Setup or Change.
5. Select Wi-Fi Setup.
6. Select Push Button Setup (WPS).
7. Follow the instructions on the LCD screen to complete WPS setup.
Note: You must complete the on-screen instructions and select Start Setup within two minutes.
8. Press the home button to exit.
You see the icon on the LCD screen and should be able to connect to your product directly
from your computer or device, and then print. If you are printing from a computer, make sure you
installed the network software from the Epson website.
Note: If you don't see the icon, repeat these steps to try again.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Printing a Network Status Sheet
You can print a network status sheet to help you determine the causes of any problems you may have
using your product on a network.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status > Print Status Sheet.
3. Select Print.
Examine the settings shown on the network status sheet to diagnose any problems you have.
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Printing a Network Connection Report
You can print a network connection report to view solutions to any problems you may have using your
product on a network.
58
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check.
The product checks the network connection and displays the result.
3. Select Yes to print a network connection report.
Note: Select No or Close to return to the Network Settings menu without printing a report.
4. Select Print.
Examine the error codes and solutions shown on the network connection report.
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages
Parent topic: Wi-Fi or Wired Networking
Network Connection Report Codes and Messages
Check the error codes and messages on the network connection report to solve problems you may
encounter with network connections. The tables here list solutions to problems based on the error codes
and messages that may appear at the top of the report.
1 Error code
2 Message
Note: Error codes and messages listed here may not all apply to your product.
59
Error Codes and Messages
Error code and message Solution
E-1
Confirm that the network cable is
connected and network devices such as a
hub, router, or access point are turned on.
Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are
turned on, and the network cable is securely connected to
your device and your product.
If you are trying to set up Wi-Fi, remove the network cable
and set up Wi-Fi again. Ethernet and Wi-Fi cannot be
connected at the same time.
60
Error code and message Solution
E-2, E-3, or E-7
No wireless network names (SSID) found.
Confirm that the router/access point is
turned on and the wireless network (SSID)
is set up correctly. Contact your network
administrator for assistance.
No wireless network names (SSID) found.
Confirm that the wireless network name
(SSID) of the PC you wish to connect is set
up correctly. Contact your network
administrator for assistance.
Entered security key/password does not
match the one set for your router/access
point. Confirm security key/password.
Contact your network administrator for
assistance.
Check the following:
• Make sure your router or access point is turned on and
is correctly connected to your computer or network
device.
• Turn off the router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
• Move your product closer to your router or access point,
and remove any obstacles between them. Also move
your product away from devices such as wireless
phones or microwaves.
• Confirm that the SSID shown on the network
connection report matches the label on your router or
access point. Also make sure your SSID uses only
ASCII characters and symbols, or your product cannot
display the SSID correctly.
• If you are trying to connect using the WPS push button
method, make sure your router or access point supports
it.
• If you are using a network password, check the label on
your router or access point to confirm that you are using
the correct password, or check with your network
administrator or router/access point documentation.
• If you are connecting to a smart device that generates
an SSID, check the device documentation for the SSID
and password you should use.
• If your wireless connection suddenly disconnects, and
another smart device was added to the network using a
WPS push button method, or your network was set up
using a non-WPS push button method, try downloading
and installing your product software again.
61
Error code and message Solution
E-5
Security mode (e.g. WEP, WPA) does not
match the current setting of the printer.
Confirm security mode, and contact the
network administrator for assistance.
If the security on your router or access point is not one of
the following types, change the type of security on your
router or access point and reset your product's network
settings.
• WEP-64 bit (40 bit)
• WEP-128 bit (104 bit)
• WPA PSK (TKIP/AES); also known as WPA Personal
• WPA2 PSK (TKIP/AES); also known as WPA2 Personal
• WPA (TKIP/AES)
• WPA2 (TKIP/AES)
• WPA3-SAE (AES)
• WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
E-6
MAC address of your printer may be
filtered. Check whether your router/access
point has restrictions such as MAC address
filtering. See the documentation of the
router/access point or contact your network
administrator for assistance.
If your router or access point has MAC address filtering
enabled, register your product's MAC address so it is not
filtered. Locate the MAC address on the network
connection report and check your router or access point
documentation for instructions.
If your router or access point is using shared
authentication with WEP security, confirm that you are
using the correct authentication key and index.
If your router or access point limits the number of
connected devices, raise the connection limit. See your
router or access point documentation for instructions.
E-8
Incorrect IP address is assigned to the
printer. Confirm IP address setup of the
network device (hub, router, or access
point). Contact your network administrator
for assistance.
If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to Auto,
enable DHCP on your router or access point. If it is set to
Manual, the IP address may be out of range or on a
different network segment; set a valid IP address using
your product control panel or the Web Config utility.
You can also try turning off your product and the router or
access point, waiting about 10 seconds, and turning them
on again.
62
Error code and message Solution
E-9
Confirm the connection and network setup
of the PC or other device. Connection using
the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact
your network administrator for assistance.
Make sure your computer or network device are turned
on. Also make sure that you can access the Internet and
other devices on the same network from the devices you
are trying to connect to your product.
If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your
router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it
on again. Download and install your product software
again to reset your network settings.
E-10
Confirm IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway setup. Connection using
the EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact
your network administrator for assistance.
Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and
do the following:
• If your product's Obtain IP Address setting is set to
Manual, check the IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway addresses on the network connection
report to see if they are correct. If not, correct the
settings.
• If DHCP is enabled, set your product's Obtain IP
Address setting to Auto. If you want to use the DHCP-
assigned address as a static address, set the Obtain IP
Address setting to Manual, enter the product's IP
address as listed on the network connection report, and
set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.
If you still cannot connect to your product, turn off your
router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and turn it
on again.
E-11
Setup is incomplete. Confirm default
gateway setup. Connection using the
EpsonNet Setup is available. Contact your
network administrator for assistance.
If you set your product's TCP/IP Setup setting to Manual,
check that the default gateway address listed on the
network connection report is correct. Also turn on the
device that is set as the default gateway.
63
Error code and message Solution
E-12
Confirm the following:
-Entered security key/password is correct
-Index of the security key/password is set to
the first number
-IP address, subnet mask, or default
gateway setup is correct
Contact your network administrator for
assistance.
Make sure other devices on the network are turned on and
do the following:
• Make sure the IP address, subnet mask, and default
gateway addresses are correct, if you are entering them
manually.
• Confirm that the subnet mask and default gateway
addresses for other devices are the same.
• Make sure the IP address does not conflict with other
devices.
If you still cannot connect to your product, do the
following:
• Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
• Download and install your product software again to
reset your network settings.
• If your router or access point uses WEP security with
several registered passwords, make sure that the first
registered password is set on your product.
E-13
Confirm the following:
-Entered security key/password is correct
-Index of the security key/password is set to
the first number
-Connection and network setup of the PC
or other device is correct
Contact your network administrator for
assistance.
Make sure your router, access point, and/or hub are
turned on. Also make sure the TCP/IP setup on your
router, access point, and/or hub is not set manually; this
may cause your product's network settings to differ from
the manually set up devices.
If you still cannot connect to your product, do the
following:
• Turn off your router or access point, wait about 10
seconds, and turn it on again.
• Download and install your product software again to
reset your network settings.
• If your router or access point uses WEP security with
several registered passwords, make sure that the first
registered password is set on your product.
64
Network Environment Messages
Message Solution
The Wi-Fi environment needs to be
improved. Turn the wireless router off and
then turn it on. If the connection does not
improve, see the documentation for the
wireless router.
Move your product closer to your router or access point,
and remove any obstacles between them. Then turn off
your router or access point, wait about 10 seconds, and
turn it back on again. If you still cannot connect to your
product, check the documentation that came with your
router or access point for solutions.
*No more devices can be connected.
Disconnect one of the connected devices if
you want to add another one.
You can connect up to 8 computers or other devices to
your product using a Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection.
If you want to add another device, disconnect an existing
connected device first.
The same SSID as Wi-Fi Direct exists in
the environment. Change the Wi-Fi Direct
SSID if you cannot connect a smart device
to the printer.
Change the Wi-Fi Direct SSID. You can change the
network name after "DIRECT-XX-". The custom name
must be 22 characters or less.
Parent topic: Printing a Network Connection Report
65
Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript
Printing
Before enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript printing on your product, make sure
you have installed the software from the Epson website.
To download the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript drivers, visit epson.com/support (U.S.),
epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet
Installing the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
The Epson Universal Print Driver supports multiple printer languages, such as PCL and ESC/P-R, and
can be installed on a Windows computer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software. Depending on your model, not all printer languages may be supported.
1. To download the Printer Driver - PCL6 file, visit epson.com/support (U.S), epson.ca/support
(Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
66
3. Follow the on-screen instructions until you see this screen:
4. Select Yes: Network connection and click OK.
Note: Select the Set Default of Printer Control Language to PCL6 checkbox if you want to set the
default printer language to PCL6. Leave this option deselected to set the printer language to ESC/P-
R. (You can change this setting later as needed.)
67
After the software finishes searching for products, you see a screen like this:
5. Do one of the following:
• If you are installing one product, make sure Add EPSON Universal Print Driver is selected and
continue with the next step.
• If you are installing more than one product, select Add found printers and go to step 9.
Note: You can customize and filter your product search results by clicking Display Settings.
68
6. Open the Select a port to connect a printer menu and select an existing printer port, if necessary.
Otherwise, skip this option to create a new port automatically.
7. Select the product you want to install from the Found Printers list.
Note: Deselect the Set as default printer checkbox if you do not want the product to be set as your
default printer.
8. Click OK, then skip the remaining steps.
9. If you are installing more than one product, select the products from the Found Printers list and click
Add to Printer Folder.
69
The selected products appear in the lower section of the screen.
10. Select the checkbox next to the product you want to make your default printer, if necessary.
11. Click OK.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software or Epson Universal Print Driver, you need to
install the PostScript (PS3) printer software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your
network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software.
1. To download the Printer Driver - Postscript 3 file, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support
(Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
3. Click OK.
4. Click Accept.
5. Click Install.
6. Click Next and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Installing the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
If you did not install the standard Epson printer software, you need to install the PostScript (PS3) printer
software before you can adjust the print settings and print to your network printer.
Note: Make sure your product is turned on and connected to the same network as your computer before
installing the printer software.
1. To download the Drivers and Utilities Combo Package - PS3 PostScript file, visit
epson.com/support (U.S), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
and select your product.
2. After downloading the installer file, double-click the downloaded file to install the software.
70
3. Double-click EPSON.
4. Click Continue on the next two screens.
5. Click Agree.
6. Click Install or Continue.
7. If necessary, enter the administrator password.
8. Click Start and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
You can select settings for PCL and PostScript printing using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > PDL Print Configuration.
3. Select the PDL print configuration options you want to use from the available menus.
4. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
PDL Print Configuration Options
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
PDL Print Configuration Options
Select the PDL Print Configuration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing.
PDL Print Configuration
option
Available
settings
Description
Common Settings
Paper Size Various sizes Sets the default paper size for PCL or PostScript
printing
Paper Type Various paper
types
Sets the default paper type for PCL or PostScript
printing
71
PDL Print Configuration
option
Available
settings
Description
Orientation Portrait Sets the default orientation for PCL or PostScript
printing
Landscape
Quality Draft Sets the quality for PCL or PostScript printing
Standard
Ink Save Mode Off Saves ink by reducing print density
On
Print Order Last Page on
Top
Starts printing from the first page of a file
First Page on
Top
Starts printing from the last page of a file
Number of Copies 1 to 999 Selects the number of copies to print
Binding Margin Left Edge Specifies the binding edge for double-sided documents
Top Edge
Auto Paper Ejection Off Ejects paper automatically when printing is stopped
during a print job
On
2-Sided Printing Off Selects duplex printing
On
PCL Menu
Font Source Resident Uses a font preinstalled on the printer
Download Uses a font you have downloaded
Font Number 0 to 65535 Selects the default font number for the default font
source
Pitch 0.44 to 99.99 cpi Selects the default font pitch if the font is scalable and
fixed-pitch (availability depends on font source and
number settings)
Height 4.00 to 999.75 pt Selects the default font height if the font is scalable and
proportional (availability depends on font source and
number settings)
72
PDL Print Configuration
option
Available
settings
Description
Symbol Set Various Selects the default symbol set. If the selected font is not
available for the selected symbol set, the font source
and number are replaced with IBM-US (the default
setting).
Form 5 to 128 lines Sets the number of lines for the selected paper size and
orientation. Changes the line spacing (VMI) stored in
the printer. Later changes in page size or orientation
cause changes in the Form value based on the stored
VMI.
CR Function CR Selects the line feed command when printing with a
driver from a specific operating system
CR+LF
LF Function LF
CR+LF
Paper Source Assign 4 Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4
4K Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 4000, 5000, and 8000
5S Makes the paper source select command compatible
with HP LaserJet 5S
PS Menu
Error Sheet Off Prints a sheet showing the status when errors occur
during PostScript or PDF printing
On
Coloration (AM-
C4000/AM-C5000/AM-
C6000)
Color Selects the color mode for PostScript printing
Mono
Binary Off Enable when printing files that contain binary images
(available when the product is connected to the
network). Allows you to print binary images even if the
driver is set to ASCII.
On
73
PDL Print Configuration
option
Available
settings
Description
PDF Page Size Various sizes Selects the paper size when printing a PDF file. If Auto
is selected, the paper size is determined based on the
size of the first page.
Parent topic: Selecting PDL (Page Description Language) Settings
Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
You can select printer language and interface settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Printing Language.
3. Select the printing language and interface options for your connection type.
4. When you are finished, press the home button to return to the Home screen.
Printing Language and Interface Options
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
Printing Language and Interface Options
Select the printing language and interface options you want to use.
Main Printer Settings menu
Option Available
settings
Description
PC Connection via USB Enable Select whether to allow USB communication with the
product
Disable
74
Option Available
settings
Description
USB I/F Timeout Setting 0, or 5 to 300
seconds
Specify the length of time before ending USB
communication from a computer using the PCL or
PostScript driver. This setting is necessary to avoid
endless USB communication. If you do not want USB
communication to timeout, enter 0.
Memory Device Enable Select whether to allow the product to access an
inserted memory device. When disabled, the product
can neither read or print data from the device, nor save
data to the device.
Disable
Printing Language menu
Option Available
settings
Description
USB Auto
PCL
PS
PDF
ESC/Page
Select the language for the USB or network interface
Network
Additional Network
(only available with the
optional LAN interface)
Parent topic: Selecting Printer Language and Interface Settings
Printing a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) Status Sheet
You can print a PCL or PS3 (PostScript) status sheet to confirm the current font information.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > Printer Status/Print > Print Status Sheet.
3. Select PS Font List or PCL Font List.
4. Select Print to print the status sheet.
Parent topic: Enabling Epson Universal Print Driver (PCL) or PostScript Printing
75
Loading Paper
Before you print, load paper for the type of printing you will do.
Loading Paper in the Cassettes and Paper Tray
Using the Optional Paper Cassette Lock
Paper Loading Capacity
Double-sided Printing
Compatible Epson Papers (U.S. and Canada)
Compatible Epson Papers (Latin America)
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Loading Paper in the Cassettes and Paper Tray
You can load paper up to 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm) or A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm]) in
the paper cassettes and 12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm) in the paper tray. The paper tray can
accommodate user-defined paper sizes from 2.2 × 5.5 inches (55 × 140 mm) to 11.7 × 47.2 inches (297
× 1200 mm) for single-sided printing. The paper tray can accommodate user-defined paper sizes from to
5.5 × 7.2 inches (139.7 × 182 mm) to 11.7 × 17 inches (297 × 431.8 mm) for double-sided printing.
You can view instructions on how to load paper in the cassettes or paper tray on the control panel.
Note: If you cannot smoothly open or close the paper tray, make sure to hold the center of the paper tray
when extending or retracting it.
1. Select the icon on the LCD screen.
2. Select How to > Load paper.
3. Select one of the options.
4. Select How To.
5. Select the icon to scroll through the paper loading instructions.
76
6. If necessary, select Close and then select the icon and select the size and type of paper you
loaded on the LCD screen.
Note: If the Paper Size Auto Detect setting is enabled, your product will automatically detect the
size of the paper you loaded. To select a user-defined paper size, disable the Paper Size Auto
Detect setting.
Always follow these paper loading guidelines:
• Load only the recommended number of sheets.
• Load the printable side face up.
• Load letterhead or pre-printed paper top edge first.
• Do not load paper above the arrow mark inside the edge guides.
• Insert and remove paper cassettes slowly.
• Load pre-punched paper with the punched side toward you. Loading pre-punched paper in an
incorrect direction can cause paper jams or smears inside the product. Make sure the Prepunched
setting is set to On in the product's paper settings.
• Check the paper package for any additional loading instructions.
Caution: Do not use the following papers; they may cause paper jams, smears on the printout, or
damage to the printer.
• Papers that are wavy or damp
• Papers that have not dried after printing on one side
• Papers that are wadded or curled
• Papers that are torn, cut, or folded
• Papers that are too thick or thin
• Preprinted papers printed by other inkjet printers, thermal transfer printers, page printers, or copiers
• Papers that are perforated
• Papers that have stickers
• Papers held together with tape, staples, or paper clips
• Envelopes with adhesive surfaces or windows
Paper Loading Orientation
77
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Paper Loading Orientation
When loading non-standard papers into the product, use the following guidelines:
Envelopes
• Paper tray: Load envelopes into the paper tray with the short edge first and the printable side facing
down. Align the edge guides with the edges of the envelopes. You can load up to 10 envelopes at
once.
78
• Paper cassette: Load envelopes into the paper cassette with the printable side facing up. Align the
edge guides with the edges of the envelopes. You can load up to 30 envelopes at once.
Pre-punched paper
Set your margins so you do not print over the holes in the paper. You cannot print in the area 0.67 inches
(17 mm) from the pre-punched edge of the paper.
79
Note: Make sure you enable the Prepunched setting on the paper settings screen on the control panel.
You may have to select the icon to display the settings screen.
• Paper tray: Load pre-punched paper into the paper tray with the holes facing the front of the product
and the printable side facing down. Align the edge guides with the edges of the envelopes.
80
• Paper cassette: Load pre-punched paper into the paper tray with the holes facing the front of the
product and the printable side facing up.
Pre-printed paper (single-sided printing)
81
Note: Make sure you enable the Preprinted setting on the paper settings screen on the control panel.
You may have to select the icon to display the settings screen.
• Paper tray: When printing on only one side of the paper, load pre-printed paper into the paper tray
with the printable side facing down. Align the edge guides with the edges of the paper.
82
• Paper cassette: When printing on only one side of the paper, load pre-printed paper into the paper
cassette with the printable side facing up. Align the edge guides with the edges of the paper.
83
Pre-printed paper (double-sided printing)
• Paper tray: When printing on both sides of pre-printed paper, load the paper into the paper tray with
the first page to be printed facing up. Align the edge guides with the edges of the paper.
84
• Paper cassette: When printing on both sides of pre-printed paper, load the paper into the paper
cassette with the first page to be printed facing down. Align the edge guides with the edges of the
paper.
Long paper
When loading long paper, load a single sheet in the paper tray with the printable side facing down. Set
the Paper Size Auto Detect setting to Off and select User-Defined as the paper size.
• If paper falls from the face-down tray, prepare a box or similar receptacle to make sure the paper does
not touch the floor.
• Do not touch the paper as it is being ejected. This could injure your hand or cause print quality to
decline.
85
• When loading long paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper while holding it.
Parent topic: Loading Paper in the Cassettes and Paper Tray
Using the Optional Paper Cassette Lock
You can use the optional paper cassette lock to keep the paper cassettes locked. You will need a
padlock that can fit through the hole in the paper cassette lock. Make sure you keep the key in a safe
place.
Note: If you also want to lock the optional dual cassette, you will need a second paper cassette lock and
padlock.
You can purchase genuine Epson accessories at epson.com (U.S. sales) or epson.ca (Canadian sales).
You can also purchase accessories from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-
GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
86
1. Remove the seals from the paper cassettes.
2. Insert the paper cassette lock into the slots.
88
Related references
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper Cassettes
The table below shows the paper cassette capacity for paper in the following sizes unless noted
otherwise:
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]), Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]), Legal (8.5 × 14
inches [216 × 356 mm]), Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]), A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]), A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]), B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]), B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches
[353 × 250 mm])
• Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]), Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm), 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• User-defined (3.3 × 5.5 inches to 11.7 × 17 inches [85 × 140 mm to 297 × 431.8 mm])
Paper type Loading capacity
Plain paper
Pre-printed paper
Letterhead paper
Colored paper
Recycled paper
High quality plain paper
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (500
sheets)
Card Stock 1 (25 to 28 lb [91
to 105 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (400
sheets)
Card Stock 2 (29 to 36 lb [106
to 135 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (350
sheets)
Card Stock 3 (37 to 42 lb [136
to 160 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (200
sheets)
89
Paper type Loading capacity
Card Stock 4 (43 to 66 lb [161
to 250 g/m
2
])
Extra Thick Paper (67 to 80 lb
[251 to 300 g/m
2
])
125 sheets
Epson Bright White Premium
Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus
Paper
500 sheets:
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Epson Bright White Pro Paper 500 sheets:
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Envelopes 30
Paper Tray
The table below shows the paper tray capacity for paper in the following sizes unless noted otherwise.
Note: For paper longer than 17 inches (432.1 mm), load one sheet at a time.
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]), Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm]), Legal (8.5 × 14
inches [216 × 356 mm]), Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]), A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]), A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm]), B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]), B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches
[353 × 250 mm])
• Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm]), Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm), 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
• User-defined (2.2 × 5.5 inches to 11.7 × 47.2 inches [55 × 140 mm to 297 × 1200 mm])
90
Paper type Loading capacity
Plain paper
Pre-printed paper
Letterhead paper
Colored paper
Recycled paper
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (150
sheets)
Card Stock 1 (25 to 28 lb [91
to 105 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (120
sheets)
Card Stock 2 (29 to 36 lb [106
to 135 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (100
sheets)
Card Stock 3 (37 to 42 lb [136
to 160 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (80
sheets)
Card Stock 4 (43 to 66 lb [161
to 250 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (50
sheets)
Extra Thick Paper (67 to 80 lb
[251 to 300 g/m
2
])
Up to the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide (40
sheets)
Epson Bright White Premium
Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus
Paper
150 sheets:
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Epson Bright White Pro Paper 150 sheets:
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Epson Ultra Premium
Presentation Paper Matte
20 sheets:
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
13 × 19 inches (330 × 483 mm)
91
Paper type Loading capacity
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
20 sheets:
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
Epson High Quality Ink Jet
Paper
Epson Presentation Paper
Matte
50 sheets:
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
100 sheets:
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
Envelopes 10
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Double-sided Printing
You can print double-sided on the following papers:
• Plain paper
• Pre-printed paper
• Letterhead paper
• Colored paper
• Recycled paper
• High quality plain paper
• Thick paper (up to 66 lb ([250 g/m
2
])
• Epson Bright White Pro Paper
• Epson Bright White Premium Paper
• Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper
• Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Double-sided
92
Note: You can print double-sided on any supported sizes except the following:
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
• 12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
To print double-sided with a user-defined size, the dimensions of the paper must have a width between
5.5 and 7.4 inches (139.7 to 189 mm) and a length between 11.6 and 17 inches (297 to 431.8 mm).
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Compatible Epson Papers (U.S. and Canada)
You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales) or epson.ca (Canadian
sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest one, call
800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count
Epson Bright White Pro Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041586 500
Epson Bright White Premium
Paper
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S450218-4 500
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S450217-4 500
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041111 100
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm])
S041117 100
Epson Presentation Paper Matte Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041062 100
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm) S041467 50
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041257
S042180
50
100
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041260 50
93
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte Double-sided
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041568 50
Epson Ultra Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041341
S041914
50
250
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041343 50
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Compatible Epson Papers (Latin America)
You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest
reseller, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest Epson sales office.
Paper Type Size Part number Sheet count
Epson Bright White Pro Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041586 500
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041111 100
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm])
S041117 100
Epson Presentation Paper Matte 13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041069-L 100
Epson Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm])
S041257-ML 50
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041263 50
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])
S041260 50
Epson Ultra Premium Presentation
Paper Matte
13 × 19 inches
(330 × 483 mm)
S041339
S041605
50
100
Parent topic: Loading Paper
94
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
For this paper Select this paper Type or Media Type setting
Plain paper (16 to 20 lb [60 to 75 g/m
2
])
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
Epson Bright White Premium Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper
Plain Paper 1
Plain paper (20 to 24 lb [76 to 90 g/m
2
]) Plain Paper 2
Letterhead paper Letterhead
Recycled paper Recycled
Colored paper Color
Pre-printed paper Preprinted
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper High quality plain paper
Thin paper (14 to 16 lb [52 to 59 g/m
2
]) Thin paper
Thick paper (25 to 28 lb [91 to 105 g/m
2
]) Card Stock 1
Thick paper (29 to 36 lb [106 to 135 g/m
2
]) Card Stock 2
Thick paper (37 to 42 lb [136 to 160 g/m
2
]) Card Stock 3
Thick paper (43 to 66 lb [161 to 250 g/m
2
]) Card Stock 4
Envelopes Envelope
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Ultra Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Matte
Note: The settings listed here are available only when printing from your computer; they do not apply to
your product's control panel settings.
Parent topic: Loading Paper
95
Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
You can change the default paper size and paper type for each source using the control panel on the
product.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select the paper source you want to select settings for.
3. Select Paper Size.
4. Select the paper size you loaded.
5. Select Paper Type.
6. Select the paper type for the paper you loaded.
7. Enable the Prepunched setting if you are using pre-punched paper.
8. To automatically detect the size of paper loaded in the paper source, select the Paper Size Auto
Detect field to turn this setting on.
9. Select Close.
10. Select another paper source to change or press the home button to exit.
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Paper Type Settings - Control Panel
Select a Paper Type setting that matches the paper you loaded.
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting
Plain paper
Epson Bright White Pro Paper
Epson Bright White Premium Paper
Epson Multipurpose Plus Paper
Plain Paper 1 (60-75g/m2)
Plain Paper 2 (76-90g/m2)
Letterhead paper Letterhead
Recycled paper Recycled
Colored paper Color
Pre-printed paper Preprinted
96
Paper type loaded Paper Type setting
Epson High Quality Ink Jet Paper High Quality Plain Paper
Thick paper up to 25 to 28 lb (91 to 105 g/m
2
) Card Stock 1 (91-105g/m2)
Thick paper up to 29 to 36 lb (106 to 135 g/m
2
) Card Stock 2 (106-135g/m2)
Thick paper up to 37 to 42 lb (136 to 160 g/m
2
) Card Stock 3 (136-160g/m2)
Thick paper up to 43 to 66 lb (161 to 250 g/m
2
) Card Stock 4 (161-250g/m2)
Thick paper up to 67 to 90 lb (251 to 350 g/m
2
) Extra Thick Paper
Envelopes Envelope
Epson Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Epson Ultra Premium Presentation Paper Matte
Matte
Epson Premium Presentation Paper Matte Double-
sided
Double-Sided Photo Quality Inkjet
Parent topic: Selecting the Paper Settings for Each Source - Control Panel
Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
As an administrator, you can adjust default paper settings that apply to all print jobs sent to the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
Selecting the Default Printer Settings
Selecting the Universal Print Settings
Parent topic: Loading Paper
Selecting the Default Printer Settings
You can change default printer settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
97
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings.
3. Select an Auto Error Solver setting:
• Select On to display a warning and print single-sided when a 2-sided printing error occurs, or to
print only what the printer could process when a full memory error occurs.
• Select Off to display an error message and stop printing if an error occurs.
4. Select Paper Source Settings.
5. Select the options you want to use.
6. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
Paper Source Settings Options
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Paper Source Settings Options
Select the paper source options you want to use for your print jobs.
Paper Source
Settings option
Available settings Description
Paper Setting Various Select the paper size and type for each paper source.
Paper Tray
Priority
On Select On to give printing priority to paper loaded in the
paper tray.
Off
A4/Letter Auto
Switching
On Select On to switch the selected paper size to match the
loaded paper (Letter or A4) if the wrong size is selected.
Off
Auto Select
Settings
Copy Select On for any of these settings to automatically print on
paper from any source containing paper that matches your
paper settings.
Fax
Other
Automatic
Selection at
Paper Out: For
Copy/Storage
Printing
On Select On to feed paper automatically from another source
with the same paper settings when copying or printing from
storage. The alternate source must be enabled in the Auto
Select Settings setting.
Off
98
Paper Source
Settings option
Available settings Description
Error Notice Paper Size Notice Select On for either of these settings to display an error
message when the selected paper type or size does not
match the loaded paper.
Paper Type Notice
Paper Setup
Auto Display
On Select On to automatically display a menu that lets you
select the paper size and type when you load paper in the
product.
Note: If this setting is disabled, you cannot print using
AirPrint.
Off
User-Defined
Paper Size List
20 settings Enter a user-defined paper size setting.
Parent topic: Selecting the Default Printer Settings
Selecting the Universal Print Settings
You can change the default universal print settings using the control panel on the product.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Universal Print Settings.
3. Adjust the settings as necessary.
4. When you are finished, press the home button to exit.
Universal Print Settings Options
Parent topic: Selecting Default Paper Settings - Administrator
Universal Print Settings Options
Select the universal print setting options you want to use for your print jobs.
99
Universal Print
Settings option
Available settings Description
Top Offset — Adjust the top or left margin.
Left Offset
Top Offset in
Back
— Adjust the top or left margin of the back page when printing
double-sided.
Left Offset in
Back
Skip Blank Page On Select On to skip printing of blank pages automatically.
Off
Job Separation On Select On to separate printed copies by job.
Off
Rotate Sort* On Select On to rotate each copy when printing multiple copies.
Off
Insert Sheets per
User
On Select On to insert a blank sheet between copies or print
jobs sent to the printer from the printer driver. Select the
paper source you want the sheets to come from.
Off
Color Correction
(AM-C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-
C6000)
On Select On to adjust settings such as brightness, contrast,
saturation, and more.
Off
* Not displayed when the optional finisher unit is installed.
Parent topic: Selecting the Universal Print Settings
100
Placing Originals on the Product
Follow the instructions here to place your original documents or photos on the product.
Caution: Do not place anything on top of your product or use its cover as a writing surface to avoid
damaging it.
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
You can place originals up to this size on the scanner glass: A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm]) or
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm).
Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in
the ADF.
1. Press the help button and select How To > Place Originals > Scanner Glass.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution: Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers when opening or closing the document cover.
Do not push down on the document cover or scanner glass or you may damage the product.
Note: If there is any dust or dirt on the scanner glass, the scanning range may expand to include it,
so the image of the original may be displaced or reduced. Use a soft, dry, clean cloth to remove any
dust and dirt on the scanner glass before scanning. When placing bulky originals such as books,
prevent exterior light from shining directly onto the scanner glass.
Note: The edges of your original may be cropped by 0.06 inch (1.5 mm) from the edge of the
scanner glass. Manually position your original away from the edges to prevent cropping.
Remove your originals after scanning. If you leave the originals on the scanner glass for a long time, they
may stick to the glass surface.
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
101
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
You can place single- or multi-page original documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF). You
can also use the ADF to scan both sides of a 2-sided document. Make sure the originals meet the
Automatic Document Feeder specifications before loading them.
Caution: Do not load the following types of originals in the ADF, or they may be damaged or may
damage the scanner. Use the scanner glass for these types:
• Ripped, curled, folded, deteriorated, or wrinkled originals
• Originals with holes
• Originals containing staples or paper clips
• Originals with carbon paper backing
• Originals with labels, stickers, or sticky notes
• Originals that are bound
• Originals that are cut irregularly or not cut at a right angle
• Photos or valuable artwork
• Thermal paper
• Transparencies
• Fabric or other non-paper originals
• Originals with uneven surfaces, such as embossed documents
• Originals with wet ink
Note: When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in
the ADF.
Note: Do not load originals above the line under the triangle symbol on the ADF edge guide. Do not load
originals while scanning.
1. Select the icon and select How To > Place Originals > ADF.
Parent topic: Placing Originals on the Product
102
Copying
See the information here to copy documents or photos using your product.
Note: Copies may not be exactly the same size as your originals.
Copying Documents or Photos
Copying Special Originals
Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
Copying Options
Saving Groups for Copying
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group for Copying
Omitting Red Characters in Originals When Copying
Copying Documents or Photos
You can copy documents or photos onto various sizes and types of paper, including Epson special
papers.
1. Load the paper you want to print on.
2. Place your original document or photo on the scanner glass, or place multi-page documents in the
ADF.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Copy.
5. To print more than one copy, select Copies and use the on-screen keyboard to enter the number of
copies.
Note: If you want to print copies using a saved group, select Advanced and then select Print Sets.
Select the group you want to use and select OK. The Print Sets feature requires a registered
license key.
6. Change any of the displayed settings as necessary.
• To create double-sided copies of your originals, select 2-sided and select either 1>2-sided or
2>2-sided.
• To enlarge or reduce your original, select Reduce/Enlarge and select settings as necessary.
103
• To copy multiple originals onto a single sheet, select Multi-Page > 2-up or 4-up, then specify the
layout order and the orientation of the original.
• To output your originals in page order, select Finishing > Collate (Page Order).
7. Select Advanced to view and change additional copy settings, if necessary. If you would like to
remove shadows or punch holes from your copies, enable the Remove Shadow or Remove Punch
Holes settings.
Note: To save the copied image to the product's internal storage, select File Storing and enable the
File Storing setting. Change any of the displayed settings as needed.
Note: If there is an image at the hole punch position, select Binding Margin and set a binding
margin of 0.71 inch (18 mm) before copying. If you set a binding margin, you can select Binding
Width, Reduce to Fit Paper, or Erase Image Over Margin to adjust your image accordingly.
8. Select Preview to preview your copy on the LCD screen.
Note: If you are printing multiple copies, you can enable the Proof Copy setting from the Advanced
tab to print one copy for confirmation before printing the rest.
9. Select the icon to save your copy settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact
your administrator for assistance.
10. When you are ready to copy, select the Copy icon.
Note: To cancel printing, select Cancel on the LCD screen, then select Cancel Copy to confirm.
Parent topic: Copying
Copying Special Originals
You can copy various originals, such as an ID card, book, or envelope using the scanner glass.
1. Place your original on the scanner glass.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
104
4. Depending on the type of original, do one of the following:
• To copy both sides of an ID card, select Advanced > ID Card Copy. Specify the orientation of the
card.
• To scan two facing pages of a book, select Advanced > Book>2Pages. Enable the setting and
specify the scan order.
• To copy an envelope, place the envelope on the scanner glass as shown, and make sure you
have envelopes loaded in the correct orientation.
5. To print more than one copy, select Copies and use the displayed numeric keypad to select the
number of copies.
6. Change any of the displayed settings as necessary.
105
7. When you are ready to copy, select the icon.
Note: To cancel printing, select Cancel on the LCD screen, then select Cancel Copy to confirm.
8. If you are copying an ID card, follow the on-screen instructions to copy the back of the ID.
Parent topic: Copying
Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
See the information here to sort and assemble documents into booklets using your product's finishing
options.
Note: Some finishing options require optional equipment that may or may not be installed with your
product.
Copying and Creating Booklets
Copying and Creating Finished Booklets
Creating Folded, Stapled, or Punched Copies
Stacking Copies Using Orientation
Stacking Copies Using Offset
Inserting Slipsheets
Parent topic: Copying
Copying and Creating Booklets
You can use your copied originals to create booklets. You can also add front and back covers to the
booklet.
106
Note: If you do not have the optional finishing equipment installed on your machine, you will have to
manually fold and staple your booklets.
1. Place your originals on the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
4. Select Basic Settings and then select Paper Setting and select the paper source for your copies.
5. Select 2-Sided and then select either 2>2-Sided or 1>2-Sided depending on your originals.
6. Select other settings such as the original orientation and the binding position and then select OK.
7. If necessary, select Reduce/Enlarge and make any adjustments.
8. Select the Advanced tab and enable the Booklet > Booklet setting.
9. Specify the binding position and binding margin.
10. If you want to add covers to the booklet, enable the Cover setting.
11. Select Paper Setting and select the paper source for the covers, then select Front Cover and Back
Cover and specify the print settings. Select Do not Print if you do not want a front or back cover.
12. When you are ready to copy, select the Copy icon.
Parent topic: Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
107
Copying and Creating Finished Booklets
You can create folded and stapled booklets using your product, depending on the installed options. You
can also add front and back covers to the booklet.
Note: This feature requires the optional staple finisher and saddle unit.
1. Place your originals on the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
4. Select Basic Settings and then select Paper Setting and select the paper source for your copies.
5. Select 2-Sided and then select either 2>2-Sided or 1>2-Sided depending on your originals.
6. Select other settings such as the original orientation and the binding position and then select OK.
7. If necessary, select Reduce/Enlarge and make any adjustments.
8. Select the Advanced tab and enable the Booklet > Booklet setting.
9. Specify the binding position and binding margin and select OK.
10. If you want to add covers to the booklet, enable the Cover setting.
11. Select either Saddle Stitch or Half Fold and enable the setting.
108
12. Select other settings such as the number of sheets per fold or staple.
13. When you are ready to copy, select the Copy icon.
Note: Make sure there are no booklets or paper in the booklet output tray or you will not be able to
start printing.
Parent topic: Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
Creating Folded, Stapled, or Punched Copies
You can add folds, staples, or punch holes to your copies.
Note: You will need the following installed accessories depending on your output:
• Folded copies: Staple finisher and saddle unit
• Stapled copies: Inner or staple finisher
• Punched copies: Inner or staple finisher and punch unit
1. Place your originals on the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
4. Select Basic Settings and then select Paper Setting and select the paper source for your copies.
5. Do one of the following:
• To fold your copies, select the Advanced tab and select Fold, then enable the Half Fold or Tri
Fold setting. Specify the details such as the number of sheets per fold.
• To staple your copies, select Finishing > Staple and select the staple position.
Note: You can also manually staple your copies with the optional staple finisher.
• To add punch holes to your copies, select Finishing > Punch and select the punch hole location.
Note: Adjust the print data so that you do not print at the punch location. This can cause a punch
failure or a paper jam. Select Advanced > Binding Margin and make sure the binding width is at
least 0.73 inches (18.5 mm).
6. When you are ready to copy, select the Copy icon.
109
Parent topic: Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
Stacking Copies Using Orientation
You can sort and stack your output by alternately rotating each copy by 90 degrees.
Note: Rotated stacking is not available if the staple finisher is installed.
1. Place your originals on the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
4. Select Basic Settings > Finishing > Eject Paper > Rotate Sort.
5. Check the following settings:
• This feature uses two paper sources. Load paper in portrait orientation in one source, and in
landscape orientation in the second paper source. Select Paper Setting and set it to Auto.
• On the home screen, select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Copy
and make sure that the Face Down Tray is selected.
6. When you are ready to copy, select the Copy icon.
Parent topic: Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
Stacking Copies Using Offset
You can sort and stack your output by offsetting each copy for easy separation.
Note: Offset stacking requires the optional staple finisher or inner finisher.
1. Place your originals on the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
4. Select Basic Settings > Finishing > Eject Paper > Shift Sort.
5. Set the number of copies.
6. When you are ready to copy, select the Copy icon.
Parent topic: Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
110
Inserting Slipsheets
You can insert slipsheets into or between your copies.
1. Place your originals on the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
4. Select Advanced > Cover & Slip Sheet > Slip Sheet.
5. Select End of Job or End of Set, enable the setting and then specify any other settings as
necessary.
If you want to specify the page to insert the slipsheet, select End of Page or Chapter and specify
any other settings as necessary.
6. Specify the number of copies.
7. When you are ready to copy, select the Copy icon.
Parent topic: Copying, Sorting, and Creating Booklets
Copying Options
Select the copying options you want to use for your copies.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on other copying settings.
Basic Settings
Copying option Available settings Description
Auto (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-
C6000)
— Copies the document in the detected color of the original.
B&W (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-
C6000)
— Copies the document in black and white.
111
Copying option Available settings Description
Color (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-
C6000)
— Copies the document in color.
Density Varying levels Adjusts the lightness or darkness of copies.
Paper Setting Various sources Select the paper source that you want to use. If you select
Auto, paper is fed automatically depending on the paper
settings you selected for the paper sources.
Reduce/Enlarge Auto Automatically sizes the image to fit the paper size you
selected.
Reduce to Fit Paper Automatically decreases the size of the image by the
percentage you select.
100% Displays the conversion percentage. Use the + and - icons
to adjust the percentage in increments of 1 or select the
value and use the on-screen keypad to enter a percentage.
Free Form (mm) Specifies the size of the target paper in millimeters.
Free Form (%) Specify different magnifications for the vertical and
horizontal lengths of the original to enlarge or reduce it.
Actual Size and
other conversions
Copies the original at its full size or automatically converts
from one size to another.
Various paper sizes Automatically enlarges or reduces the original to fit a
specific paper size
Original Type Text Specifies the document type of your originals and adjusts
the quality of your copies.
Text & Image
Photo
Barcode
2-Sided 1>1-Sided Select to make 2-sided copies. When you select 1>2-Sided
or 2>1-Sided, you can select the orientation and binding
edge for your originals or copies.
2>2-Sided
1>2-Sided
2>1-Sided
112
Copying option Available settings Description
Multi-Page Single Page Copies each page of the original onto an individual sheet.
2-up Copies multiple page documents onto one sheet. Scroll
down and select the document orientation and layout order
settings as necessary.
4-up
Finishing Collate (Page
Order)
Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
ordered sets.
Group (Same
Pages)
Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
unordered groups.
Eject Paper Select Rotate Sort to print alternate paper orientations and
paper sources (make sure the Paper Setting is set to Auto
for this option). Select Shift Sort* to offset each set of
copies.
Staple* Select the staple location.
Punch** Select the location for the punch holes
* Displayed when the optional staple finisher is installed.
** Displayed when the optional punch unit is installed.
Advanced settings
113
Copying option Available settings Description
Booklet Booklet Adjust these settings to create a booklet from your copies.
See the table below.
Saddle Stitch Saddle Stitch: Allows you to saddle stitch the copies using
staples
Sheets per Staple: Specify the number of pages for each
stapled section
Split: Allows you to print separately
Cover: Allows you to add the covers to the copies
Paper Setting: Select the paper source in which you loaded
the paper for the covers.
Half Fold Half Fold: Allows you to fold the copies in half
Sheets per Fold: Specify the number of page for each
folded section
Split: Allows you to print separately
Cover: Allows you to add the covers to the copies
Paper Setting: Select the paper source in which you loaded
the paper for the covers.
Print Mode: Select whether to print inside or outside the
half-folded paper
114
Copying option Available settings Description
Fold Half Fold Half Fold: Allows you to fold the copies in half
Sheets per Fold: Specify the number of page for each
folded section
Split: Allows you to print separately
Cover: Allows you to add the covers to the copies
Paper Setting: Select the paper source in which you loaded
the paper for the covers.
Print Mode: Select whether to print inside or outside the
half-folded paper
Tri Fold Tri Fold: Allows you to fold the copies in half
Sheets per Fold: Specify the number of page for each
folded section
Print Mode: Select whether to print inside or outside the
half-folded paper
Open Orientation: Select the direction in which the folded
booklet will open
Cover & Slip
Sheet
Cover Adjust these settings to add covers to your copies.
Slip Sheet Adjust these settings to insert slip sheets into your copies.
Original Size Various sizes Select the document size of your original.
Mixed Size
Originals
Off Select On to copy originals of varying sizes in their original
sizes.
On
Orientation
(Original)
Readable Direction Specifies the orientation of your originals.
Left Direction
Book>2Pages Off Select On to copy two pages of a book onto separate sheets
of paper. You can also choose the Scan Order.
On
Continuous
Scanning
Off Select On to scan a large quantity of originals placed in the
ADF as one job.
On
Image Quality Various settings Select advanced quality settings such as Saturation and
Sharpness.
115
Copying option Available settings Description
Binding Margin Off Select On to adjust the margin and orientation of the pages
when copying a book. You can also select the Binding
Position and Orientation. Select Binding Width to shift
the image out of the binding margin, Reduce to Fit Paper to
shrink the image to fit into the printing area, or Erase Image
Over Margin to only print the part of the image that is
outside of the binding margin.
On
Reduce to Fit
Paper
Off Select On to automatically decrease the image by the
percentage you select.
On
Remove Shadow Off Select On to erase the shadows that appear in the center of
a document when copying a book or that appear around a
document when copying thick paper.
On
Remove Punch
Holes
Off Select On to erase the binding holes on a document. You
can also select the Erasing Position and Orientation.
On
ID Card Copy Off Select On to copy both sides of an ID card onto one side of
a sheet of paper. You can also select the Orientation.
On
Proof Copy — When making multiple copies, you can start with one copy to
check the results, and then copy the rest.
Output Tray Various settings Select the output tray for your copies.
Stamp Stamp Select On to print stamps on your copies.
Type Select the stamp type.
Stamp Position Select the stamp position.
Print Page Select the page you want to stamp.
Size Select the stamp size.
Print Color Select the stamp color.
Transparency Select whether the stamp is transparent.
116
Copying option Available settings Description
Date Stamp Date Stamp Select On to print date stamps on your copies.
Date Format Select the date format.
Stamp Position Select a location for the date stamp.
Size Select a size for the date stamp.
Background Select whether or not to make the date stamp's background
white. If you select White, you can see the date stamp
clearly when the background for the data is not white.
Page Numbering Page Numbering Select On to print page numbers on your copies.
Format Selects the page numbering format.
Stamp Position Selects where the page number is placed on each copy.
Change Numbering Specifies on which page numbering begins.
Size Adjusts the font size of the page numbers.
Background Adjusts the background color of the page number.
File Storing — Select On to save the copied file to the product's internal
storage. Adjust the save settings, including whether to print
and save the copied file or to only save the file.
Print Sets Various settings Allows you to copy the document in groups of saved
quantities and settings.
Erase Red Color Off Select On to print copies with any red characters in the
original omitted.
On
Booklet settings
Copying option Description
Booklet Allows you to create a booklet from your copies
Binding Select the binding position of the booklet
Binding Margin Specify the binding margin up to a maximum of 50 mm in 1 mm increments
Cover
Allows you to add covers to the booklet
Paper Setting Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers
117
Copying option Description
Front Cover Specify the print settings for the front cover. If you do not want to print on the
front cover, select Do not Print
Back Cover Specify the print settings for the back cover. If you do not want to print on the
back cover, select Do not Print
Parent topic: Copying
Saving Groups for Copying
You can save groups of frequently used copy quantities and sets so that you can print or copy without
entering the number of copies each time. This is useful when you are printing a different number of
copies for each set.
Note: You can save up to 60 print set groups and enter up to 99 sets and 9999 copies. Print set groups
are also accessible when printing a file from a storage folder.
Note: This feature requires a registered license key.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Copy.
3. Select Advanced and then select Print Sets.
4. Select Not Set from the list.
5. Select Register/Overwrite and enter a group name.
6. Set the number of copies and sets on the Copies & Sets tab.
Note: You can enter up to 9999 copies and 99 sets.
7. Select any other settings as necessary.
8. Select OK to save.
Parent topic: Copying
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group for Copying
You can edit or delete a print set group.
118
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Copy.
3. Select Advanced and then select Print Sets.
4. Select the group you want to edit or delete from the list.
5. Do one of the following:
• Select Register/Overwrite to edit the group and modify the settings as desired. Proceed to the
next step.
• Select Delete to delete the group. You are done.
6. Select OK to save.
Parent topic: Copying
Omitting Red Characters in Originals When Copying
You can set red characters in the originals to not be printed in copies.
Note: Depending on the original, characters that were red in the original may still appear. When you use
this feature, the copy will be black and white, regardless of your copy settings or whether the original was
color.
Note: To avoid using color ink and having the copy counted as a color page, select B&W as the color
mode (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000).
Note: This feature requires a registered license key.
1. Place your original document or photo on the scanner glass, or place multi-page documents in the
ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Copy.
4. Select Advanced and then enable Erase Red Color.
Note: The preview screen displays an image of the original before red characters are removed.
5. Select the Copy icon.
Parent topic: Copying
119
Printing from a Computer
Before printing from your computer, make sure you have set up your product and installed its software
from the Epson website.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website. If you see a Software Update screen, select Enable automatic checking
and click OK. The update scans your system to see if you have the latest product software. Follow the
on-screen instructions.
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet
Cancelling Printing Using the Product Control Panel
Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the standard Epson printer software using any Windows printing program, as
described in these sections.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
Synchronizing Printer Settings for Optional Units - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Finishing Options - Windows
Selecting Additional Print Options - Windows
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
Printing Your Document - Windows
120
Printing Slip Sheets and Chapter Papers
Saving Print Set Groups - Windows
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Synchronizing Printer Settings for Optional Units - Windows
You must sync the printer driver before you can use any optional equipment installed on the product.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select your product and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select
Printer properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
121
You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.
The product's settings and other information appears in the Current Printer Information area.
4. If you want to select specific options to sync, select Manual Settings and click Settings. Select the
options you want to sync and click OK.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
122
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select More settings, Properties, or Preferences to view your print
settings.
You see the Main tab of a printer settings window like this:
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on. Select Auto
Select to automatically select the paper source in the paper setting menu on the product. You can
also select Cover Sheet/Separator Sheet to set a different paper source for certain pages.
Note: Click Paper Source Information to view the paper type and size loaded in each paper
cassette or the rear paper feeder.
123
5. Select the size of your document or photo as the Document Size setting, and the size of your paper
as the Output Paper setting.
• To change the size of your printed document or photo, select the Reduce/Enlarge Document
checkbox.
• Select the Fit to Page option to size your image to fit the paper you loaded.
• Select the Center checkbox if you want to center your image on the paper.
• Select the Zoom to option to reduce or enlarge your document or photo by a specific percentage.
Select the percentage in the % dropdown.
6. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting. Select Auto Select (plain paper) to
automatically use the paper type selected on the product control panel.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
7. Select the Quality setting that matches the print quality you want to use.
8. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
9. Select a Color option (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000):
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
• To print text and graphics in black or shades of gray, select the Black/Grayscale setting.
10. To print on both sides of the paper, select a 2-Sided Printing option and click Settings to select
printing options.
11. To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, or print one image on multiple sheets of paper, select
one of the Multi-Page options and click Layout Order to select the printing options.
12. To print multiple copies and arrange their print order, select the Copies, Reverse Order, and
Collated options.
13. To preview your job before printing, select the Print Preview checkbox.
14. To save your print job as a project that can be modified and combined with other print jobs, select
Job Arranger Lite.
Paper Source Options - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
124
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Related tasks
Printing Slip Sheets and Chapter Papers
Paper Source Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Note: Paper Cassette 3 and Paper Cassette 4 are available only if you have installed the additional
cassette unit.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Paper Tray
Selects the paper in the paper tray as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source.
Paper Cassette 4
Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source.
High Capacity Tray
Selects the optional high capacity tray as the paper source if it is connected to the printer.
Cover Sheet/Separator Sheet
Set a different paper source for the first paper and subsequent papers.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Multi-Page Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options in the Multi-Page menu to set up your multi-page print job.
2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, and 16-Up
Prints several pages on one sheet of paper. Click the Layout Order button to select page layout and
border options.
125
2×1 Poster, 2×2 Poster, 3×3 Poster, 4×4 Poster
Prints one image on multiple sheets of paper to create a larger poster. Click the Settings button to
select image layout and guideline options.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting one of the 2-Sided Printing options on the Main tab.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network.
1. Select one of the following options for 2-Sided Printing:
• Auto (Long-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the long edge.
• Auto (Short-edge binding) to print your double-sided print job by automatically flipping the paper
on the short edge.
2. Click the Settings button.
126
You see a window like this:
127
3. Select the double-sided printing options you want to use.
4. Select an option from Images in Binding Margin to change how the binding margin affects images.
• Shift Images: Moves images out of the binding margin.
• Reduce Images: Scales down images so that they are not in the binding margin.
• Erase Images: Only prints parts of images outside of the binding margin.
5. Click OK to return to the Main tab.
6. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
7. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Double-sided Printing Options - Windows
You can select any of the available options on the 2-Sided Printing Settings window to set up your
double-sided print job.
You can right-click a setting in the dialog and select Help for additional information on each setting.
Binding Edge Options
Select a setting that orients double-sided print binding in the desired direction.
Binding Margin Options
Select options that define a wider margin to allow for binding.
Start Page
Selects whether printing starts on the front or back page.
Create Folded Booklet Options
Select the Booklet checkbox and a binding option to print double-sided pages as a booklet.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Windows
Selecting Finishing Options - Windows
You can select a variety of finishing options for your document or photo on the Finishing tab.
1. To store print jobs in the product's memory, select one of the Job Type options:
• Select Normal Print to print jobs without storing them.
• Select Confidential Print to add a password to a print job.
128
Note: Confidential jobs are stored in the product's memory without being printed. To print the job,
enter the password for the confidential job on the product's control panel. Confidential print jobs
are cleared from the product's memory after printing. If the product is turned off or restarted before
the confidential job is printed, the job is cleared from the product's memory.
• When printing multiple copies, select Verify Job to print one copy to verify content and settings.
You can then continue printing from the product control panel.
• Select Re-Print Job to store a print job in the product's memory. You can then print from the
product control panel.
• Select Save to Storage to save the file to the product's hard drive without printing it.
• Select Save to Storage and Print to print the file and save it to the product's hard drive.
2. Select the Paper Source and Output Tray options you want to use.
3. Select Cover Sheet/Separator Sheet and select the apprropriate option if you want to print a blank
sheet of paper in between copies or print jobs.
Note: You can also adjust this setting from the control panel using the Insert Sheets per User
option.
4. Select one of the following Sort options:
• Select Rotate Sort to stack printouts alternately in landscape and portrait orientations. The Paper
Source setting must be set to Auto Select and the Output Tray setting must be set to either
Auto Select or Face Down Tray.
• Select Shift Sort to offset each set of copies. The Output Tray setting must be set to Finisher
Tray or Auto Select.
Note: This option is available only when the optional finisher unit is installed.
5. If the optional finisher and punch units are installed, you can choose the following options:
• Select a Staple option to choose the staple location on the document.
• Select a Punch option to choose where the holes are punched.
Caution: When using the optional hole punch unit with the optional staple or booklet finisher,
adjust the printed area so it does not overlap with the holes being punched. You should also set
the binding margin so that it is not printed at the hole punch position. Punching holes over any
printed area may cause hole punch failure or a paper jam.
129
• Select a Fold/Saddle Stitch option to choose the booklet settings.
6. When printing documents of mixed sizes, select Specify Orientation. Click Settings to select
orientation and binding margin options.
Finishing Options - Windows
Using the Manual Stapler
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Related tasks
Printing Slip Sheets and Chapter Papers
Finishing Options - Windows
You can select any of the Finishing options to customize your print. Some options may be pre-selected
or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Job Type
Select whether to store a print job in the product's memory.
Paper Source
Select the paper cassette or tray to use.
Output Tray
Select where printed jobs are output.
Sort
Select how to sort print jobs with multiple copies.
Staple
Select the staple location for printed documents.
Punch
Select the hole punch location for printed documents.
Fold/Saddle Stitch
Select binding settings for folded or folded and saddle stitched printed documents.
Note: The Staple, Fold/Saddle Stitch, and Punch options are available only when the necessary
options are installed.
Parent topic: Selecting Finishing Options - Windows
Using the Manual Stapler
The optional staple finisher can be used to manually staple documents.
130
The maximum number of pages that can be stapled depends on the size and paper weight of the
documents to be stapled.
Paper size: A4 or Letter:
• 60 to 90 g/m
2
: 50 sheets
• 91 to 105 g/m
2
: 40 sheets
Paper size: A3 or Legal:
• 60 to 90 g/m
2
: 30 sheets
• 91 to 105 g/m
2
: 20 sheets
1. Press the staple position switching button.
The shutter of the paper output unit of the finisher tray opens and the manual staple mode is
enabled.
2. Set the staple position by pressing the staple position button until the green light is shown under the
desired position.
3. Load paper with the printable side facing down and the shutter for the paper finisher tray open.
Adjust the paper orientation according to the staple position.
Caution: Do not place your hand into the opening of the paper output unit.
131
Note: Press the staple position switching button before loading paper. You cannot change the
position when paper is loaded. When paper is loaded correctly the staple button light turns on. If the
light does not turn on, load the paper again.
4. Press the staple button to staple the paper. Do not touch the paper while stapling.
5. To exit manual stapling mode, press the staple position switching button several times to turn the
light off.
Parent topic: Selecting Finishing Options - Windows
Selecting Additional Print Options - Windows
You can select a variety of additional printing options for your document or photo on the More Options
tab.
132
1. Select one of the following Color Correction options:
• Select Automatic to automatically adjust the sharpness, brightness, contrast, and color saturation
for your image.
• Select Custom and click the Advanced button to manually adjust the color correction settings or
turn off color management in your printer software.
• Select Image Options to access additional settings for improving printed images.
2. To add the following features, click the Watermark Features button:
• Anti-copy Pattern: adds a watermark that only appears when your printout is copied
• Watermark: adds a visible watermark to your printout
• Header/Footer: adds information such as the date and time to the top or bottom of your printout
Note: Click the Settings button to customize the text and location of the header or footer.
3. Select Rotate 180° to print the image rotated 180° from its original orientation.
4. Select Print Sets to print the document in groups of saved quantities and settings.
Note: Click the Settings button to customize the groups. This feature requires an activated license
key.
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
133
Custom Color Correction Options - Windows (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
You can select any of the available options in the Color Correction window to customize the image colors
for your print job.
Color Controls
Lets you select a Color Mode setting, individual settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and
Density, and individual color tones. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the
midtone density using the Gamma setting.
Fix Photo
Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos.
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include
faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo
includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to
retain the special color effects.
134
ICM
Lets you manage color using installed color printing profiles.
No Color Adjustment
Turns off color management in your printer software so you can manage color using only your
application software.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Print Options - Windows
Image Options and Additional Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Image Options and Additional Settings to customize your print. Some options
may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Image Options
Emphasize Text
Adjusts the weight of printed text to increase readability.
Emphasize Thin Lines
Adjusts the weight of printed lines to increase visibility.
Edge Smoothing
Smooths jagged edges in low-resolution images such as screen captures or images from the Web.
Enhance Light Text and Lines (AM-M5500)
Adjusts the weight of light text and printed lines to increase visibility.
Fix Red-Eye (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Reduces or removes red-eye in photos.
Print Text in Black (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Prints colored text in black.
For Color Text (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Prints colored text on a background pattern or underlined.
For Color Graphs and Images (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Prints colored graphics and images with overlay patterns.
For Color Text, Graphs, and Images (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Prints colored text, graphics, and images with overlay patterns.
Enhancement Options (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Specifies Color Universal Print enhancement settings for text, graphics, and images.
135
Additional Settings Options
Rotate 180º
Prints the image rotated 180º from its original orientation.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Print Options - Windows
Header/Footer Settings - Windows
You can select any of the Header/Footer Settings options to add headers or footers when you print. The
items are available to print at the top or bottom of your pages, in either the left, right, or center of the
page.
Note: These settings are not saved with your document.
136
You can select to print the following information:
• User Name
• Computer Name
• Date
• Date/Time
• Document Name
• Collate Number
• Page Number
• Text
You can also adjust the text settings for the printed information.
Note: The user name, computer name, date, and time come from the Windows Control Panel on your
computer.
Parent topic: Selecting Additional Print Options - Windows
Selecting a Printing Preset - Windows
For quick access to common groups of print settings, you can select a printing preset on the Main or
More Options tab.
Note: You can create your own preset by clicking the Add/Remove Presets button.
1. Click the Main or More Options tab.
You see the available Printing Presets on the left:
2. Place your cursor over one of the Printing Presets to view its list of settings.
137
3. Click on a preset to change its settings or delete it, or use any of the available options on the screen
to control your printing presets.
4. To choose a preset for printing, select it.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
You can select additional settings that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
Note: For Windows 11, you may need to select and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices >
Printers & scanners. Select your product and select Printing preferences.
2. Click the Maintenance tab.
3. Click the Extended Settings button.
You see a window like this:
138
4. Select any of the extended settings to customize your print.
5. Click OK to close the Extended Settings window.
6. Click OK to close the printer software window.
Extended Settings - Windows
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Extended Settings - Windows
You can select from these settings on the Extended Settings window.
Print Mode
Selects how print jobs are processed by the computer's or product's memory.
TrueType Font
Lets you select how you want to print TrueType fonts.
Panel Settings
Prioritizes settings from the product control panel or the printer driver software.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Offset Settings
Lets you make fine-tune adjustments to the print position of data on your printout.
Print Density
Sets the level of ink coverage for double-sided printing.
Margin Settings
Sets the printer margins.
Automatically change to monochrome mode
Select to print automatically in monochrome instead of color.
Optimize Finishing
Reduces paper misalignment to improve stapling and stacking printouts. Print speed is decreased.
Note: Displayed when the optional finisher unit is installed.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Select an option to prevent ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Print grayscale using black ink only
Prints in grayscale using only black ink.
139
Change Standard Resolution
Reduces the resolution of print data to correct printing problems.
Always Spool RAW Datatype
Increases print speed and may solve other printing problems.
Print as Bitmap
Increases print speed when printing is extremely slow or the print head stops during printing, and
other settings do not help.
Refine screening pattern
Prints graphics with a finer screening pattern.
Always Use the Driver's Paper Source Setting
Prints using the paper source setting in the printer driver, rather than the setting in your application.
Barcode mode
Reduces bleeding when printing barcodes on plain paper, letterhead paper, recycled paper,
preprinted paper, envelopes, and thick paper.
Detect Canceled Printing
Displays a message on the computer screen when a print job is canceled from the product control
panel.
Always Use the Driver's Color Setting
Prioritizes color settings from the printer driver software.
Reduce Print Data Size
Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine
patterns.
Print a document with both single-sided and double-sided pages
Prints an entire document that contains both single- and double-sided pages.
Print pages upside down
Prints pages upside down when printing double-sided.
Output 1 page documents in 2-sided mode
When you print a one page document with this option enabled, the page will face the same direction
as page 1 of a 2-sided document. This option is only available when you use the 2-Sided Printing
feature.
High-compression data mode
Compresses print data, which may improve print speed, especially when printing multi-page
documents.
Parent topic: Selecting Extended Settings - Windows
140
Printing Your Document - Windows
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to save your settings and print.
1. Click OK to save your settings.
You see your application's Print window, such as this one:
2. Click OK or Print to start printing.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Printing Slip Sheets and Chapter Papers
When printing a document with multiple chapters, you can insert a slip sheet (blank page) between
certain pages of your document, and you can print chapter papers (pages of a document set to be
printed from specific paper sources on the product).
141
Note: Slip sheets and chapter papers are not available if you select Job Type > Save to Storage or
Save to Storage and Print. The following settings are unavailable when printing slip sheets or chapter
papers:
• Multi-page
• Reverse Order
• Send cover to bottom of stack
• Extended Settings > Print a document with both single-sided and double-sided pages
• Bookbinding printing
• Select whether to print the first page of paper on the front or back when printing double-sided
1. Load the papers you want to use for your print job in the product's paper sources.
2. Open the file you want to print on your computer and then select the print command in your
application.
You see a window like this:
3. On the Main tab, select a 2-Sided Printing setting for your print job.
4. Select Cover Sheet/Separator Sheet under the Paper Source setting.
142
The Cover Sheet/Separator Sheet Settings window appears.
5. Adjust the settings for the first and last pages, as needed.
6. To make settings for pages other than the first or last pages, select the Slip Sheet/Chapter
checkbox, and then select Settings.
143
The Slip Sheet/Chapter Settings window appears.
7. Enter the settings for specific pages and click Save for each entry.
• To choose the location where you want to insert a slip sheet or print a chapter, use the Pages
field. Use commas to separate pages and use hyphens to specify ranges. For example: When you
want to insert a slip sheet before pages 2 and 9, enter "2,9". If you want to print pages 4 and 7 on
the chapter paper, enter "4,7". If you want to print pages 4 to 7 on the paper in the specified paper
source, enter "4-7".
• To select the paper source for the entry, select Paper Source and select a paper source.
144
• If the entry is for a chapter page, select the Print Chapter Pages checkbox.
• To modify an entry, select it and change the settings, then click Change.
• To save an entry, select Save.
• To delete an entry, select it from the list and click Delete.
8. Click OK to return to the Cover Sheet/Separator Sheet Settings window, and then click OK to return
to the Main tab of the printer driver.
9. Make any necessary settings on the Finishing and More Options tabs and then click OK.
10. Click Print.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Saving Print Set Groups - Windows
You can save frequently used print quantities and sets as groups so that you can print without entering
the quantity each time. This is useful when you want to print a different number of copies for each set.
You can also make finishing settings such as collate, slip sheet, and eject paper for the groups.
1. On the More Options tab, select Print Sets and then click Settings.
2. Set each item on the Print Sets Settings screen, then click OK.
3. Set the other items on the More Options, Main, and Finishing tabs as necessary, then click OK.
4. On the Main or More Options tab, click Add/Remove Presets in Printing Presets.
5. Enter a name and, if necessary, enter a comment.
6. Click Save and then click Close.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group
You can edit or delete a print set group.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
145
You see a screen like this:
3. Select the folder containing the group you want to edit or delete and select Open.
146
You see a screen like this:
4. Select a file.
147
You see a screen like this:
5. Select Print Settings and select Advanced.
6. Select Print Sets and then select the group you want to edit or delete from the list.
7. Do one of the following:
• Select Register/Overwrite to edit the group and modify the settings as desired. Proceed to the
next step.
• Select Delete to delete the group. You are done.
8. Select OK to save.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Windows administrators can lock access to some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printer properties.
148
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select
Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click your product and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
Note: You can prevent access to the Optional Settings tab by changing the user or group
permissions in the Security tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
You see a window like this:
149
4. Select the checkbox for each setting you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document
Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting.
6. Click OK.
Locked Setting Options
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Locked Setting Options
Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.
Setting Options Description
Anti-Copy
Pattern
Various data items Lets you select the data to use for the pattern or prohibit anti-
copy patterns
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized anti-copy pattern
Settings Lets you select the arrangement, size, and other settings for
the custom anti-copy pattern
Watermark Various text
watermarks
Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit
watermarks
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based
watermark
Settings Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer Off Prohibits headers or footers
On Allows headers and footers
Settings Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and
footers
Job Type — Lets you select the Enable Normal Print Only checkbox so
only the Normal Print option is available
Color (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-
C6000)
Color Allows color printing
Grayscale Allows printing in black or shades of gray only
150
Setting Options Description
2-sided printing Off Allows printing on one side of the paper only
On Allows printing on both sides of the paper
Multi-Page Off Prohibits multi-page settings
2-Up Allows printing of 2 pages on one sheet of paper
4-Up Allows printing of 4 pages on one sheet of paper
6-Up Allows printing of 6 pages on one sheet of paper
8-Up Allows printing of 8 pages on one sheet of paper
9-Up Allows printing of 9 pages on one sheet of paper
16-Up Allows printing of 16 pages on one sheet of paper
All Document
Settings
— Lets you lock all print settings
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Windows
Entering a User ID and Password for Printing
If you enabled Access Control on the product, you must enter a user ID and password in the printer
driver to be able to print.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
151
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click . Select Printer Settings and click the
Maintenance tab.
2. Click the Printer and Option Information button.
3. Select the Save Access Control Settings checkbox.
4. Click the Settings button.
5. Enter your user name and password.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
152
2. Select Printer Settings.
You see a printer settings window like this:
3. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
4. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Changing the Language of the Printer Software Screens
You can change the language used on the Windows printer software screens.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Printer Settings.
You see the printer settings window.
3. Click the Maintenance tab.
153
You see the maintenance options:
4. Select the language you want to use as the Language setting.
5. Click OK to close the printer software window.
The printer software screens appear in the language you selected the next time you access them.
Parent topic: Selecting Default Print Settings - Windows
Changing Automatic Update Options
Your printer software for Windows automatically checks for updates to the product software. You can
change how often the software checks for updates or disable this feature.
1. Access the Windows Desktop and right-click the icon for your product in the right side of the
Windows taskbar, or click the up arrow and right-click .
2. Select Software Update Settings.
154
You see a window like this:
3. Do one of the following:
• To change how often the software checks for updates, select a setting in the Check every menu.
• To disable the automatic update feature, select the Never option.
4. Click OK to exit.
Note: If you choose to disable the automatic update feature, you can check for updates manually.
Parent topic: Printing with the Standard Epson Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
You can print with your product using any Mac printing program, as described in these sections.
Note: If you have an Internet connection, it is a good idea to check for updates to your product software
on Epson's support website.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
Managing Color - Mac (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
155
Selecting Finishing Options - Mac
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
Printing Your Document - Mac
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
156
You see an expanded printer settings window like this:
Note: The print window and pop-up menu may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and
the application you are using.
5. Select the Copies and Pages settings as necessary.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing.
6. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
157
7. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Notes application.
8. Select Print Settings, Printer Options, or Printer Features depending on your OS version.
You see a menu like this:
9. Select the Paper Source you wish to print from.
10. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Media Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
11. Change the Job Type setting if you want to save the file to the product's hard drive.
12. Select any of the available print options.
Paper Source Options - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Related references
Paper or Media Type Settings - Printing Software
Paper Source Options - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Paper Source menu to print on the paper loaded in that
source.
Auto Select
Automatically selects the paper source based on the selected paper size.
Paper Tray
Selects the paper in the paper tray as the paper source.
Cassette 1
Selects the paper in cassette 1 as the paper source.
158
Cassette 2
Selects the paper in cassette 2 as the paper source.
Cassette 3
Selects the paper in cassette 3 as the paper source.
Cassette 4
Selects the paper in cassette 4 as the paper source.
High Capacity Tray
Selects the optional high capacity tray as the paper source if it is connected to the printer.
Parent topic: Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Selecting Page Setup Settings - Mac
Depending on your application, you may be able to select the paper size and orientation settings from
the print window.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
1. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Paper Size setting.
2. Select the orientation of your document or photo as shown in the print window.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select the icon or Landscape setting.
Note: You can reduce or enlarge the size of the printed image by selecting Paper Handling from the
pop-up menu and selecting a scaling option.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
159
Selecting Print Layout Options - Mac
You can select a variety of layout options for your document or photo by selecting Layout from the pop-
up menu on the print window.
• To print multiple pages on one sheet of paper, select the number of pages in the Pages per Sheet
pop-up menu. To arrange the print order of the pages, select a Layout Direction setting.
• To print borders around each page on the sheet, select a line setting from the Border pop-up menu.
• To invert or flip the printed image, select the Reverse page orientation or Flip horizontally settings.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
You can print on both sides of the paper by selecting Two-sided Printing Settings from the pop-up
menu on the print window.
Note: For macOS 13 and later, select Printer Options then select Two-sided Printing Settings.
Note: Some options may be pre-selected or unavailable, depending on other settings you have chosen
or if you are accessing the product over a network. This screen may be different, depending on the Mac
OS version you are using.
1. Select one of the Two-sided Printing options.
160
2. Select the type of document you are printing as the Document Type setting. The software
automatically sets the Adjustments options for that document type.
3. If necessary, customize the Adjustments settings as instructed on the screen.
4. Print a test copy of your double-sided document to test the selected settings.
5. Follow any instructions displayed on the screen during printing.
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Double-sided Printing Options and Adjustments - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Two-sided Printing Settings pop-up menu to set up
your double-sided print job.
161
Long-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the long edge of the paper.
Short-Edge binding
Orients double-sided printed pages to be bound on the short edge of the paper.
Parent topic: Selecting Double-sided Printing Settings - Mac
Managing Color - Mac (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
You can adjust the Color Matching and Color Options settings to fine-tune the colors in your printout or
turn off color management in your printer software.
1. Select Color Matching from the pop-up menu in the print window.
Note: For macOS 13 and later, select Printer Options then select Color Matching.
2. Select one of the available options.
3. Select Color Options from the pop-up menu in the print window.
Note: For macOS 13 and later, select Printer Options then select Color Options.
Note: The available settings on the Color Options menu depend on the option you selected on the
Color Matching menu.
4. Select one of the available options.
Color Matching and Color Options - Mac (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
162
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Color Matching and Color Options - Mac (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
You can select these settings on the Color Matching and Color Options menus.
Color Matching Settings
EPSON Color Controls
Lets you manage color using controls in your printer driver or turn off color management.
ColorSync
Prints using standard color profiles for your product and paper to help match image colors. You can
customize the conversion method and filter settings on the ColorSync pop-up menu in the print
window.
Color Options Settings
Manual Settings
Lets you select manual color adjustments. Click the arrow next to Advanced Settings and select
settings for Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, and individual color tones. You can also select a color
Mode setting for printing photos and graphics and the Fix Red-Eye setting to reduce or remove red-
eye in photos. Depending on the selected color mode, you can also adjust the midtone density using
the Gamma setting.
Fix Photo
Improves the color, contrast, and sharpness of flawed photos. Click the arrow next to Advanced
Settings and select the Fix Red-Eye setting to reduce or remove red-eye in photos.
Note: Fix Photo uses a sophisticated face recognition technology to optimize photos that include
faces. For this to work, both eyes and the nose must be visible in the subject's face. If your photo
includes a face with an intentional color cast, such as a statue, you may want to turn off Fix Photo to
retain the special color effects.
Parent topic: Managing Color - Mac (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Selecting Finishing Options - Mac
You can choose finishing options by selecting Finishing from the pop-up menu on the print window.
Note: For macOS 13 and later, select Printer Options then select Finishing.
163
1. Select the Output Tray you want to output your print jobs to.
2. If you are printing multiple copies, select a Sort option.
3. If optional finisher and punch units are installed, you can choose the following options:
• Select a Fold/Saddle Stitch option to choose the booklet settings.
• Select a Staple option to choose the staple location on the document.
• Select a Punch option to choose where the holes are punched.
Finishing Options - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Finishing Options - Mac
You can select any of the available options in the Finishing pop-up menu.
Output Tray
Select where printed jobs are output.
Sort
Select how to sort print jobs with multiple copies.
Fold/Saddle Stitch
Select binding settings for folded or folded and saddle stitched printed documents.
Staple
Select the staple location for printed documents.
Punch
Select the hole punch location for printed documents.
Note: The Staple, Fold/Saddle Stitch, and Punch options are available only when the necessary
optional equipment is installed.
164
Parent topic: Selecting Finishing Options - Mac
Related references
Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts
Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select printing preferences that apply to all the print jobs you send to your product.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings.
2. Select Print & Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options
& Supplies.
3. Select Driver or Options.
You see a screen like this:
Note: The available settings and appearance of the options window may be different than those
covered here, depending on the Mac OS version and the application you are using.
4. Select any of the available printing preferences.
5. Click OK.
165
Printing Preferences - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Printing Preferences - Mac
You can select these settings on the Options or Driver tab.
Note: Some settings are available only if the necessary options are installed.
Thick Paper and Envelopes
Prevents ink from smearing when you print on envelopes or other thick paper.
Skip Blank Page
Ensures that your product does not print pages that contain no text or images.
Warning Notifications
Lets you choose whether or not to receive warning notifications from the printer software for various
operating conditions.
Establish bidirectional communication
Allows the product to communicate with the computer. Do not change the default setting unless you
experience issues when using a shared printing pool.
Reduce Print Data Size
Increases print data compression to improve print speed. Not recommended when printing fine
patterns.
Optional Output Trays
Select an output tray option if the optional finisher unit is installed.
Optional Paper Sources
Select an optional paper source option if the optional high-capacity input tray is installed.
Hole Punch
Select a hole punch setting.
Saddle Unit
Specifies whether the saddle unit is present.
Optimize Finishing
Reduces paper misalignment to improve stapling and stacking printouts. Print speed is decreased.
High-compression data mode
Compresses print data, which may improve print speed, especially when printing multi-page
documents.
Parent topic: Selecting Printing Preferences - Mac
166
Printing Your Document - Mac
Once you have selected your print settings, you are ready to print.
Click Print at the bottom of the print window.
Checking Print Status - Mac
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Standard Printer Software - Mac
Checking Print Status - Mac
During printing, you can view the progress of your print job, control printing, and check ink status.
1. Click the printer icon when it appears in the Dock.
167
You see the print status window:
2. Select the following options as necessary for your Mac OS version:
• To cancel printing, click the print job and click or Delete.
• To pause a print job, click the print job and click or Hold. To resume a print job, click the
paused print job and click or Resume.
• To pause printing for all queued print jobs, click Pause or Pause Printer.
• To display other printer information, click Settings or Supply Levels.
Parent topic: Printing Your Document - Mac
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can print with the Epson Universal Print Driver using any Windows printing program, as described in
these sections.
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
168
Synchronizing Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You may need to synchronize the printer driver with the product if the printer driver does not detect the
correct information or settings from the product.
Note: You must sync the printer driver before you can use any optional equipment installed on the
product.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
169
You see a window like this:
3. Make sure Acquire from Printer is selected and click Get.
Note: Select the Only Optional Information checkbox if you only want to enable any optional
equipment installed on the product.
The product's settings and other information appears in the Current Printer Information area.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
170
Note: The names of settings on the universal print driver screens may vary slightly, depending on the
version of the print driver you have installed.
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select EPSON Universal Print Driver as the printer you want to use.
Note: You may also need to select Properties or Preferences to view your print settings.
You see the Main tab of a printer settings window like this:
171
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
4. For the Paper Source setting, select where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select the size of the paper you loaded as the Document Size setting.
Note: You can also select the User-Defined setting to create a custom paper size.
6. Select the orientation of your document.
Note: If you are printing an envelope, select Landscape.
7. Select the type of paper you loaded as the Paper Type setting.
Note: The setting may not exactly match the name of your paper. Check the paper type settings list
for details.
8. Select any of the available print options.
9. To select a variety of additional layout and printing options for your document or photo, select the
More Options tab and select the printing options you want.
10. To select maintenance and other optional settings, select the Maintenance tab and select the
options you want.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printing preferences.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printing Preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Print Preferences.
172
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printing Preferences.
You see a printer settings window like this:
Note: For more information about a setting, right-click it and select Help.
2. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
3. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Administrators can lock some printer settings to prevent unauthorized changes.
173
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
3. Click Driver Settings.
You see this window:
174
4. Select the checkbox for the settings you want to lock. To lock all print settings, select All Document
Settings.
5. Under Advanced Settings, select the setting option you want to use for each locked setting.
6. Click OK.
Epson Universal Print Driver Locked Setting Options
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Epson Universal Print Driver Locked Setting Options
Select the options you want to use for any locked print settings.
Setting Options Description
Watermark Various text
watermarks
Lets you select the text for the watermark or prohibit
watermarks
Add/Delete Lets you add or delete a customized text or image-based
watermark
Settings Lets you select the size, position, and other watermark
settings
Header/Footer Off Prohibits headers or footers
On Allows headers and footers
Settings Lets you select the text and position for printing headers and
footers
2-sided printing Off Allows printing on only one side of the paper
On Allows printing on both sides of the paper
Parent topic: Locking Printer Settings - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Adding Network Printers - Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
You can use the Epson Universal Print Driver to find and add network printers.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click and select Settings > Bluetooth & devices > Printers & scanners.
Select EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
175
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select
EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Manage > Printer properties.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click EPSON Universal Print
Driver and select Printer properties.
• Windows Vista: Click and select Control Panel. Click Printer under Hardware and Sound,
then right-click EPSON Universal Print Driver and select Properties.
2. Click the Optional Settings tab.
You see this window:
3. Click Network printer search.
4. When you see the search results, select Add found printers.
176
You see a screen like this:
5. Select the printer or printers you want to add.
6. Click Add to Printer Folder.
The selected printer or printers appear in the lower section of the screen.
7. Select the checkbox next to the product you want to make your default printer, if necessary.
8. Click OK.
Parent topic: Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
177
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Windows printing program, as
described in these sections.
Note: The PostScript printer software supports products that are connected via Ethernet. If your product
is connected via USB, you will need to install the standard Epson printer software. To download the
standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope sizes:
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 17 × 22 inches (432 × 559 mm)
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A3+ (13 × 19 inches [329 × 483 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
• A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
• 8 × 10 inches (203 × 254 mm)
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• 12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
• SRA3 (12.6 × 17.7 inches [320 × 450 mm])
• Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
178
• Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
• Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
• Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
• No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. If necessary, select your product name as the printer you want to use, and then click the
Preferences button.
You see a window like this:
179
4. Select the Paper Source that matches where you loaded the paper you want to print on.
5. Select the paper type as the Media setting.
6. Select one of the following as the Color setting (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000):
• To print text and graphics in black only, select the Black & White setting.
• To print a color document or photo, select the Color setting.
7. To select additional layout and printing options, select Advanced and select additional settings as
necessary.
Note: You can select staple, fold, sort, and saddle stitch options from Document Options > Printer
Features.
8. Click the Layout tab.
You see this window:
180
9. Select the print options as necessary.
10. Click OK when you are finished.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Selecting Default Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Windows
When you change your print settings in a program, the changes apply only while you are printing in that
program session. If you want to change the print settings you use in all your Windows programs, you can
select new default print settings.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printer properties.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select Print Preferences.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name and select
Printing Preferences.
181
You see a printer settings window like this:
2. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults in all your Windows programs.
3. Click OK.
These settings are now the defaults selected for printing. You can still change them as needed for
printing in any program session.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
You can print with the PostScript (PS3) printer software using any Mac printing program, as described in
these sections.
182
Note: The PostScript printer software supports products that are connected via Ethernet. If your product
is connected via USB, you will need to install the standard Epson printer software. To download the
standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Selecting Basic Print Settings - PostScript Printer Software - Mac
Select the basic settings for the document or photo you want to print.
The PostScript printer software supports plain paper printing on these paper and envelope sizes:
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
• A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
• A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
• B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
• Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
1. Open a photo or document for printing.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
183
3. Select your product as the Printer setting.
4. If necessary, click the arrow next to the Printer setting or the Show Details button to expand the
print window.
You see the expanded printer settings window for your product:
184
Note: The print window may look different, depending on the Mac OS version and the application
you are using.
5. Select the page setup options: Paper Size and Orientation.
Note: If you do not see these settings in the print window, check for them in your application before
printing. They may be accessible by selecting Page Setup from the File menu.
6. Select any application-specific settings that appear on the screen, such as those shown in the image
above for the Preview application.
7. Select Paper Feed from the pop-up menu.
You see these settings:
8. Select All Pages From or First Page From and select the paper source you want to print from.
185
9. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu.
You see these settings:
10. Select any of the following from the pop-up menu as necessary:
• Select Layout to adjust a variety of layout options for your document or photo.
• Select Paper Handling to adjust the size of the image as you print it.
• Select Color Matching to fine-tune the colors in your printout. For monochrome printers, this
adjusts the tone and brightness of your printout.
Parent topic: Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Printing from a Smartphone or Tablet
You can print from a smartphone or tablet running iOS or Android using the Epson Smart Panel app.
Note: Your device must be connected to the same wireless network as your Epson product, and Epson
Smart Panel must be configured for use with your product.
186
1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website.
2. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a print menu on the home screen.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to begin printing.
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
Cancelling Printing Using the Product Control Panel
If you need to cancel printing, select Stop on the LCD screen, then select Job List. Select the job you
want to cancel and select Delete, then select Yes to confirm.
Parent topic: Printing from a Computer
187
Scanning
You can scan your originals and save them as digital files.
Starting a Scan
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scanning Special Projects
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
Starting a Scan
After placing your originals on your product for scanning, start scanning using one of these methods.
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
Starting a Scan from a Scanning Program
Starting a Scan from a Smartphone or Tablet
Parent topic: Scanning
Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
You can scan an image to a variety of destinations using your product's control panel.
1. Make sure you installed the product software and connected the product to your computer or
network.
Note: Restart your computer after installing the product software to enable scanning from the control
panel.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Scan.
188
5. Select one of the following Scan options:
• To Network Folder/FTP saves your scanned file to a specified folder on a network.
• To Email lets you send scanned files through a pre-configured email server.
• To Computer lets you scan to a connected computer using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or
Document Capture (Mac).
• To Memory Device saves your scanned file on a USB device and lets you select the file format,
quality, and other settings.
• To Cloud sends your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with Epson Connect.
• To Storage saves your scanned file to a specified folder in the product's hard drive.
• To WSD lets you manage network scanning in Windows 11, Windows 10, Windows 8.x, or
Windows 7. To use this feature, you must first set up a WSD (Web Services for Devices) port on
your Windows 7 computer (the port is set up automatically on Windows 10 and Windows 8.x).
6. Follow the instructions in the links below to complete your scan.
Scanning to Email
Scanning to a Memory Device
Scanning to the Cloud
Scanning to the Product's Hard Drive
Scanning to a Connected Computer
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7)
Control Panel Scanning Options
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Scanning to Email
You can scan an original and email the scanned file using your product's control panel. You need to
have a preconfigured email server before you can scan to email. You can enter email addresses directly
on the product's control panel or select them from the Recipient tab. Make sure the date and time are
set correctly so the time stamps on your emails are accurate.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan > To Email.
189
4. Do one of the following:
• Select an email address from any of the displayed frequent contacts.
• Select Keyboard to use the on-screen keyboard to enter the email address for the recipient(s)
and select OK.
• Select Recipient and choose an email address from the list.
• Select the icon on the Frequent tab to choose an email address from your recent scan history.
5. Select Scan Settings.
6. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
7. Scroll down to change the Subject and File Name, if necessary.
8. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
Note: Select to reset all scan settings to their default.
Note: To save the scanned image to the product's hard drive, select File Storing and enable the
File Storing setting. Change any of the displayed settings as needed.
9. Select to save your scan settings as a preset.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
10. Select the Send icon.
Your product scans your original and emails the scanned file.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related topics
Using an Email Server
Scanning to a Memory Device
You can scan an original and save the scanned image to an external USB device connected to your
product.
1. Insert an external USB device into the product's USB port.
190
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Scan.
5. Select To Memory Device.
6. Select the settings as necessary.
Note: Select to return all save settings to their default values.
7. Select to save your scan settings as a preset.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
8. Select the Save icon.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the connected memory device.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related topics
Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Scanning to the Cloud
You can use the control panel to send your scanned files to a destination that you have registered with
Epson Connect.
Note: Make sure to set up your product using Epson Connect before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
191
4. Select To Cloud.
5. Select Select Destination and select a cloud destination.
6. Select the settings as necessary.
Note: Select to return all save settings to their default values.
7. Select to save your scan settings as a preset.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
8. Select the Upload icon.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the selected destination.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Using Epson Scan to Cloud
Scanning to the Product's Hard Drive
You can use the control panel to scan files and save them to the product's hard drive.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
4. Select To Storage.
5. Select a folder destination.
6. Select settings as necessary.
Note: Select to return all scan settings to their default values.
192
7. Select to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
8. Select the Save icon.
Your product scans your original and saves the scanned file to the selected folder.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Related topics
Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Scanning to a Connected Computer
You can scan an original and save it to a connected computer using your product's control panel. The
computer must be on the same network as the product.
You can save the scanned file as a PDF file. You can also set up custom scan settings using Document
Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) and automatically scan using those settings on your
product control panel.
Note: Be sure you have installed Epson Scan 2 and Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document
Capture (Mac) on your computer before scanning to your computer.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a multi-page document, place all of the pages in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
4. Select To Computer.
5. Select Select Computer to choose a computer to scan to, and select it when it appears.
Note: The computer you want to scan to must be on the same network as the product or connected
to the product with a USB cable.
193
6. Select one of the scan job options.
Note: The default scan job is Scan to PDF. Any additional scan job options must be added in
Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac). If there is only one job available,
you do not have to select the job.
Note: Select to return all save settings to their default values.
7. Select to save your scan settings as a preset.
8. Select the Save icon.
Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) scans the original to the connected
computer.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up a WSD Port (Windows 7)
You can scan to a networked Windows computer using WSD (Web Services for Devices). You must first
set up a WSD port on your Windows 7 system (the port is set up automatically on Windows 11, Windows
10, and Windows 8.x).
Before you set up a WSD port, make sure you installed your product software, and connected your
product and computer to the same network.
1. Turn on your product.
2. Click and select Computer.
3. On the left side of the window, select Network.
4. Locate your product on the Network screen, right-click it, and select Install.
5. When you see the User Account Control screen, click Continue.
Note: If you see an Uninstall screen, click Uninstall and repeat these steps as necessary.
6. When you see the message Your device is ready to use in the Windows taskbar, click the
message.
7. On the Driver Software Installation screen, make sure your product is listed as Ready to use. Then
click Close.
8. Click and select Devices and Printers.
194
9. Make sure that an icon appears for your product's name on the network.
When you use WSD, select your product name to scan over the network.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Control Panel Scanning Options
Select the options you want to use for scanning.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the Scan to option selected.
Scan Settings Available options Description
Color Mode B&W Select to scan images in black and white
Color Select to scan images in color
File Format JPEG Select for photos. You can also select the
Compression Ratio.
PDF (Single Page) Select for documents. You can also select the
Compression Ratio and PDF Settings.
PDF (Multi Page)
PDF/A (Single Page)
PDF/A (Multi Page)
TIFF (Single Page) Select for scanned files that you can print from a
device. Multi Page TIFF documents are scanned
in black and white.
TIFF (Multi Page)
Resolution 200dpi Select for documents
300dpi Select for photos
600dpi Select for highest quality printing
2-Sided 1-Sided Lets you scan 2-sided originals placed in the
ADF. If you select 2-Sided, you can also select
the Binding (Original) setting.
2-Sided
195
Scan Settings Available options Description
Scan Area Auto Detect Select to automatically adjust the scan area
Various sizes Select the page size for documents
User-Defined Enter a custom scan area
Max Area Scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass.
To specify the orientation of the original, select
Orientation (Original)
Original Type Text Specify the type of original you are scanning
Text & Image
Photo
Orientation (Original) Readable Direction Select the orientation direction for how you
placed the originals
Left Direction
Mixed Size Originals Off Select On to scan originals of varying sizes in
their original sizes
On
Density Varying levels Adjust the lightness or darkness of scanned
images.
Remove Background Varying levels Select the darkness of the background
Remove Shadow Off Erase the shadows that appear in the center of a
document when copying a book ( Center) or the
shadows that appear around a document when
copying thick paper ( Frame)
On
Skip Blank Pages — Skip blank pages when scanning if there are any
in the originals. If non-blank pages are skipped,
adjust the detection level.
Remove Punch Holes Off Erase the binding holes on a document
On
ADF Continuous Scan Off Select On to scan a large number of originals
placed in the ADF as one scanning job
On
Subject — Enter a subject for your email
196
Scan Settings Available options Description
Attached File Max Size Various sizes Select the maximum file size that can be
attached to an email
File Storing Off Select On to save the scanned file to the
printer's internal storage. Adjust the save
settings, including whether to save and print or
send the scanned file, or to only save the file.
On
File Name — Enter a prefix, the date, and the time to the file
name for your scanned file
Mail Encryption Off Select On to encrypt emails before sending
On
Digital Signature Off Select On to attach a digital signature to emails
On
File Password — Set the password for the file
User Name — Set the user name for the file
Erase Red Color — Remove red notes from a scanned image. This
item is not available when using the To
Computer, Storage to Memory Device,
Storage to Email, Storage to Network
Folder/FTP, or Storage to Cloud menu.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan Using the Product Control Panel
Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Before you can scan to a network folder on your computer or on an FTP server, you need to create a
shared folder and optionally register its location to your product's Contacts list. Select the links below as
necessary to create and register the folder, and to scan to it over the network.
Creating a Shared Network Folder
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
197
Creating a Shared Network Folder
You can create a shared network folder on your computer or an FTP site and register its location to your
product's Contacts list.
Note: If you are creating a shared network folder on a Mac, see your Mac documentation for instructions
on creating the folder. The instructions here are for Windows.
First make sure you connected your product and computer to the same network.
Note: If you are running a Home version of the Windows operating system, you cannot create a shared
folder on your Windows desktop or in the Documents or Pictures folder unless you have created a Home
Group Configuration for sharing. You can, however, create a shared folder in the root of the C: drive on
your system.
If you want to scan to a folder on an FTP server, contact the FTP server administrator for the server
address and authentication access to a shared folder on the server.
1. If you are scanning to a network folder on your computer, do one of the following to check the format
of your computer name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Hold down the Windows key on your keyboard and
press the X key. Select System from the list that appears. Check the Computer Name or Device
Name listed for your computer on the System window.
• Windows 7: Click , right-click Computer, and select Properties. Check the Computer Name
listed for your computer on the System window.
Note: The settings in these steps may vary, depending on your version of Windows. See Windows
Help for details on your operating system.
2. If the computer's name uses any characters that are not alphanumeric (letters or numbers), do one
of the following to change the computer's name:
• Windows 11, Windows 10, or Windows 8.x: Select Rename this PC and follow the on-screen
prompts.
• Windows 7: Select Change Settings, change the computer's name, and click OK. (See Windows
Help for instructions, if necessary.)
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to change the computer's name.
After changing the name, restart your computer.
198
3. Click the Windows start button, then select Windows System > Control Panel.
4. On the Control Panel, click Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center > Change
advanced sharing settings.
The network profile is displayed.
Make sure that Turn on file and printer sharing is selected under File and Printer Sharing for the
network profile (current profile). If already selected, click Cancel to close the window.
5. Start File Explorer or Windows Explorer.
6. Create a folder on the Windows desktop with a folder name of 12 characters or less; otherwise, your
product may not be able to access the folder.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to access the desktop folder and the
document folder under each User folder.
7. Right-click the folder you created and select Properties.
8. On the General tab, deselect the Read-only checkbox to allow users to access the folder over the
network.
9. Select the Sharing tab and click the Advanced Sharing button.
Note: You need to be logged into Windows as an administrator to select the Advanced Sharing
button.
10. On the Advanced Sharing screen, select the Share this folder checkbox.
11. Click the Permissions button and select the following on the Share Permissions tab:
• Select Everyone under Group or user names.
• Select the checkbox in the Allow column for the Change setting.
12. Click OK to save the settings, then click OK again to close the Advanced Sharing window.
13. Select the Security tab and check that the Group or user names list at the top includes the current
computer user and the administrators who can now access the folder.
14. Select the Sharing tab again and write down the Network Path listed under Network File and Folder
Sharing at the top. This is the path you will register to your product's Contacts list so you can select it
for network scanning.
15. Click OK or Close.
Now you can register the folder path to your product's Contacts list.
199
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Registering Contacts for Network Folder or FTP Scanning - Web Config
You can register a list of contacts for scanning to a network folder or FTP server using Web Config and
your computer's internet browser.
Before you begin, print a network status sheet and locate the IP address for your product on the sheet.
1. Start an internet browser on a computer that is using the same network as your product.
2. Type your product's IP address into the address bar and press Enter.
3. Click Continue to this website (not recommended).
Note: This step may vary depending on the browser version you are using.
4. Click the Scan/Copy tab.
5. Click Contacts.
6. Select an empty number you want to use for the contact you are adding and click Edit.
7. Enter the following information for the contact:
• Name: The name to display in your product's contact list.
• Index Word: Enter a word to identify this entry when searching for it (up to 30 characters). This
field is optional.
• Type: Select Network Folder (SMB), FTP, or SharePoint(WebDAV).
• Assign to Frequent Use: If you want to identify the contact as a frequently used address, select
On. This makes it quicker to select the contact when you scan.
• Save to: The network path to the shared folder.
Enter the folder path name in one of the following formats depending on the Type setting you
selected:
• SMB: host_name\folder
• FTP/SharePoint: host_name/folder_name
• Secure Connection: For FTP locations, select the secure connection type.
• User Name and Password: Enter only if you have set up a password on your computer.
• Connection Mode: For FTP locations, select Passive Mode if there is a firewall between the
product and FTP server.
• Port Number: For FTP locations, enter the port number.
200
• Certificate Validation: For FTP locations, choose to enable or disable an imported certificate.
Note: This setting is only available if you select FTPS as the Secure Connection setting.
8. Click Apply.
After a moment, you see a message telling you that contact registration is complete.
9. Close your web browser.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Registering Contacts for Email, Network, or FTP Scanning - Control Panel
You can create a list of contacts for scanning to email or to a network folder or FTP.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance. You can create up to 2,000 contacts and contact groups combined
(including fax contacts for models with optional fax board installed).
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Contacts Manager.
4. Select Add/Edit/Delete.
5. Select Add New.
6. Select Add Contact.
7. Do one of the following:
• To create a contact for scanning to fax, select Fax (models with optional fax board installed).
• To create a contact for scanning to email, select Email.
• To create a location for scanning to a network folder or FTP, select Network Folder/FTP.
8. Select the number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
9. Select the Name field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters)
and select OK.
10. Select the Index Word field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters) and select OK. (This field is optional.)
201
11. Do one of the following:
• For a fax contact (models with optional fax board installed), select the Fax Number field. Use the
displayed keyboard to enter the fax number and select OK.
Select any other fax settings as necessary.
• For an email contact, select the Email Address field. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the
address and select OK.
• For a network folder or FTP location, select the Communication Mode field and select Network
Folder (SMB) or FTP. Then select the Location field, use the on-screen keyboard to enter the
location, and select OK. Enter other information if necessary.
Enter the folder path name for the Location setting in one of the following formats depending on
the Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
12. Select OK.
Note: If you need to edit or delete scanning contacts, the procedures are the same as for fax contacts.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
You can scan an image and save it to a network folder using your product's control panel. You can either
enter the folder path directly on the product's control panel or select a folder from the Destination tab.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
1. Place your original on the product for scanning.
Note: To scan a double-sided or multi-page document, place your originals in the ADF.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Scan.
4. Select To Network Folder/FTP.
5. Do one of the following:
• Choose a saved location on the Destination tab.
202
• Select Keyboard, select the Communication Mode field, and select Network Folder (SMB) or
FTP. Then select the Location (Required) field, enter the folder location, and select OK. Enter
other information as necessary.
Enter the folder path name for the location setting in one of the following formats depending on the
Communication Mode setting you selected:
• SMB: \\host name\folder name
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
• FTPS: ftps://host name/folder name
• WebDAV (HTTPS): https://host name/folder name
• WebDAV (HTTP): http://host name/folder name
• Select an email address from any displayed frequent contacts.
6. Select Scan Settings.
7. Select File Format to choose the file format for your scan.
8. Scroll down to select File Name and change it if necessary.
9. Select any additional scan settings as necessary.
Note: Select to return all save settings to their default values.
10. Select to save your scan settings.
Note: Presets can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
11. Select the Save icon.
Your product scans your original and saves it in the selected location.
Parent topic: Setting Up and Scanning to a Network Folder or FTP Server
Starting a Scan Using the Epson Scan 2 Icon
You can start the Epson Scan 2 program to select scan settings, scan, and save the scanned image to a
file.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
203
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select EPSON
> Epson Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2.
• Mac: Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Epson Scan 2.
205
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
1. Open your scanning program and select its scanning option. (See your scanning program help for
instructions.)
2. Select your product.
Note: In certain programs, you may need to select your product as the "source" first. If you see a
Select Source option, choose it and select your product. With Windows, do not select a WIA option
for your product; not all scan functions will be available.
207
1. Download the Epson Smart Panel app from your device's app store or from Epson's website. See
the link below.
2. Place your original on the product for scanning.
3. Open the Epson Smart Panel app and select a scan menu on the home screen.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to scan and save your original.
Parent topic: Starting a Scan
Related tasks
Using the Epson Smart Panel Mobile App
Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
When you scan with Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac), the program
automatically saves your scanned file on your computer in the folder you specify. You can preview and
edit the scanned file, change the scanned file settings, and send to a destination if necessary.
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac
Parent topic: Scanning
Scanning with Simple Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can use the Simple Scan option in Document Capture Pro to quickly scan an original.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
208
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Select your scanner from the list, if necessary.
3. Select the Simple Scan tab.
You see a window like this:
4. Select the size of your original from the Document Size menu.
5. If you want to change specific settings for the scan, click the Scan Settings button. Change any of
the settings as necessary and click OK. For additional settings, click the Detailed Settings button
on the Scan Settings screen.
6. Do one of the following:
• To scan both sides of an original, select SCAN double-sided.
• To scan the front side of an original, select SCAN single-sided.
Your product scans the original and the image appears in the Edit Scanned Results window.
7. Review and edit the scanned image as necessary and click Next when you are finished.
209
8. Select a destination for the scanned image, change any settings as necessary, and click Complete.
Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your
login information.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can create scan jobs in Document Capture Pro and use them to quickly scan originals and save
them to various destinations.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Add and select your product in the Epson Scan 2 Scanner Settings list, if necessary. Open
Epson Scan 2, then select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
3. Select the Job Scan tab.
210
You see a window like this:
4. Select one of the scan jobs (or click Job Settings to create a new scan job).
The product scans the loaded original and saves it according to the job settings.
5. Depending on the settings for the scan job you selected, you may be able to view and edit the pages
before saving them. If so, click Complete when finished.
The scanned image is saved according to the job settings.
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Adding and Assigning Scan Jobs with Document Capture Pro - Windows
You can add scan jobs that contain specific scan settings and use the jobs when you scan from your
product control panel or the Job Scan option in Document Capture Pro. You can save up to 30 scan
jobs.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
211
1. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
Note: Add and select your product in the Epson Scan 2 Scanner Settings list, if necessary. Open
Epson Scan 2, then select Settings from the Scanner drop-down list.
2. Select the Job Scan tab.
You see a screen like this:
3. Click the Job Settings button.
212
You see a screen like this:
4. To add a scan job, click the New Job icon.
5. Enter a name for the new job, and select any settings as necessary from the following options:
• Scan: select the size, color, or resolution
• Save: select the file name, file type, or destination folder
• Index: enable the index setting and choose output options for an index file
• Send: select the destination for the scanned file, or choose to email or print the file
• Confirm/Test: select the job button icon and color, choose display settings, and run a test scan if
necessary
6. Click Save when you are finished.
The new job appears in the Job Scan window.
Note: Click OK, if necessary.
7. To assign a scan job to the product control panel, click the Button Assignment icon.
213
You see a screen like this:
8. Select the jobs that you want to assign to the product control panel using any of the pull-down
menus.
Note: The number of pull-down menus available may vary, depending on your product and any
connected options.
9. Click OK, then click Back.
You can now use the added scan jobs when you scan from the product control panel.
Parent topic: Scanning with Job Scan in Document Capture Pro - Windows
Scanning with Document Capture - Mac
When you scan with Document Capture, the program automatically saves your scanned file on your
computer in the folder you specify. You can select settings, preview, and change the scanned file
settings as necessary. Document Capture also allows you to send the scanned file directly to an email
address or printer, or upload it to a server or cloud destination.
214
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. See the Help menu in
Document Capture at any time for more information.
1. Load your original in the product.
2. Open the Applications folder, open the Epson Software folder, and select Document Capture.
You see a window like this:
Note: You may need to select your product from the drop-down list.
3. Click the scan icon.
215
You see a window like this:
Note: If you want to use a scan job that you created instead, select it from the Job list in the
Document Capture window, click the Start Job button, and skip the rest of these steps.
4. Select any displayed scan settings you want to use.
Note: See the Help information in Document Capture for details.
5. If you want to select detailed scan settings, close the Scan Settings window, open the Scan menu at
the top of the Mac desktop, and select Displays the EPSON Scan Setup Screen.
6. Click the Scan icon and select any detailed scan settings you want to use from the Epson Scan 2
window.
7. Click Scan.
216
You see a preview of your scan in the Document Capture window.
Note: You may have to close the Epson Scan 2 window to view your scan in the Document Capture
window.
8. If you would like to scan additional originals and add them to the current captured images, click the +
icon, select Acquire from Scanner, and repeat the previous steps.
9. Check the scanned images and edit them as necessary.
10. Click one of the destination icons to choose where to send your scanned files. (If you cannot see all
of the icons, click the arrow next to the icons.) Change any settings as necessary.
Note: If you are sending the scanned image to a server or cloud destination, you need to enter your
login information. If you want to use Evernote as the destination, download the Evernote application
from the Evernote Corporation website and install it before scanning.
11. Depending on the destination you chose, click OK, Print, or Send to complete the operation.
Parent topic: Scanning with Document Capture Pro or Document Capture
Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Epson Scan 2 gives you access to basic and advanced scanning features. You can scan your document
and save the scanned image in various file formats in your operating system's Documents or My
Documents folder, or open it in your scanning program. You can preview the scanned image and select
or change settings as necessary.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
1. Start Epson Scan 2.
217
You see this window:
218
2. Select the Document Source setting that matches where you placed your original.
3. Select the Document Size setting that matches the size of your original. You can select Customize
to enter a custom size, if necessary.
4. Select the image type of your original and how you want it scanned as the Image Type setting.
5. Select the Resolution setting you want to use for your scan.
6. Click the Preview button.
Epson Scan 2 previews your original and displays the results in the Epson Scan 2 window.
7. Click the Advanced Settings tab and select any settings that you want to use.
8. Select the format in which you want to save your scanned file as the Image Format setting. If
necessary, select Options and select any desired format options.
9. Enter the file name for your scanned file in the File Name field. If necessary, select Settings to
modify the file name settings.
10. Select the location in which you want to save your scanned file as the Folder setting. If necessary,
select Select to create a new folder.
11. Click Scan.
The product scans your original and saves the scanned file in the location you specified.
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2
Image Format Options
Scan Resolution Guidelines
Parent topic: Scanning
Additional Scanning Settings - Main Settings Tab
You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Main Settings tab. Not all
adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Stitch Images
When scanning double-sided originals, lets you lay out images from both sides of the original onto
one scanned page.
219
Rotate
Rotates the original image clockwise to the desired angle before scanning it. Select Auto to allow
your product to automatically rotate the image based on the orientation of the text (may take longer to
scan).
Correct Document Skew
Corrects skewed originals, image contents, or both.
Add or edit pages after scanning
Lets you add, remove, or edit the pages in a scan, including rotating pages and changing the page
order.
Note: To save multiple pages in a single file, you must select a file format that supports multiple
pages such as PDF or Multi-TIFF. If you select another file format, each scanned image or page is
saved as a separate file.
Skip Blank Pages
If the scanner detects marks from the other side of a blank page and adds the marks to the scanned
image, adjust this setting to prevent this.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Additional Scanning Settings - Advanced Settings Tab
You can select these additional scanning settings on the Epson Scan 2 Advanced Settings tab. Not all
adjustment settings may be available, depending on other settings you have chosen.
Text Enhancement
Sharpens the appearance of letters in text documents.
Auto Area Segmentation
Makes black and white images clearer and text recognition more accurate by separating the text from
the graphics.
Threshold
Adjusts the level at which black areas in text and line art are delineated, improving text recognition in
OCR (Optical Character Recognition) programs.
Color Enhance
Enhances the shades of the color you select in the scanned image. This setting is available only if you
select Grayscale or Black & White as the Image Type setting.
Brightness
Adjusts the overall lightness and darkness of the scanned image.
220
Contrast
Adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of the overall scanned image.
Gamma
Adjusts the midtone density of the scanned image.
Sharpness
Makes the edges of certain image areas clearer. Turn off this option to leave softer edges.
Descreening
Removes the ripple pattern that might appear in subtly shaded image areas, such as skin tones. This
option improves results when scanning magazines or newspapers. (The results of descreening do not
appear in the preview image, only in your scanned image.)
Edge Fill
Corrects shadowing around the edges of the image by filling the shadows with black or white.
Dual Image Output
Scans the original image twice using different output settings (Windows only).
Watermark
Adds a watermark to a scanned image.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Saving Scanned Documents as a Searchable PDF Using Epson Scan 2
You can scan a document and save the text in a searchable PDF. In a searchable PDF, text is
recognized using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and then embedded in the scanned original.
Note: The required Epson Scan 2 OCR Component is installed automatically when you install your
product software. If you install your product software programs individually, be sure to also install this
component if you want to perform OCR.
1. Load your original in the product for scanning.
2. Start Epson Scan 2.
3. Select your scan settings.
4. Click Preview and adjust the area you want to scan, if necessary.
5. If you are using the ADF, reload the ejected original.
6. Select Searchable PDF as the Image Format setting.
7. Select Options from the Image Format list.
221
You see this window:
8. Select any of the options on the General tab.
9. Select the Text tab.
10. Make sure the language used in the document text is selected as the Text Language setting.
11. Select the Security tab if you want to add a password to the PDF or protect printing or editing
properties.
12. Click OK.
13. Confirm the File Name setting and select a Folder setting for your document.
14. Click Scan.
The scanned image is saved as a searchable PDF.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Image Format Options
You can select different image formats and related options. For details on available options, click the ?
icon on the Epson Scan 2 Image Format Options window. Not all image formats have options.
222
BITMAP (*.bmp)
A standard image file format for most Windows programs.
JPEG (*.jpg)
An image format that lets you highly compress image data. However, the higher the compression, the
lower the image quality. (The TIFF format is recommended when you need to modify or retouch your
scanned image.)
PNG (*.png)
An image format that does not lose quality during editing.
TIFF (*.tif)
A file format created for exchanging data between many programs, such as graphic and DTP
software.
Multi-TIFF (*.tif)
A TIFF file format when multiple pages are saved to the same file, allowing you to edit the images
using a compatible program.
PDF (*.pdf)
A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or
other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file.
Searchable PDF (*.pdf)
A document format that is readable by Windows and Mac systems using Adobe Reader, Acrobat, or
other programs. You can save multi-page documents in one PDF file. Recognized text in the scanned
document can be searched.
In order to use the OCR option to create searchable PDFs, you must install the OCR license key.
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scan Resolution Guidelines
The Resolution setting, measured in dpi (dots per inch), controls the amount of detail captured in your
scans. Increasing the resolution raises the amount of detail captured but comes with the following
disadvantages:
• Larger file sizes
• It takes longer to scan your originals, send/receive your scans by email or fax, and to print your scans
• The image may become too large to fit on your display or print on paper
223
If you plan to enlarge a scanned image so you can print it at a larger size, you may need to increase the
resolution from the default resolution set by Epson Scan 2. Follow these guidelines to determine the
resolution setting you need:
• You will scan the image at its original size but enlarge it later in an image-editing program.
Increase the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting in your scan. Increase the resolution by the same
amount you will increase the image size to retain a high image quality. For example, if the resolution is
300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the image size later, change the Resolution setting to 600
dpi.
• You will scan the image at 100% or a smaller size.
Select the Epson Scan 2 Resolution setting based on how you will use the scanned image:
• Email/view on a computer screen/post on the web: 96 to 200 dpi
• Print/fax/convert to editable text (OCR)/create searchable PDF: 200 to 300 dpi
Parent topic: Scanning in Epson Scan 2
Scanning Special Projects
Your product's scanning software offers various options to help you quickly complete special scan
projects.
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Windows
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows
Parent topic: Scanning
Scanning to a SharePoint Server or Cloud Service - Windows
You can use Document Capture Pro (Windows) to upload scanned images to a SharePoint server or a
cloud service.
Note: The settings may vary, depending on the software version you are using. See the help information
in Document Capture Pro for details.
1. Load your original in the product.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
224
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
3. Select the Simple Scan tab.
You see a window like this:
4. If you want to select specific scan settings for the scan, click the Scan Settings button, select any
displayed settings you want to use, and click OK.
Note: See the help information in Document Capture Pro for details.
5. Do one of the following:
• To scan both sides of an original, select SCAN double-sided.
• To scan the front side of an original, select SCAN single-sided.
Your product starts scanning and you see the Edit Scanned Results window.
225
6. View and edit the scanned pages as necessary and click Next when you are finished.
Note: See the help information in Document Capture Pro for details.
7. Click one of the cloud server or service destination icons. You see the settings window.
8. Enter any required information to set up the destination. You may need to log in to your cloud service
to authenticate the connection and allow Document Capture Pro to access the cloud service.
9. Adjust any settings and click Complete.
Note: See the help information in Document Capture Pro for details.
Your originals are uploaded to the indicated server or cloud service.
Parent topic: Scanning Special Projects
Scanning Multi-Page Originals as Separate Files - Windows
You can use Document Capture Pro to scan multi-page originals as separate scanned files. You can
indicate how the separate files are created by defining a maximum page count per file or by inserting
blank pages, barcodes, or characters that can be detected by the software as separation markers.
Note: Settings may vary depending on the software version you are using. Click the Help icon in
Document Capture Pro at any time for more information.
1. Load your multi-page original in the product.
2. Do one of the following to start Document Capture Pro:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Document Capture Pro and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Document Capture Pro.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
You see the Document Capture Pro window.
3. Select the Job Scan tab.
226
You see a window like this:
4. Click the Job Settings button.
You see a window like this:
227
5. Select New Job and select the scan settings. Click Next when finished.
You see a window like this:
6. Select the Apply job separation checkbox.
7. Select the method you want to use to separate the originals as the Separator setting. Click
Separation Settings to specify the settings for the selected option.
8. Finish creating the new scan job and click Save.
9. Click Back on the Job Settings screen.
Your originals are saved into separate files and folders as specified when the job is run.
Parent topic: Scanning Special Projects
Entering a User ID and Password for Scanning
If you enabled Access Control on your product, a user ID and password may be required to scan. You
can enter the user ID and password in Epson Scan 2.
Note: If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Start Epson Scan 2.
229
Faxing
See these sections to fax using your product.
Note: An optional fax board must be installed on your product before you can fax. Once the optional fax
board is installed, download and install the Epson Fax Utility software. Visit epson.com/support (U.S.),
epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Note: This product allows you to store names, telephone numbers, and fax data in its memory even
when the power is turned off. Make sure you restore all of the default settings if you give away or dispose
of the product. This will erase all of your network settings and fax data.
Note: When using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product,
you can fax using the printer buttons or the utilities included with the standard Epson printer software. To
download the standard Epson printer software, visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support
(Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product.
Note: Make sure the date and time are set correctly before using this feature.
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
Setting Up Fax Features
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Sending Faxes
Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
Printing Fax Reports
Related tasks
Selecting the Date and Time
Connecting a Telephone or Answering Machine
You must connect your product to a telephone wall jack to send or receive faxes. If you want to use the
same telephone line to receive calls, you can connect a telephone or answering machine to your product
using an additional phone cable.
Note: If you do not connect a telephone to your product, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto.
Otherwise, you cannot receive faxes.
230
1. Connect a phone cable to your telephone wall jack and to the LINE port on your product.
Note: If more than one optional fax board is installed on your product, you can connect more than
one phone cable.
Note: If you have a DSL or ISDN connection, you must connect the appropriate DSL filter, or ISDN
terminal adapter or router to the wall jack to be able to use the line for faxing or voice calls using your
product. Contact your DSL or ISDN provider for the necessary equipment.
231
DSL or ISDN connection
232
2. If you are connecting a telephone or answering machine to your product using a second phone
cable, remove the cap from the EXT port on your product.
233
3. Connect a second phone cable to your telephone or answering machine and to the EXT port on your
product.
Note: If you connect an answering machine and Receive Mode is set to Auto, set the number of
rings before your product answers a call to a number that is higher than your answering machine's
setting for the number of rings.
234
Any phone or answering machine must be connected to the EXT port for your product to detect an
incoming fax call when the phone is picked up. Epson cannot guarantee compatibility with VoIP,
cable phone systems, or fiberoptic digital services such as FIOS.
Parent topic: Faxing
Setting Up Fax Features
Before faxing with your product, set up your fax header and select the fax features you want to use.
Note: If you leave your product unplugged for a long period of time, you may need to reset the date and
time settings for faxes.
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows
Parent topic: Faxing
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
See these sections to select the basic settings you need to use the product's fax features.
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
Selecting the Line Type
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Using the Fax Setup Wizard
You can setup the product's basic fax settings using the Fax Setting Wizard. This wizard is automatically
displayed when the product is turned on for the first time. You can also change these settings individually
from the Fax Settings menu.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Setting Wizard.
3. Select Proceed.
235
4. On the fax header screen, use the displayed keypad to enter the sender name for your fax source,
such as your name or a business name. You can enter up to 40 characters. Select OK when you are
done.
5. On the phone number screen, use the displayed keypad to enter your fax number, up to 20
characters. Select OK when you are done.
Note: The name and phone number in the fax header identifies the source of the faxes you send.
6. On the Distinctive Ring Setting screen, do one of the following:
• If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, select Proceed.
Select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes and skip to step 9. If you select All, go to the
next step.
• If you do not have a distinctive ring service, select Skip and go to step 9.
Note: Distinctive ring services allows you to have several phone numbers on one phone line. Each
number is assigned a different ring pattern. You can use one number for voice calls and another for
fax calls. Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in the DRD Setting. If you select a ring pattern
other than All, Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto.
7. On the Receive Mode Setting screen, do one of the following:
• If you have connected an external telephone or answering machine to the product, select Yes and
go to the next step.
• If you did not connect an external telephone or answering machine, select No and go to step 9.
(Receive Mode is automatically set to Auto; otherwise you cannot receive faxes.)
8. On the next Receive Mode Setting screen, select Yes to receive faxes automatically or select No to
receive faxes manually.
Note: If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make
sure the Rings to Answer setting is correct. If you select to receive faxes manually, you need to
answer every call and operate the product’s control panel or your phone to receive faxes.
9. On the Proceed screen, confirm the displayed settings and select Proceed, or press the back arrow
to change the settings.
10. On the Run Check Fax Connection screen, select Start Checking and follow the on-screen
instructions to check the fax connection and print a report of the check result. If there are any errors
reported, try the solutions on the report and run the check again.
236
11. If the Select Line Type screen appears, select the correct line type.
• If you are connecting the printer to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, select PBX.
• If you are connecting the printer to a standard phone line, select PSTN, and then select Do Not
Detect on the Confirmation screen displayed. However, setting this to Do Not Detect may cause
the printer to skip the first digit of a fax number when dialing and send the fax to the wrong
number.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting the Line Type
If you connect the product to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, you must change the product's
line type. PBX (Private Branch Exchange) is used in office environments where an external access code
such as “9” must be dialed to call an outside line. The default Line Type setting is PSTN (Public Switched
Telephone Network), which is a standard home phone line.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you can't access or change this setting, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type > PBX.
3. Select Access Code.
4. Select Use.
5. Select the Access Code field.
6. Use the displayed keypad to enter the access code, such as 9, and select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Setting the Number of Rings to Answer
If you connect an external answering machine and select to receive faxes automatically, make sure the
Rings to Answer setting is correct. The number of rings should be higher than the number of rings your
answering machine is set to for answering a call.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rings to Answer.
237
3. Select the number of rings and select OK. Make sure to select a number higher than the number of
rings your answering machine is set to for answering a call.
Note: An answering machine picks up every call faster than the product, but the product can detect fax
tones and start receiving faxes. If you answer the phone and hear a fax tone, check that the product has
started receiving the fax, then hang up the phone.
Parent topic: Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
You can select a variety of advanced fax settings.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change these setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings.
3. Select the group of settings you want to change.
Basic Settings - Fax
Send Settings - Fax
Receive Settings - Fax
Report Settings - Fax
Security Settings - Fax
Parent topic: Setting Up Fax Features
Basic Settings - Fax
Set the basic options you want to use for incoming and outgoing faxes.
Setting Options Description
Fax Speed Fast(33,600bps) Sets the speed at which you send and receive faxes.
Medium(14,400bps)
Slow(9,600bps)
238
Setting Options Description
ECM On Turns on Error Correction Mode (ECM) to
automatically correct errors in sent or received fax
data.
Off Turns off Error Correction Mode (ECM); color faxes
cannot be sent or received.
Dial Tone Detection On Automatically dials the number you enter for faxing
when the product detects a dial tone.
Off Turns off automatic dial tone detection, which may
be necessary if the product is connected to a PBX
(Private Branch Exchange) or a TA (Terminal
Adapter). However, turning this setting off may cause
the product to drop the first digit of a fax number.
Line Type PSTN Selects a standard phone line (Public Switched
Telephone Network).
PBX Selects Private Branch Exchange, the type of phone
line used in office environments where an access
code such as 9 must be used to call an outside line.
Header Your Phone
Number
Select to enter the header information and your
phone number for inclusion on outgoing faxes.
Fax Header
Receive Mode Manual Lets you confirm whether an incoming fax should be
printed; a telephone must be connected to the
product
Auto Automatically receives and prints faxes.
Distinctive Ring All If you are using a Distinctive Ring Service on your
phone line, your telephone company can assign two
or more phone numbers to the same line and assign
different ring patterns to each. If you use this service,
select the number of rings for your fax number so
your product can receive faxes on the correct
number of rings. Select All for phones lines that do
not use this service.
Single
Double
Triple
Double&Triple
239
Setting Options Description
Rings to Answer 1 to 9 Sets the number of rings before your product
receives a fax. If Receive Mode is set to Auto and an
answering machine is connected to the product,
make sure this setting is set higher than the number
of rings your answering machine is set to answer a
call.
Remote Receive Off Lets you start receiving faxes using your phone
instead of operating the product (if the Receive Mode
is set to Auto). When you select On, you must also
set a Start Code. If you are using a cordless handset
with its base connected to the product, you can start
receiving the fax by entering the code using the
handset.
On
Start Code
Rejection Fax Various Lets you automatically reject faxes from blocked
numbers, with blank headers, or from unrecognized
contacts.
Receiving Paper Size Various Selects the paper size for incoming faxes.
Save/Forward File
Format
PDF Saves or forwards a fax as a PDF file. You can also
set a password for opening the PDF or allowing
printing and editing permissions.
TIFF Saves or forwards a fax as a TIFF file.
Cloud Destination List Various When using Epson Connect, you can register up to
five addresses to the cloud service that is being
administered by Epson Connect. You can upload
document data as a file when forwarding faxes by
specifying the registered address as a destination.
Depending on the country and region, you may not
be able to use online services.
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Send Settings - Fax
Set the send options you want to use for outgoing faxes.
240
Setting Options Description
Auto Rotation Off Sends an A4 or letter-size document that is placed
long edge first into the ADF as an A3-size fax.
When you place A4 size originals with their long edge
facing to the left and A3 size originals in the ADF, you
can rotate the scanned A4 size originals to send them
at A4 size by selecting Off as the Direct Send setting.
On
Quick memory send Off Sends the first page of a multi-page document as
soon as it finishes scanning. Select this option to
decrease the amount of time it takes to fax a
document.
On
Batch Send Off Sorts outgoing faxes by recipient in the product's
memory, and then sends them as a batch.
Up to five documents (200 pages total) can be sent at
one time.
On
Save Failure Data Off Saves faxes that failed to be sent in the product’s
memory. You can resend the faxes from the product's
Job/Status screen.
When you select On, you can select a time period to
store the saved faxes.
On
Wait Time for Next
Original
Off Sets a time in between sending the next fax.
On
Fax Preview Display
Time
Off Sets a time for previewing the scanned document on
the LCD screen before it is sent.
On
Allow Backup Allowed Allows you to back up sent faxes. Select Fax > Fax
Settings > Backup to view backed up faxes.
Not Allowed
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Receive Settings - Fax
Set the save/forward or print options you want to use for incoming faxes.
Save/Forward Settings
241
Setting Options Description
Unconditional
Save/Forward
Save to Inbox Saves received faxes in printer's inbox
Save to Computer Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on
a computer connected to the printer
Save to Memory
Device
Converts received faxes to PDFs and saves them on
an external memory device connected to the printer
Forward Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or
converts them to PDFs or TIFFs and forwards them to
a shared folder on a network, or an email address.
You can also forward them to a cloud destination in
either PDF or JPEG format. Forwarded faxes are
deleted from the printer.
Email Notifications Sends an email notification after a fax is received,
printed, saved, or forwarded
Conditional
Save/Forward
— Sets up conditions to save, forward, or print received
faxes. Select Unregistered to enter conditions and
other settings.
Common Settings Inbox Settings Sets up what happens when the fax memory is full, or
sets up a password for the inbox.
Email Subject to
Forward
Specifies a subject when forwarding a fax to an email
address.
Box Document
Delete Settings
Select On to automatically delete received faxes after
a set period of time.
Print Settings
Setting Options Description
Auto Reduction On Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit
on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Off Select to print large incoming faxes at their original
size on multiple sheets, if necessary.
242
Setting Options Description
Split Page Settings Delete Print Data
After Split
Select how to split large incoming faxes across
multiple sheets when using the Auto Reduction
option.
Overlap When
Split
Acting Print On(Split to Pages) Select to split large incoming faxes across multiple
sheets.
On (Reduce to Fit) Select to reduce the size of large received faxes to fit
on the paper size in the selected paper source.
Off Select to print large incoming faxes at their original
size on multiple sheets, if necessary.
Auto Rotation On If you have loaded A5-size paper, select On to rotate
landscape-oriented incoming faxes so that they print
correctly on the paper.
Off
Add Reception
Information
On Select On to include the date, time, the sender's
information, and a page number in the header of your
incoming faxes.
Off
2-Sided On Select On to print incoming faxes double sided. You
can also select the Binding Margin.
Off
Print Start Timing All Pages
Received
Select to print incoming faxes after the product
receives all of the pages of the document.
First Page
Received
Select to print incoming faxes as soon as the product
receives the first page of the document.
Collation Stack On Select On to print incoming faxes so that the pages
are stacked in the correct page order. (When the
product is low on memory, this option may not be
available.)
Off
Print Suspend Time Off Select On to set a time period to stop automatic
printing of faxes or reports and save received faxes in
the product’s memory. (Make sure there is enough
free memory before using this function.)
On
Time to Stop
Time to Restart
243
Setting Options Description
Quiet Mode On Select On to reduce noise during printing (printing
speed may be reduced).
Off
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Report Settings - Fax
Set the options you want for fax reports.
Setting Options Description
Forwarding Report Print on Error Prints a report after forwarding a received document
only if an error occurs
Print Prints a report after forwarding a received document
Do Not Print Does not print a report after forwarding a received
document
Backup Error Report On Select On to print a report when a backup error for
sending faxes occurs
Off
Fax Log Off Does not print a fax log
On(Every 100) Prints a fax log after every 100 fax jobs are
completed
On(Time) Prints a fax log at a specified time. If the number of
completed fax jobs exceeds 30, the fax log prints
before the specified time.
Reception Report Print on Error Prints a report after receiving a fax only if an error
occurs
Print Prints a report after receiving a fax
Do Not Print Does not print a report after receiving a fax
244
Setting Options Description
Attach Fax image to
report
Off Does not include an image on the Transmission
Report
On(Large Image) Prints a Transmission Report that includes the upper
part of the first page of the sent document
On(Small Image) Prints a Transmission Report that includes a reduced
size of the entire first page of the sent document
Fax Log Layout Combine Send and
Receive
Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception
Report on the same sheet when you print a fax log
Separate Send and
Receive
Prints a Transmission Report and a Reception
Report on separate sheets when you print a fax log
Report Format Simple Prints a simple fax report
Detail Prints a fax report that includes error codes
Fax Log Output Method Print Prints fax reports
Save to Memory
Device
Saves fax reports to an inserted memory device.
Select Create a folder to save fax data to create a
folder on the inserted memory device.
Forward Forwards fax reports to a specified destination
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Security Settings - Fax
Set the security options you want to use for fax data.
Setting Options Description
Direct Dialing
Restrictions
Off Does not restrict dialed fax numbers.
On Allows faxing only to numbers stored in the contacts
list or history.
Enter Twice Requires you to enter fax numbers twice to prevent
errors.
Broadcasting
Restrictions
Off Select On to allow only one fax number to be entered
as the recipient
On
245
Setting Options Description
Confirm Address List Off Selects whether or not to display a recipient
confirmation screen before a fax is sent.
On
Backup Data Auto Clear Off Automatically erases sent or received fax data from
your product's memory.
On
Clear Backup Data — Deletes all sent or received fax data remaining in your
product's memory; run this function if you are giving
away or disposing of your product.
Parent topic: Selecting Advanced Fax Settings
Setting Up the Fax Utility - Windows
You can set up the FAX Utility for Windows for use with your product.
Note: Before using the FAX Utility for Windows, make sure you have set up the fax features on your
product using the product control panel. Also first confirm that you can send and receive faxes using the
control panel.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for EPSON Software and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select EPSON Software.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start > Programs or All Programs > EPSON Software.
2. Select FAX Utility.
246
The first time you use the FAX Utility, you see this introduction window:
3. Read about the FAX Utility and click Return to the main window at the bottom of the window.
248
Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
You can set up a list of contacts and their fax numbers so you can quickly select them for faxing. You
can also set up contact groups to send a fax message to multiple contacts.
Note: Contacts can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change contacts, contact
your administrator for assistance.
Creating a Contact
Editing or Deleting a Contact
Creating a Contact Group
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
Parent topic: Faxing
Creating a Contact
You can create a list of contacts to save frequently used fax numbers.
Note: You can create up to 2,000 contacts and contact groups combined.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the Recipient tab. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select Add Contact.
6. Select the registry number you want to use for the contact you are adding.
7. Select the Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the contact name (up to 30 characters),
and select OK.
8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for
an entry (up to 30 characters), and select OK.
Note: This field is automatically populated after you enter the name. This field is optional.
249
9. Select the Fax Number field, and use the numeric keypad on the LCD screen or the buttons on the
product to enter the fax number. You can enter up to 64 characters. Select OK when you are done.
Note: If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax number.
If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign instead of the
code.
Note: If you are using an IP fax destination, select IP-FAX as the Line Type and select Close.
10. Set the Fax Communication Mode, Subaddress, and Password settings, if necessary.
11. Set Assign to Frequent Use to On if you want the contact to appear on the Frequent tab.
12. Select the Category Name setting and enter the name of a category, if necessary. Select OK when
you are done.
13. Select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Editing or Deleting a Contact
You can edit or delete any of the contacts on your list.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the Recipient tab. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon next to the contact you want to edit or delete.
5. Do one of the following:
• To delete the contact, select Delete and select Yes on the confirmation screen.
• To edit the contact, select Edit, select the item you want to change, enter the correct information,
and select OK. When you are finished editing, select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Creating a Contact Group
You can create a group of contacts so that you can easily send faxes to multiple recipients.
Note: You can create up to 2,000 contacts and contact groups combined.
250
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the Recipient tab. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select Add Group.
6. Select the registry number you want to use for the group you are adding.
7. Select the Group Name field, use the displayed keyboard to enter the group name (up to 30
characters), and select OK.
8. Select the Index Word field, use the displayed keyboard to enter a word to use when searching for a
group (up to 30 characters), and select OK.
Note: This field is automatically populated after you enter the group name. This field is optional.
9. Select Contact(s) Added to the Group.
You see your contacts list.
10. Select each contact you want to include in your group.
Each selected contact is highlighted.
11. Select Close.
12. Set Assign to Frequent Use to On if you want the group to appear on the Frequent tab.
13. Select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Editing or Deleting a Contact Group
You can edit an existing contact group to add or delete entries. You can also delete the entire contact
group.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select the Recipient tab. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
4. Select the icon next to the group you want to edit or delete.
251
5. To edit the group, select Edit.
6. Select Contact(s) Added to the Group.
You see a list of the contacts in your group.
7. Select the contact you want to add or delete.
Each selected contact is highlighted.
8. Select Close.
9. Select OK.
Parent topic: Setting Up Contacts and Contact Groups
Sending Faxes
See these sections to send faxes using your product.
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac
Sending IP Faxes Using the Control Panel
Parent topic: Faxing
Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
See these sections to send faxes using the product's control panel.
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History
Fax Sending Options
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
Sending a Fax on Demand (Polling Send/Box)
Sending a Fax on Demand (Bulletin Board Box)
Sending a Stored Fax
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending a Fax Using the Keypad, Contact List, or History
You can send a fax from your product control panel by entering the fax number, or selecting the number
from either the contact list or fax history.
252
Note: You can send a black-and-white fax to up to 200 recipients at a time, or send a color fax to one
recipient at a time. If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in
black-and-white.
Note: The product can queue up to 50 black-and-white fax jobs. You can check or cancel fax jobs in the
queue from the Job/Status screen.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Fax.
4. Do one of the following to select fax recipients:
• Select Enter Directly and enter a fax number. Select OK when done. To add another fax number,
repeat the same steps.
Note: If direct dialing has been restricted, you can only select the number from the contact list or
fax history. If necessary, enter an outside line access code (such as 9) at the beginning of the fax
number. If the access code has been set up in the Line Type setting, enter the # pound sign
instead of the code. If your fax number requires a brief pause, select the icon to insert a
pause symbol (–).
• Select Recipient to display the contact list. Select one or more contacts (select the contact again
to deselect it). You can also select the icon to search for recipients by name or index word.
Select Close when you are finished.
• Select the icon to display the sent fax history.
Note: To delete entered recipients, select the Enter Recipient field, select the recipient you want to
delete, and select Remove.
5. If you need to change any fax settings, select Fax Settings and select your settings.
253
6. If you want to preview your fax in black-and-white on the LCD, press the Preview icon. (If the
preview looks incorrect, select Cancel, reposition the document or change the fax settings, and
repeat this step.)
Note: If Fax Preview Display Time is enabled and you do not touch the preview screen for 20
seconds, your product sends the fax automatically. You cannot preview images when the Direct
Send setting is turned on.
7. If you want to save your fax settings for later use, select the icon and add a new entry.
8. Select the Send icon.
Note: To cancel faxing, select Stop or Cancel. You can also cancel the job or check the job status
from the Job/Status screen.
Your product scans your original and prompts you to place additional pages, if necessary.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax.
Note: Your product does not save sent color faxes to its memory. If the Save Failure Data option is
enabled, faxes that failed to be sent are stored to the product's memory and you can resend them from
the Job/Status screen.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Fax Sending Options
While sending a fax, you can select Fax Settings and select these options.
Setting Options Description
Original Size (Glass) Various sizes Sets the size for a document placed on the scanner
glass
Original Type Text Specifies the document type of your originals and
adjusts the quality of your copies
Text & Image
Photo
254
Setting Options Description
Color Mode Color Selects whether to scan images in color or black and
white
B&W
Resolution Standard Adjusts the scan resolution and print quality of
outgoing faxes
Fine
Super Fine
Ultra Fine
Density Varying levels Select from various density levels.
Remove Background Auto Automatically removes any background color on
scanned images
Varying levels
available
Lets you select from various levels of background
color adjustment
Sharpness Varying levels
available
Adjusts the sharpness level of outgoing faxes
ADF 2-Sided Off Select On to enable 2-sided faxing from the ADF. The
Direct Send setting and color faxing are disabled
when you turn on this setting.
On
ADF Continuous Scan Off Select On to have the product to ask if you want to
scan another page after a document in the ADF has
finished scanning
On
Direct Send Off Select On to send black-and-white faxes to a single
recipient as soon as the connection is made, without
saving the scanned image to memory. You cannot
use this setting when sending a color fax or sending a
fax to multiple recipients.
On
Priority Send Off Select On to send the current fax before other faxes
waiting to be sent
On
Send Fax Later Off Select On to send the current fax at a selected time
On
255
Setting Options Description
Add Sender Information Off Includes a header, your phone number, or a
destination list in the selected location on your
outgoing faxes
Outside of Image
Inside of Image
Notify Send Result Off Sends a notification to the selected email address
when an outgoing fax is sent
On
Transmission Report Print on Error Selects when or if to print transmission reports
Print
Do Not Print
Backup Off Saves a copy of the scanned fax to the selected email
address or network folder/FTP location
On
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Sending a Fax at a Specified Time
You can send a fax at a time of your choice.
Note: Make sure the product's date and time settings are correct. You can only send faxes in black-and-
white when you use this option.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Fax.
4. Enter a fax number or select a number from the Frequent, Recipient or Recent lists.
5. Select Fax Settings.
6. Select Send Fax Later.
7. Select On.
8. Select Time, use the displayed keypad on the LCD screen to enter your desired time, and select
OK.
256
9. Select the Send icon.
Note: To cancel faxing, select Stop or Cancel.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax at the specified time.
Note: If the product is turned off at the specified time, the fax is sent when it is powered on.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Sending a Fax on Demand (Polling Send/Box)
You can store one scanned document (up to 200 black-and-white pages) and have it sent automatically
when another fax machine requests it. Other fax users can receive the document by calling your fax
number and using the polling receive function on their fax machines.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Menu > Fax Box.
4. Select Polling Send/Board.
5. Select Polling Send.
6. Review the displayed Polling Send Box settings. If you need to make changes, select Settings.
Make any necessary changes and select OK.
7. Select Add Document.
8. Review the displayed Fax Settings. Make any necessary changes.
9. Select the Store icon.
Your document is scanned and stored until you overwrite or delete it.
You can store only one document at a time. Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document.
You can also delete a stored document from the Job/Status screen.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
257
Sending a Fax on Demand (Bulletin Board Box)
You can store up to 10 scanned documents (of up to 200 black-and-white pages) and have them sent
automatically when another fax machine requests it. Other fax users can receive the document by calling
your fax number and using the polling receive function on their fax machines. The requesting fax
machine must support the subaddress/password feature.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Menu > Fax Box.
4. Select Polling Send/Board.
5. Select one of the boxes named Unregistered Bulletin Board.
Note: If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.
6. Enter information for the following settings:
• Enter a name in the Name (Required) setting.
• Enter a subaddress in the Subaddress(SEP) setting.
• Enter a password in the Password(PWD) setting.
7. Make the appropriate settings such as Notify Send Result.
Note: If you set a password in Box Open Password, you will be asked to enter the password from
the next time you open the box.
8. Select OK to apply the settings.
9. To store a document in a bulletin board box, select Fax Box > Polling Send/Board.
10. Select a registered bulletin board box. If the password entry screen is displayed, enter the password
to open the box.
11. Select Add Document.
12. Review the displayed Fax Settings. Make any necessary changes.
13. Select the Store icon.
Your document is scanned and stored until you overwrite or delete it.
You can store only one document at a time in a bulletin board box. Subsequent documents overwrite the
existing document. You can also delete a stored document from the Job/Status screen.
258
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Sending a Stored Fax
You can store up to 200 pages of a single black-and-white scanned document and up to 200 documents
in the Stored Documents area of the Fax Box. (Depending on the size of saved documents, you may
not be able to save 200 documents.)
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Select Fax.
4. Select Menu.
5. Select Store Fax Data.
6. Select any other fax settings as necessary and select the Store icon.
Your document is scanned, stored, and briefly previewed.
7. When you are ready to send the document, press the home button, if necessary, and select Fax
Box.
8. Select Stored Documents.
9. Select the stored fax job you want to send.
10. Select the Send icon.
You can store only one document at a time. Subsequent documents overwrite the existing document.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Dialing Fax Numbers from a Connected Telephone
If you have connected a telephone to the EXT port on your product, you can send a fax by dialing the fax
number from the connected telephone. If the recipient's phone number and fax number are the same,
you can speak to the recipient before sending the fax.
1. Place your original on the product for faxing.
2. Press the home button, if necessary.
3. Dial the fax number from the connected telephone. Speak to the recipient if necessary.
Note: If you are using a pre-paid calling card, enter the number and password required to use the
card before entering the destination fax number.
259
4. Select Fax on the LCD screen.
5. Select Fax Settings and select any settings as necessary.
Note: Your product now communicates with the recipient's fax machine. Do not hang up the
telephone.
6. When you hear a fax tone, select the Send icon to start sending the fax.
Note: If your recipient's fax machine does not print in color, your fax is automatically sent in black-
and-white.
7. Hang up the telephone.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes from the Product Control Panel
Related references
Fax Sending Options
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Windows
You can send a fax from a printing program in Windows. You can fax up to 100 pages at a time,
including a cover sheet.
1. Open the file you want to fax and select the print command.
260
You see a window like this:
2. Select your product with the FAX option as the printer.
3. To change the Paper Size, Orientation, Color, Image Quality, or Character Density settings, click the
Preferences or Properties button.
Note: If you see a Setup, Printer, or Options button, click it. Then click Preferences or Properties
on the next screen. For more information about selecting fax print settings, click Help.
4. Select the Page Range as necessary. (Leave the Number of copies set to 1.)
5. Click Print or OK.
261
If you’re faxing for the first time, you see a window like this one:
6. Enter your sender information so that recipients can identify the origin of the fax. Then click OK to
save the sender information.
262
You see a window like this:
7. Enter the recipient's name and fax number or select a recipient from the phone book, then click
Next.
Note: For detailed instructions on using the Epson FAX Utility, click Help.
8. Select a cover sheet and enter a subject and message, then click Next.
9. Click Send to transmit your fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending Faxes Using the Fax Utility - Mac
You can send a fax from a Mac printing program using the FAX Utility. You can fax up to 100 pages at a
time, including a cover sheet.
263
1. Open the file you want to fax.
2. Select the print command in your application.
Note: You may need to select a print icon on your screen, the Print option in the File menu, or
another command. See your application's help utility for details.
3. Select your product FAX option as the Printer setting.
4. Select the number of pages you are faxing as the Pages setting.
Note: Leave the Copies setting set to 1.
5. Select Recipient Settings from the pop-up menu.
264
You see this window:
6. Do one of the following to choose your recipient:
• Select a name or group from the Recipient List.
• Enter a name, company, and fax number and click the + button.
• Click the icon and select a recipient from your address book.
7. Select Fax Settings from the pop-up menu.
265
You see this window:
8. Select the Color and Image Quality settings you want to use for your fax.
9. Click Fax.
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
Sending IP Faxes Using the Control Panel
IP fax is a fax feature that sends and receives data over an IP network. You can send and receive
between IP fax-compatible devices on an intranet or to and from G3 fax-compatible devices connected
to telephone lines using a VoIP gateway. Note that there is a communication cost for the section from the
VoIP gateway to the destination. (This is therefore a pay-as-you-go system based on distance/time).
Note: The IP fax feature requires a registered license key.
1. Place the originals.
2. Select Fax on the printer home screen.
3. Specify the recipients to send the fax to on the Recipient tab.
To enter the destination manually, select Enter Directly, and then from Select Line, select the IP-
FAX line. Enter the destination directly using the numerical keypad on the screen
266
Note:
• You cannot directly enter a destination that contains characters that cannot be entered using the
numeric keypad. Register the address to your contacts list in advance, and then specify the
destination from the contacts list.
• When Security Settings in Direct Dialing Restrictions is enabled, you can only select fax
recipients from the contacts list or the sent fax history. You cannot manually enter the destination.
• You can send faxes when Transmission Setting By Line is set to Sending and Receiving or
Sending Only. You cannot send faxes when you select a line that is set to receive faxes only.
4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the resolution and the sending method
as necessary.
5. Select the Send icon.
Your product scans your original and prompts you to place additional pages, if necessary.
After scanning your originals, your product dials the number and sends the fax.
IP Fax Destination Examples
Parent topic: Sending Faxes
IP Fax Destination Examples
Enter the destination in a format that matches your method for sending IP faxes.
Transmission Method Recipient Format
Over an intranet (LAN) When not using a
SIP server
Enter the Main Unit URI (SIP URI format) set for the
destination fax machine.
• Example 1: [email protected]
• Example 2: [email protected]
• Example 3:
User1@[2001:0db8::1234:5678:90ab:cdef ]
When using a SIP
server
Enter the SIP user name for the Main Unit URI (SIP
URI format) set for the destination fax machine.
• Example 1: 1111
• Example 2: User1
G3 fax device (through a VoIP gateway) Fax number
Example: 0312345678
267
Parent topic: Sending IP Faxes Using the Control Panel
Receiving Faxes
See these sections to receive faxes with your product.
Fax Reception
Receiving Faxes Automatically
Receiving Faxes Manually
Forwarding Received Faxes
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box)
Receiving a Fax by Polling
Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Reception
Your product will automatically receive and print faxes when you set the Receive Mode to Auto.
If you connected a telephone to your product so you can use the same phone line for faxes and voice
calls, you can also set your product to receive faxes manually. This allows you to check for a fax tone
using the telephone and press a button on your product to receive the fax.
Make sure to load paper in your product and select your fax settings before receiving a fax.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes Automatically
To receive faxes automatically, make sure Receive Mode is set to Auto (the default setting for the
product).
To change the Receive Mode if necessary, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic
Settings > Receive Mode.
If an answering machine is connected, make sure the product's Rings to Answer setting is set higher
than the number of rings your answering machine is set to answer a call. For example, if the answering
machine is set to pick up on the fourth ring, set the product to pick up on the fifth ring or later.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving Faxes Manually
You can set up your product to receive faxes manually by setting the Receive Mode to Manual. This lets
you check for a fax tone on the connected telephone before receiving a fax.
268
1. To change the Receive Mode, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic
Settings > Receive Mode and select Manual.
2. When the connected telephone rings, answer the call.
3. If you hear a fax tone, select Fax on the LCD display.
4. Select Send/Receive.
5. Select Receive.
6. Select the Receive icon to start receiving the fax.
7. Hang up the telephone.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Forwarding Received Faxes
You can forward received faxes to another fax machine, or convert the faxes into PDF documents and
forward them to a shared folder on the network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted
from the product's memory. Before using this feature, make sure the date and time are set correctly, the
forwarding destination is set up in the contact list, and the email server settings are configured.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Forward > Forward > Yes.
269
You see a screen like this:
Note: If you want to print the fax automatically before forwarding it, select Yes and Print.
3. Select Add Entry and select the forwarding destinations from the contacts list.
4. When you are finished selecting your forwarding destinations, select Close.
5. Confirm the displayed forwarding destinations and select Close.
6. Select an Options When Forwarding Failed option to choose whether you want to print the faxes
or save them in the printer's inbox if forwarding received faxes fails.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Viewing a Fax on the LCD Screen (Using the Fax Box)
You can save received faxes in your product's memory and view them on the LCD screen.
Note: The Inbox can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access the Inbox, contact your
administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
270
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
> Unconditional Save/Forward.
You see a screen like this:
3. Set Save to Inbox to On.
4. Press the home button.
5. Select Fax Box.
6. Do one of the following:
• Select Inbox/Confidential to view received documents.
• Select Stored Documents to view saved documents that have not been sent when Store Fax
Data is set to On.
• Select Polling Send/Board to view documents that are stored for fax polling.
7. Select the fax you want to view.
You see the fax displayed on the screen.
8. Select Menu.
271
9. Select one of the printing or deleting options, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note: Delete faxes after you print or view them to prevent the product's memory from filling up. When the
memory is full, you can only forward or print incoming faxes.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Receiving a Fax by Polling
You can use polling to receive a fax from another fax machine (such as a fax information service).
Note: You cannot use polling to receive a fax from a fax information service that uses audio guidance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select Menu.
4. Select Extended Fax.
5. Set Polling Receive to On.
6. Select Close.
7. Enter the fax number you expect to receive the fax from.
8. Select the Polling icon to start receiving the fax.
Parent topic: Receiving Faxes
Checking Fax Status
You can check the status of current fax jobs, or faxes that have been received or sent on the product
control panel.
1. Select Job/Status. Select the Job Status tab if necessary.
2. Do one of the following:
• To check the status of current fax jobs, select the fax job you want to check.
• To check the history of faxes that have been sent, received, or saved, select Log and select the
job you want to check.
Note: If you see a numbered icon above the icon on your product's LCD screen or the fax
reception light is flashing, received faxes have been temporarily saved to the product's memory.
272
Parent topic: Faxing
Printing Fax Reports
You can print several types of fax reports whenever necessary. You can also print the fax log printed
automatically by turning on Fax Log Auto Print.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Fax.
3. Select Menu.
4. Under Fax Report, select the fax report you want to print.
Fax Report Options
Parent topic: Faxing
Fax Report Options
Select the fax report or list you want to print.
Last Transmission
Print a report on the previous fax that was sent or received through polling.
Fax Log
View or print a report on recent fax transmissions.
Stored Fax Documents
Print a list of the fax jobs currently stored in the product's memory.
Fax Settings List
Print a list of the current fax communication settings.
Conditional Save/Forward List
Print a list of the current conditional save/forward settings.
Protocol Trace
Print a detailed report for the previous sent or received fax.
Parent topic: Printing Fax Reports
273
Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Follow the instructions here to work with an external USB device connected to your product.
Connecting a USB Device
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Transferring Files on a USB Device
Connecting a USB Device
Connect a USB device or its USB cable to the USB port on the front of the product.
To view instructions on connecting a USB device or cable, select , then select How To > USB
memory connection.
Perform the steps in reverse order to remove the external USB device.
Caution: If you remove the external USB device while operating the product, the data on the external
USB device may be lost.
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the compatibility of your device. Make sure the files on the device are
compatible with the product.
Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
See these sections to view and print photos or other files displayed on your product's LCD screen.
Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Printing JPEG Photos
You can select JPEG photos for printing as you view them on the LCD screen.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Memory Device.
274
3. Select JPEG.
Note: If you have more than 999 JPEG images on your device, the images are divided into groups,
and you must first select the group you want to display.
4. Do one of the following to select your photos:
• In Tile View, select the thumbnail images of the photos you want to print.
• In Single View, select the thumbnail image of the photo you want to print, then press the left or
right arrow buttons to scroll through and select additional photos, or select Tile View to return to
the thumbnail image view and select additional photos.
• To select all photos, select the icon and select Select All Images.
5. To change the print settings, select Basic Settings and select the necessary settings.
6. To adjust the photos (adjustments modify only your printed copies, not the original files), select
Advanced and make the necessary adjustments.
7. Select Copies on the LCD screen and use the numeric keypad on the screen to select the number
of copies (up to 9999).
8. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.
Note: To save the file to the internal storage, select Advanced > File Storing and enter the file
information. Select Setting to select whether or not to print the file as well.
To cancel printing, select Stop or Cancel on the LCD screen, then select Cancel Print From
Memory Device to confirm.
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Print Setting Options - JPEG Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a JPEG from a USB device.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Basic Settings
275
Print settings Available options Description
Paper Setting Various paper size
and type settings
Select the paper source that you want to use.
Layout 1-up Print one photo per page.
20-up Print 20 photos per page.
Index Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information.
Fit Frame On Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo
layout.
Off Turns off automatic cropping.
B&W (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-C6000)
— Prints a color photo in black and white.
Color (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-C6000)
— Prints the photo in color.
Advanced settings
276
Print settings Available options Description
Finishing Collate (Page Order) Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
ordered sets.
Group (Same Pages) Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
unordered groups.
Eject Paper Choose if you want printouts ejected offset for each set of
copies.
Staple* Select the staple location.
Punch** Select the punch hole location.
Fold Half Fold Half Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or
inside of the half folded paper
Tri Fold Tri Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or
inside of the half folded paper
Binding: Sets the binding position
277
Print settings Available options Description
Fix Photo Various settings Automatically adjusts the brightness, contrast, and
saturation of the photo based on the setting that is
selected.
Enhance Off Turns off automatic adjustments.
Fix Red-Eye Off Automatically fixes the red-eye effect in photos; see Note
below.
On
Date Various date formats Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the
format you select.
File Storing Setting Select the file storage settings you want to use.
Folder (Required)
File Name
File Password
User Name
* Displayed when the optional finisher unit is installed.
** Displayed when the optional punch unit is installed.
Note: Fix Red-Eye makes corrections to printouts, not the original photo files. Depending on the type of
photo, parts of the image other than the eyes may be corrected.
Parent topic: Printing JPEG Photos
Printing TIFF and PDF Files
You can select and print TIFF or PDF files from a USB flash drive.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Memory Device.
3. Select TIFF or PDF.
You see a list of the available files.
278
4. Select the file you want to print.
Note: To view information about the file, select the arrow icon at the end of the file name.
5. Do the following as necessary:
• To print more than one copy, select Copies on the LCD screen and use the numeric keypad on
the screen to select the number of copies (up to 9999).
• To change the print settings, select Basic Settings or Advanced and select the necessary
settings.
6. When you are ready to print, select the Print icon.
Note: To save the file to the internal storage, select Advanced > File Storing and enter the file
information. Select Setting to select whether or not to print the file as well.
To cancel printing, select Stop or Cancel on the LCD screen, then select Cancel Print From
Memory Device to confirm.
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode
Print Setting Options - PDF Mode
Parent topic: Viewing and Printing from the LCD Screen
Print Setting Options - TIFF Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a TIFF from a USB device.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Basic Settings
Print settings Available options Description
Recent to old or
Old to recent
— Change the order of the photos displayed on the LCD
screen.
Paper Setting Various paper size
and type settings
Select the paper source that you want to use.
279
Print settings Available options Description
Layout 1-up Print one photo per page.
20-up Print 20 photos per page.
Index Print numbered photo thumbnails with date information.
Fit Frame On Automatically crops the photo to fit into the selected photo
layout.
Off Turns off automatic cropping.
B&W (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-C6000)
— Prints a color photo in black and white.
Color (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-C6000)
— Prints a color photo in color.
Advanced settings
280
Print settings Available options Description
Finishing Collate (Page Order) Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
ordered sets.
Group (Same Pages) Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
unordered groups.
Eject Paper Select Shift Sort* to eject offset printouts for each set of
copies.
Staple* Select the staple location.
Punch** Select the punch hole location.
Fold Half Fold Half Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or
inside of the half folded paper
Tri Fold Tri Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or
inside of the half folded paper
Binding: Sets the binding position
Print Order — Select the printing order for multi-page documents.
281
Print settings Available options Description
Date Various date formats Prints the date the photo was taken on the photo in the
format you select.
File Storing Setting Select the file storage settings you want to use.
Folder (Required)
File Name
File Password
User Name
* Displayed when the optional finisher unit is installed.
** Displayed when the optional finisher and the punch unit are installed.
Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Print Setting Options - PDF Mode
Select the print settings you want to use when printing a PDF from a USB device.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on the file format.
Basic Settings
Print settings Available options Description
Recent to old or
Old to recent
— Change the order of the documents displayed on the LCD
screen.
Paper Setting Various paper size
and type settings
Select the paper source that you want to use.
2-Sided Off Two-sided printing is off.
On Two-sided printing is on.
Binding Position Select the binding position for the document.
Print Order — Select the printing order for multi-page documents.
B&W (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-C6000)
— Prints a color photo in black and white.
282
Print settings Available options Description
Color (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-C6000)
— Automatically detects whether the photo is in color or black
and white.
Advanced settings
Print settings Available options Description
Finishing Collate (Page Order) Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
ordered sets.
Group (Same Pages) Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
unordered groups.
Eject Paper Select Rotate Sort to print alternate paper orientations
and paper sources (make sure the Paper Setting is set to
Auto for this option). Select Shift Sort* to eject offset
printouts for each set of copies.
Staple* Select the staple location.
Punch** Select the punch hole location
283
Print settings Available options Description
Fold Half Fold Half Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or
inside of the half folded paper
Tri Fold Tri Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or
inside of the half folded paper
Binding: Sets the binding position
File Storing Setting Select the file storage settings you want to use.
Folder (Required)
File Name
File Password
User Name
* Displayed when the optional finisher unit is installed.
** Displayed when the optional finisher and punch unit are installed.
Parent topic: Printing TIFF and PDF Files
Transferring Files on a USB Device
You can transfer files to and from a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product.
Setting Up USB Device Access
Parent topic: Using External USB Devices with Your Product
Setting Up USB Device Access
Before you can access a USB device inserted into the USB port on the front of your product, you may
need to enable the access setting.
284
Caution: Remove the USB device before you change this setting or you may lose data from the device.
Note: These settings can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access these settings, contact
your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device.
3. Select Enable.
Parent topic: Transferring Files on a USB Device
285
Using Your Product's Internal Storage
You can store files to the product's internal hard drive to quickly and easily print, email, or transfer them
later without using a computer.
Follow the instructions here to access and save files to the product's internal hard drive.
Storage Folder Types
Creating Shared Folders
Printing a Stored File
Saving Groups for Printing from Storage
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group
Saving Stored Files to an External USB Device
Emailing Stored Files
Saving Stored Files to a Network Folder
Saving Stored Files to Cloud Services
Storage Menu Options
Searching for Folders and Files
Deleting Folders and Files from Storage
Changing the Storage Period of Files
Restricting Shared Folder Access
Storage Folder Types
You can store files in folders on the product's hard drive and access them later. The table below outlines
the different types of available storage folders.
Type of folder Description
Default folder The default folder is named Shared Folder. You cannot
rename, set a password for, or delete this folder. All users
can store files in the default folder. Files in the default
folder can be password-protected to limit access.
User-created shared folders Users can create up to 199 individual folders for storage.
Unless a password is set for the created folder, any user
can access this folder, along with any files that are not
password-protected. Users can set a password for the
created folder and any files in it.
286
Type of folder Description
Personal folder If the product is equipped with user authentication, an
administrator can create personal folders for specific
users. A personal folder is only displayed if it belongs to
the user that is logged in, and only that user can store and
access the files. Only one personal folder can be created
per user.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Creating Shared Folders
Administrators and users can create shared folders using your product's hard drive.
Note: Users can only create shared folders when the Settings > General Settings > Storage Settings
> Shared Folder Access Control > Access setting is set to Allowed and the Operation Authority
setting is set to User.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage and select the icon.
3. Set the following items:
• Folder Number: Unused folder numbers are assigned automatically.
• Folder Name (Required): Enter a folder name up to 30 letters. Duplicate names are allowed.
• Folder Password: Enter a password to save files to the folder, view the folder contents, or modify
the folder. All users can access a shared folder if it does not have a password.
• Automatic File Delete Settings: Enable the setting and select a value for Period Until Deletion.
Files will be deleted after the time period expires since the last time the file was accessed. Users
can only change this setting if the Automatic Delete Setting Authority setting is set to User.
4. Select OK to confirm.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Printing a Stored File
You can print a file saved in a storage folder.
287
Note: Some finishing options require optional equipment to be installed. If finishing settings are either
missing or inactive, the printer may not have the appropriate options available.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Select the folder containing the file you want to print and select Open.
4. Select the file you want to print.
5. Select Copies and set the number of copies you want to print.
Note: If you want to print using a saved group, select Print Settings, then select Advanced. Select
Print Sets and then select the group you want to use. Select OK.
6. If you want to make settings for saddle stitching or folding a booklet, select Print Settings > Basic
Settings and enable 2-sided printing. Then set the Finishing setting to Collate (Page Order), and
enable the Booklet setting. Select Saddle Stitch or Half Fold and set any settings, as necessary.
To split the number of pages with saddle stitching or folding, enable the Split setting and then set
the number of pages to split in the Sheets per Staple or Sheets per Fold setting.
Note: Remove any booklets or paper from the booklet tray or you will not be able to start printing.
7. For other print options, do the following:
• To fold each set of printouts, select Print Settings > Basic Settings > Paper Setting and select
the paper source. Select the Advanced tab, then enable either the Half Fold or Tri Fold setting
and specify any details as necessary.
• To print with staples, select Print Settings > Basic Settings > Finishing > Staple and select a
staple location.
• To print with punched holes, select Print Settings > Basic Settings > Finishing > Punch and
select a punch hole location.
• To offset each printed copy, select Print Settings > Basic Settings > Finishing > Eject Paper
and select Shift Sort.
8. Change any other print settings as needed.
9. Select the Print icon.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
288
Saving Groups for Printing from Storage
You can save groups of frequently used print quantities and sets so that you can print a file without
entering the number of copies each time. This is useful when you are printing a different number of
copies for each set.
Note: You can save up to 12 print set groups with up to 60 subgroups in each. Print set groups are also
accessible when copying.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Select the folder containing the file you want to print and select Open.
4. Select the file you want to print.
5. Select Print Settings and select the Advanced tab.
6. Select Print Sets and then select Not Set from the list.
7. Select Register/Overwrite and enter a group name.
8. Set the number of copies and sets on the Copies & Sets tab.
9. Select any other settings as necessary.
10. Select OK to save.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Editing or Deleting a Saved Group
You can edit or delete a print set group.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Select the folder containing the group you want to edit or delete and select Open.
4. Select a file and select Print Settings > Advanced.
5. Select Print Sets and then select the group you want to edit or delete from the list.
6. Do one of the following:
• Select Register/Overwrite to edit the group and modify the Copies & Sets and Finishing
settings as desired. Proceed to the next step.
289
• Select Delete to delete the group. You are done.
7. Select OK to save.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Saving Stored Files to an External USB Device
You can save a file in a storage folder to an external USB device connected to your product.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Select the folder containing the file you want to save to an external USB device and select Open.
4. Select the file.
5. Select Send/Save > Storage to Memory Device.
6. Change any save settings as necessary.
7. Select the Save icon.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Emailing Stored Files
You can email a file saved in a storage folder.
Note: Email server settings must be configured before you can send email.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Select the folder containing the file you want to print and select Open.
4. Select the file.
5. Select Send/Save > Storage to Email.
6. Select a contact or select Keyboard to enter the recipient's email address.
7. Set the save settings as necessary.
8. Select the Send icon.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
290
Saving Stored Files to a Network Folder
You can save a file saved in a storage folder to a network folder.
Note: A network folder must already be set up. See the link below to set up a network folder.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Select the folder containing the file you want to print and select Open.
4. Select the file.
5. Select Send/Save > Storage to Network Folder/FTP.
6. Select the destination field and specify the destination by entering the folder path in the following
format:
• SMB: \\host\folder name
• FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
• FTPS: ftps://host name/folder name
• WebDAV (HTTPS): https://host name/folder name
• WebDAV (HTTP): http://host name/folder name
7. Set the save settings as necessary.
8. Select the Save icon.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Related tasks
Creating a Shared Network Folder
Saving Stored Files to Cloud Services
You can save a file saved in a storage folder to a cloud service.
Note: Epson Connect services must already be set up.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Select the folder containing the file you want to print and select Open.
291
4. Select the file.
5. Select Send/Save > Storage to Cloud.
6. Specify the destination.
7. Set the save settings as necessary.
8. Select the Upload icon.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Related tasks
Setting Up Epson Connect Services
Storage Menu Options
You can select the printing settings you want to use for your stored files.
Note: Not all options or settings may be available, depending on other settings.
Basic Settings
Printing option Available settings Description
Auto — Prints the document in the detected color of the original.
Color (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-
C6000)
— Prints the document in color.
B&W (AM-
C4000/AM-
C5000/AM-
C6000)
— Prints the document in black and white.
Paper Setting Various sources Select the paper source that you want to use. If you select
Auto, paper is fed automatically depending on the paper
settings you selected for the paper sources.
292
Printing option Available settings Description
Reduce/Enlarge Saved Settings Applies settings you have previously made for saving to
storage
Auto Automatically sizes the image to fit the paper size you
selected.
Actual Size Prints the original at its full size.
User-defined (mm) Specifies the target size in millimeters.
User-defined (%) Specifies the amount of scaling in percentage for length and
width
Reduce to Fit Paper Automatically decreases the size of the image by the
percentage you select.
2-Sided On Select On for 2-sided printouts and then scroll down to
select the orientation and binding edge for your printouts.
Off
Multi-Page Single Page Copies each page of the original onto an individual sheet.
2-up Copies multiple page documents onto one sheet. Scroll
down and select the document orientation and layout order
settings as necessary.
4-up
293
Printing option Available settings Description
Finishing Group (Same
Pages)
Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
unordered groups
Collate (Page
Order)
Select to print multiple copies of a multi-page document in
ordered sets
Eject Paper Select Rotate Sort to stack printouts alternately in
landscape and portrait orientations. Select Shift Sort* to
offset each set of printouts.
Staple* Select a staple option to choose the staple location on the
printouts.
Punch** Select a location for the punch holes.
294
Printing option Available settings Description
Booklet On Select On and then adjust settings as necessary when
making a booklet from your printouts.
Off
Booklet Binding: Sets the binding position
Binding Margin: Specifies the binding margin in 1 mm
increments from 0 to 50 mm.
Cover: Allows you to add a cover to the booklet
Paper Setting: Selects the paper source for the cover paper
Front Cover: Specifies the settings for the front cover. If you
want a blank cover, select Do Not Print
Back Cover: Specifies the settings for the back cover. If you
want a blank cover, select Do Not Print
Saddle Stitch* Saddle Stitch: Enables saddle stitching
Sheets per Staple: Specifies the number of pages in each
stapled section
Split: Allows you to print separately
Cover: Allows you to add a cover to the booklet
Paper Setting: Selects the paper source for the cover paper
Half Fold Saddle Stitch: Enables saddle stitching
Sheets per Staple: Specifies the number of pages in each
stapled section
Split: Allows you to print separately
Cover: Allows you to add a cover to the booklet
Paper Setting: Selects the paper source for the cover paper
* Displayed when the optional finisher unit is installed.
** Displayed when the optional finisher and punch unit are installed.
Advanced settings
295
Printing option Available settings Description
Fold Half Fold Half Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Split: Allows you to split copies when they are ejected
Cover: Allows you to add a cover to the booklet
Paper Setting: Selects the paper source for the cover paper
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or inside
of the half folded paper
Tri Fold Tri Fold: Enables printing with half folds
Sheets per Fold: Specifies the number of pages in each
folded section
Print Mode: Selects whether to print on the outside or inside
of the half folded paper
Open Orientation: Selects the direction of the folds
Cover & Slip
Sheet
Cover
Front Cover: Specifies the settings for the front cover. If you
want a blank cover, select Do Not Print
Back Cover: Specifies the settings for the back cover. If you
want a blank cover, select Do Not Print
Slip Sheet Adjust these settings to insert slip sheets into your printouts.
End of Job: Adds a sheet at the end of each copy of the job.
If you have loaded paper for the slip sheets, select the paper
source as thePaper Setting setting.
End of Set: Adds a sheet at the end of each set. To insert
the slip sheet after a certain number of pages, select Sheets
per Set and enter a value. If you have loaded paper for the
slip sheets, select the paper source as thePaper Setting
setting.
End of Page or Chapter: Allows you to insert slip sheets at
individual pages. The setting values are saved and
displayed in a list. Select the setting to edit, delete, or review
the values.
296
Printing option Available settings Description
Binding Margin Off Select On to adjust the margin, binding position, and
orientation of the pages for 2-sided printing.
On
Reduce to Fit
Paper
Off Select On to automatically decrease the image by the
percentage you select.
On
Print Sets Off Select On to print the document in groups of saved
quantities and settings.
On
Output Tray Face Down Tray Select which output tray to use.
Finisher Tray
Auto
Stamp Stamp Select On to include stamps in your printout
Type Selects the stamp type
Stamp Position Selects the stamp position
Print Page Selects the page where the stamp appears
Size Controls the size of the stamp
Print Color Selects the color for the stamp
Transparency Controls the transparency of the stamp
Date Stamp Date Stamp Adds a date stamp to your printouts when enabled
Date Format Selects the date format
Stamp Position Selects the stamp position
Size Controls the size of the stamp
Background Controls whether the date stamp has a white background
Page Numbering Off Select On to print page numbers on your printouts and
select the format settings as necessary.
On
Print Position
Shift
Off Select On and set the margins at the top and left of the
paper to adjust the print position of the document.
On
297
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Searching for Folders and Files
You can search for folders and files in storage using a folder name, folder number, file name, or user
name.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Do one of the following:
• To search for a folder, select the search field and use the on-screen keyboard to enter keywords,
then select OK.
• To search for a file, select the folder you want to search in and select Open. Select the search
field and use the on-screen keyboard to enter keywords, then select OK.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Deleting Folders and Files from Storage
You can delete folders and files from your product's hard drive.
Note: Users can only delete shared folders when the Access setting for Shared Folder Access
Control is set to Allowed and the Operation Authority setting is set to User.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Storage.
3. Do one of the following:
• To delete a folder, select the folder and select Delete. Enter the password, if necessary.
Note: Only administrators can delete folders that contain password-protected files.
• To delete a file, select the folder that contains the file, then select Open. Select the file and select
Delete.
Note: You can select multiple files to be deleted.
• To delete all files in a folder, select the folder, then select Open. Select Delete All.
298
4. Select Yes to confirm.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Changing the Storage Period of Files
You can change the storage period for files before they are deleted from shared folders. By default, files
are not deleted automatically.
You can also set the file storage period for individual folders by selecting the folder, selecting Settings >
Automatic File Delete Settings, and adjusting any of the displayed settings.
Note: Users can only change the storage period when the Access setting in Shared Folder Access
Control is set to Allowed and the Automatic Delete Setting Authority setting is set to User.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder File Management.
3. Do one of the following:
• Enable Automatic File Deletion to set a period of time before files are automatically deleted from
shared storage folders. Select Period Until Deletion and adjust the settings as desired.
• Disable Automatic File Deletion to never delete files in shared storage folders.
• To delete a file after printing or saving, enable the Settings > General Settings > Storage
Settings > Additional Action > Delete File after Output setting. Enable the Access Control
setting to display a checkbox on the File List that allows you to delete the file.
Parent topic: Using Your Product's Internal Storage
Restricting Shared Folder Access
You can set who has access to shared folders.
Note: If you cannot access or change this setting, contact your administrator for assistance.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control >
Operation Authority.
3. Do one of the following:
• Select User if you want any user to have shared folder access.
300
Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette
Rollers
When ink is expended, or the maintenance box and cassette rollers are at the end of their service life,
you need to replace them. The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during print
head cleaning.
Note: Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink cartridges and maintenance boxes responsibly
and in accordance with local requirements. If you would like to return your used ink cartridges and
maintenance boxes to Epson for proper disposal, please go to epson.com/recycle for more information.
Ink Safety Precautions
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers
Replacing the Optional Staple Cartridge
Ink Safety Precautions
• Keep ink cartridges and maintenance box out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
• Keep the ink cartridges out of direct sunlight.
• Store ink cartridges in a cool, dark place; do not store the ink cartridges in high or freezing
temperatures.
• Be careful when you handle used ink cartridges; there may be ink remaining around the ink supply
port. If ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If you experience discomfort or vision problems after flushing your eyes, see a
doctor immediately. If ink gets in your mouth, see a doctor immediately.
• Do not dismantle an ink cartridge. This could damage the print head.
• Do not disassemble or modify the ink cartridge or maintenance box; otherwise ink or maintenance fluid
may get into your eyes or on your skin or you may not be able to print normally.
• Do not shake cartridges too vigorously; this can cause them to leak.
• Do not drop or knock ink cartridges against hard objects; this can cause leakage.
• Do not remove or tear the label on the cartridge; this can cause leakage.
301
• Use an ink cartridge before the date printed on its package or within one year of opening the package,
whichever is earlier.
• After bringing an ink cartridge inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature
for at least three hours before using it.
• Do not open the ink cartridge package until you are ready to install it in the printer. The cartridge is
vacuum packed to maintain its reliability. Leaving a cartridge unpacked for a long time before using it
may prevent normal operation.
• Do not break the hooks on the side of the cartridge when removing it from the packaging.
• Do not shake cartridges after opening their packages; this can cause them to leak.
• Do not remove the transparent seal from the bottom of the cartridge. This may cause the cartridge to
become unusable.
• Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the cartridge. This may prevent normal operation.
• Make sure to install all ink cartridges. The printer only works when all ink cartridges are properly
installed.
• Do not turn off the product during ink charging. If ink charging is incomplete, you may not be able to
print.
• If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in
the same environment as the product. Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port, making covers
or plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the cartridge
touches. Do not touch the ink cartridge ink supply port or surrounding area.
• Install a new ink cartridge immediately after removing an expended one. Leaving cartridges
uninstalled can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing.
• Do not turn off the printer during cartridge replacement. Otherwise, ink remaining in the print head
nozzles will dry out and you may not be able to print.
• Do not put your hands inside the product or touch any cartridges during printing.
• Removed ink cartridges may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not to get any ink on
the surrounding area when removing the cartridges.
• The specifications and appearance of the ink cartridge may be modified for improvement without prior
notice.
Ink Consumption
• This printer uses ink cartridges equipped with a green chip that monitors information such as the
amount of remaining ink for each cartridge. This means that even if the cartridge is removed from the
302
printer before it is expended, you can still use the cartridge after reinserting it back into the printer.
However, when reinserting a cartridge, some ink may be consumed to guarantee printer performance.
• To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your print head, a variable ink safety
reserve remains in the cartridge when your printer indicates that it is time to replace the cartridge.
Quoted ink yields do not include this reserve.
• Quoted yields may vary depending on the images that you are printing, the paper type that you are
using, the frequency of your prints and environmental conditions such as temperature.
• Do not use the cartridges that came with the printer for the replacement. The ink in the ink cartridges
supplied with your printer is partly used during initial setup. In order to produce high quality printouts,
the print head in your printer needs to be fully charged with ink. This process consumes a quantity of
ink and, therefore, these cartridges may print fewer pages compared to subsequent ink cartridges.
• To maintain optimum print head performance, some ink is consumed from all ink cartridges during
maintenance operations. Ink may also be consumed when you replace an ink cartridge or turn the
printer on.
• When printing in monochrome or grayscale, color inks may be used instead of black ink depending on
the paper type or print quality settings you are using.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Related references
Ink Cartridge Specifications
Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Your product and its software will let you know when an ink cartridge is low or expended, or when the
maintenance box needs to be replaced.
Note: When using the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer software with the product,
you can check ink cartridge and maintenance box status by using the printer buttons or the utilities
included with the standard Epson printer software. To download the standard Epson printer software,
visit epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)
and select your product.
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
303
Checking Ink Status on the LCD Screen
When an ink cartridge is low or expended, you see a message on the LCD screen. Select How-to and
follow the steps on the LCD screen to replace the ink cartridge.
You can also check the status of the ink cartridges and maintenance box from the product control panel.
Note: You can continue printing while the low ink message is displayed. Replace the ink cartridges when
required.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the Consumables/Others tab.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Checking Ink and Maintenance Box Status with Windows
You can check your ink cartridge or maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Windows
computer.
Note: You can continue printing while the low ink message is displayed. Replace the ink when required.
1. To check your status, do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printer preferences.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printer preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product and select Printer preferences.
2. Select the Maintenance tab and select EPSON Status Monitor 3.
3. Replace or reinstall the ink cartridge or maintenance box as indicated on the screen. Select Details
if necessary.
Note: If any ink cartridge installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model, or
improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate ink status.
304
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Checking Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status - Mac
You can check your ink cartridge or maintenance box status at any time using a utility on your Mac.
Note: You can continue printing while the low ink message is displayed. Replace the ink when required.
1. In the Apple menu or the Dock, select System Preferences or System Settings. Select Print &
Fax, Print & Scan, or Printers & Scanners, select your product, and select Options & Supplies.
Select Utility and select Open Printer Utility.
2. Select EPSON Status Monitor.
3. Do the following as necessary:
• You can update the ink cartridge and maintenance box status by clicking Update.
• Replace or reinstall the maintenance box or any ink cartridge as indicated on the screen.
Note: If any ink cartridge installed in the product is broken, incompatible with the product model, or
improperly installed, Epson Status Monitor will not display an accurate cartridge status.
Parent topic: Check Cartridge and Maintenance Box Status
Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
The maintenance box stores ink that gets flushed from the system during printhead cleaning. When an
ink cartridge is expended or the maintenance box is at the end of its service life, you need to replace it.
You may also need to replace a cartridge that is more than six months old if your printouts do not look
their best, even after cleaning and aligning the printhead.
Note: Please dispose of your used Epson branded ink cartridges and maintenance boxes responsibly
and in accordance with local requirements. If you would like to return your used ink cartridges and
maintenance boxes to Epson for proper disposal, please go to epson.com/recycle for more information.
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Replacing the Maintenance Box
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
305
Purchase Epson Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Box
U.S. and Canada:
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales) or
epson.ca (Canadian sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized reseller. To find
the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada.
Latin America:
You can purchase genuine Epson ink, maintenance boxes, and paper from an Epson authorized
reseller. To find the nearest reseller, visit latin.epson.com or call your nearest Epson sales office.
Note: This product is designed to work with genuine Epson inks. Non-Epson ink or any other ink not
specified for this printer could cause damage not covered by Epson's warranties.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Ink Cartridge and Maintenance Box Part Numbers
Use these part numbers when you order or purchase new ink cartridges or maintenance boxes.
Maintenance box part number: C12C937181
AM-C6000/AM-C5000
Ink color Part number
Black T08C1
Cyan T08C2
Magenta T08C3
Yellow T08C4
AM-C4000
Ink color Part number
Black T08D1
Cyan T08D2
Magenta T08D3
Yellow T08D4
306
AM-M5500
Ink color Part number
Black T15K1
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
If an ink cartridge is low or expended, a message appears on your product's LCD screen. Note which ink
cartridge needs to be replaced. Select How To and follow the steps on the LCD screen to remove and
install the ink cartridges.
Make sure you have the replacement ink cartridge(s) handy before you begin. You must install new
cartridges immediately after removing the old ones.
Caution: Do not remove an old cartridge from the printer until you are ready to replace it to prevent the
print head nozzles from drying out. Do not open an ink cartridge package until you are ready to install the
ink. Cartridges are vacuum packed to maintain reliability.
Caution: If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and
store the cartridge in the same environment as the printer, with the ink supply port facing sideways. The
valve in the ink supply port is designed to contain any excess ink, but do not touch the ink supply port or
surrounding area.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
Replacing the Maintenance Box
If the maintenance box is full, a message appears on your product's LCD screen. Select How To and
follow the steps on the LCD screen to replace the maintenance box.
Make sure you have the replacement maintenance box handy before you begin.
Caution: Do not reuse a maintenance box that has been removed and left uninstalled for more than a
week. Keep the maintenance box away from direct sunlight.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges and Maintenance Boxes
307
Replacing the Paper Feed Rollers
When the paper feed rollers in the paper cassettes need to be replaced, you see a message on the LCD
screen. (These are also referred to as "pickup rollers".)
There are different paper feed rollers for the paper cassettes, the paper tray, and the ADF unit. Make
sure you install the correct paper feed rollers for the product.
• For Paper Cassettes 1-4, use the "Paper Feed Roller for Cassette" (C12C937321)
• For the Paper Tray, use the "Paper Feed Roller for Paper Tray" (C12C937361)
• For the ADF, use the "Paper Feed Roller for ADF" (C12C937341)
Refer to the instructions in the paper feed roller packaging when replacing the paper feed rollers. There
are also replacement videos available on your product's support page.
Reset the maintenance roller counter for the paper cassette to keep track of roller usage.
Parent topic: Replacing Ink Cartridges, Maintenance Boxes, and Cassette Rollers
Replacing the Optional Staple Cartridge
Follow the steps below to replace the optional staple cartridge in the optional finisher unit.
To purchase replacement staple cartridges, contact your dealer.
1. When it is time to replace the staple cartridge, you see a message on the LCD screen.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to replace the cartridge.
Note: Only replace the cartridge when all of the staples have run out. You cannot replace the cartridge if
staples remain in the cartridge.
Do not discard the staple cartridge holder* shown in the illustration when replacing the staple cartridge.
Reuse the holder with the new staple cartridge.
309
Adjusting Print Quality
If your print quality declines, you may need to use the product buttons to run a nozzle check and clean
the print head.
Note: If you are using your Epson product with the Windows 10 S operating system, you cannot use the
software described in this section. You also cannot download and install any Epson product software
from the Epson website for use with Windows 10 S; you must obtain software only from the Windows
Store.
If running these utilities does not solve the problem, you may need to replace the ink cartridge(s).
Printhead Maintenance
Automatically Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Printhead Maintenance
If your printouts become too light, or you see dark or light bands across them, you may need to clean the
printhead nozzles. Cleaning uses ink, so clean the nozzles only if print quality declines.
You can check for clogged nozzles before you clean them so you don’t clean them unnecessarily.
Note: You cannot clean the print head if an ink cartridge is expended, and may not be able to clean it
when a cartridge is low. You must replace the cartridge first.
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
You can check the print head nozzles using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check.
310
5. Select a paper cassette with Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]) or A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm]) paper and select OK.
The nozzle pattern prints.
6. Check the printed pattern to see if there are gaps in the lines.
Print head is clean
AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000
AM-M5500
Print head needs cleaning
AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000
AM-M5500
311
7. Do one of the following:
• If there are no gaps, select OK.
• If there are gaps or the pattern is faint, select NG and continue.
8. Follow the instructions on the screen to clean the print head, check the nozzles, and repeat the
process as necessary.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
Parent topic: Printhead Maintenance
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can clean the print head using the control panel on your product.
1. Make sure there are no errors on the LCD screen.
2. Load a few sheets of plain paper in the product.
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Cleaning.
5. Select Start to clean the print head.
When the cleaning cycle is finished, you see a message on the LCD screen.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
6. Select Yes to print a nozzle check pattern and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Printhead Maintenance
Automatically Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
You can set the product to automatically check and clean the print head before printing using the control
panel on your product. The product will automatically detect clogged nozzles and run the head cleaning
procedure until the nozzles are clear.
Note: Because Auto Cleaning may repeat head cleaning multiple times, it may take longer and use more
ink than performing a Print Head Cleaning.
312
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Auto Cleaning.
3. Select Start to clean the print head.
When the cleaning cycle is finished, you see a message on the LCD screen.
Caution: Never turn off the product or open the front cover during a cleaning cycle or you may not
be able to print.
4. Select Yes to print a nozzle check pattern and follow the on-screen instructions.
Parent topic: Adjusting Print Quality
313
Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
See these sections if you need to clean or transport your product.
Cleaning Your Product
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
Moving or Transporting Your Product
Cleaning Your Product
To keep your product working at its best, you should clean it several times a year.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Unplug the power cord.
3. Disconnect any connected cables.
4. Clean the outer case and control panel with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
You can clean the scanner glass if your copies or scanned images are smeared.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
314
1. Open the document cover.
2. Remove the cleaning cloth from its holder.
Note: The cleaning cloth holder may be located in a different location than the one shown.
315
3. Use the cleaning cloth to wipe the scanner glass.
Note: If the glass is stained with grease or dirt, use a small amount of glass cleaner on a soft, dry
cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid after removing the dirt.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the glass and do not press the glass surface with
any force.
4. Return the cleaning cloth to its holder when you are finished.
5. Close the document cover.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
You can clean the ADF if you see lines or streaks in your copies or scanned images.
Caution: Do not use a hard brush, alcohol, or paint thinner to clean the product or you may damage it.
Do not use oil or other lubricants inside the product or let water get inside it.
316
1. Lift the lever and open the ADF cover.
2. Use a soft, lint-free cloth (microfiber is recommended) moistened with a little water to clean the
rollers and the interior of the ADF.
Caution: Do not use a dry cloth; you may damage the ADF rollers.
317
Note: Wait until the rollers are dry before using the ADF.
3. Close the ADF cover. The lever clicks when the cover is fully closed.
318
4. Open the document cover.
5. Remove the cleaning cloth from its holder.
319
6. Clean the areas shown in the illustration. You will need to lift the edge of the document cover to
reach some locations.
7. Return the cleaning cloth to its holder when you are finished.
8. Close the document cover.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
Moving or Transporting Your Product
If you need to move or transport your product, contact Epson support or an authorized Epson service
provider or technician.
Caution: At least four people are required to move the product.
Parent topic: Cleaning and Transporting Your Product
320
Solving Problems
Check these sections for solutions to problems you may have using your product.
Viewing the Help Screen
Product Status Messages
Job Status Error Codes
Running a Product Check
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
Solving Setup Problems
Solving Network Problems
Solving Network Security Problems
Solving Copying Problems
Solving Copy Quality Problems
Solving Paper Problems
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Solving Print Quality Problems
Solving Scanning Problems
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Solving Faxing Problems
Solving USB Device Problems
Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
Where to Get Help (Latin America)
Viewing the Help Screen
You can view troubleshooting or how-to topics on the LCD screen at any time.
1. Select the help icon.
2. Select a Troubleshooting or How To option to view instructional images or animations.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
321
Product Status Messages
You can often diagnose problems with your product by checking the messages and status icons on its
LCD screen. You can also check for errors by selecting Job/Status > Printer Status.
Note: If the LCD screen is dark, press the screen to wake the product from sleep mode.
LCD screen message Condition/solution
Printer error. Turn the power off and
on again. For details, see your
documentation.
Turn the product off and then back on again. If the error persists,
check for and remove any jammed paper or protective materials
from the product, and disconnect any optional installed units. If
the error persists, contact Epson for support.
Printer error. For details, see your
documentation.
The product may be damaged, but features such as scanning
are still available. Contact Epson for support.
Cannot print because XX is out of
order. You can print from another
cassette.
Turn the product off and then back on again. Reinsert the
indicated paper cassette. If the error persists, contact Epson for
support.
HDD error. Turn the printer off and
back on again. If the error continues,
contact Epson support.
The hard disk drive is damaged. You may not be able to receive
faxes (models equipped with optional fax board) or copy or print
documents that contain images. Copying more than 50 pages of
Text & Image A4/Letter documents may fail. Contact Epson for
support.
XX are nearing the end of their
service life.
A consumable part in your product needs to be replaced.
Contact Epson for support.
XX are nearing the end of their
service life.
Contact Epson for support.
XX is at the end of its service life.
Replace it.
You need to replace the following ink
cartridge(s). Confirm the procedure,
and then replace them.
Replace the indicated ink cartridge(s).
Paper Setup Auto Display is set to
Off. Some features may not be
available. For details, see your
documentation.
The Paper Setup Auto Display setting must be turned on to
use AirPrint.
322
LCD screen message Condition/solution
No dial tone detected. (models with
optional fax board installed)
Make sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the
phone line works. If you connected the product to a PBX (Private
Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal Adapter, change the
Line Type setting to PBX. Use # instead of the actual access
code when entering an outside fax number. If you still cannot
send a fax, turn off the Dial Tone Detection setting. (Turning off
the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the product to drop
the first digit of a fax number.)
Failed to receive faxes because the
fax data capacity is full. Touch the
Job/Status at the bottom of the Home
Screen for details. (Models equipped
with optional fax board)
Select Job/Status > Printer Status and resolve any errors that
are preventing faxes from printing. Make sure the product is
connected to a computer and it is turned on, or connect a
memory device to the product.
The combination of the IP address
and the subnet mask is invalid. See
your documentation for more details.
There is a problem with the network connection to your product.
Set up your product on the network again.
To use cloud services, update the
root certificate from the Epson Web
Config utility.
Access the Web Config utility and update the cloud service root
certificate.
Check that the printer driver is
installed on the computer and that
the port settings for the printer are
correct.
Make sure the printer port is correctly configured. In Windows,
make sure the port is set to a USBXXX setting for a USB
connection or EpsonNet Print Port for a network connection.
Check that the printer driver is
installed on the computer and that
the USB port settings for the printer
are correct.
The file name is already in use.
Rename the file and scan again.
Change the file name settings, move or delete the files, or
change the file name on the shared folder.
Scanned file(s) are too large. Only
XX page(s) have been sent. Check if
the destination has enough space.
There is not enough disk space on the computer. Increase the
free space on the computer.
323
LCD screen message Condition/solution
DNS error. Check DNS settings. Unable to connect to the computer. Make sure the address in
the contacts list on the product and of the shared folder match. If
the IP address of the computer is static and is set manually,
change the computer name in the network path to the IP
address. For example, change \\EPSON02\SCAN to
\\192.168.XX.XX\SCAN. Make sure the computer is turned on
and is not going to enter sleep mode. Temporarily disable the
computer's firewall and security software. If this clears the error,
check the security software settings. If Public network is
selected as the network place, you cannot save the scanned
images to the shared folder. Set the forward settings for each
port. If you are using a laptop computer and the IP address is set
as DHCP, the IP address may change when reconnecting to the
network. Obtain the IP address again. Make sure the DNS
setting is correct. The computer name and IP address may differ
when the management table of the DNS server is not updated.
Contact your network administrator and your DNS server
administrator.
Authentication error. Please check
the Email Server Settings.
Make sure the user name and password on the computer, and
the contacts on the printer, are correct. Also, make sure that the
password has not expired.
Communication error. Check the Wi-
Fi/network connection.
Unable to communicate with a network folder that is registered
on the contacts list. Make sure Use Microsoft network sharing
(Network > MS Network) is enabled in the Web Config. Make
sure the address in the contacts list on the product and of the
shared folder match. Access rights for the user in the contacts
list should be added on the Sharing and Security tabs of the
shared folder's properties. Set the user's permissions to
allowed.
Recovery mode
Update Firmware
An error has occurred during firmware updating. Connect your
product using a USB cable and try downloading the Firmware
Update from the Epson support site. If you need help, contact
Epson for support.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
324
Job Status Error Codes
If a printing, scanning, copying, or faxing (models equipped with optional fax board) job does not
complete successfully, you can check the error code for the reason. Select Job/Status > Job Status to
view the error codes.
Code Condition/solution
001 The product was turned off by a power failure.
101 Memory is full. Reduce the size of the print job.
102 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Reduce the size of the print
job or print one copy at a time.
103 Print quality was decreased due to a lack of available memory. If the quality of the printout
is unacceptable, try simplifying the page by reducing the number of graphics or the
number and size of the fonts.
104
131
Reverse order printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Reduce the size of
the print job.
106 Cannot print from the computer due to access control settings. Contact your product
administrator.
107 User authentication failed and the job has been canceled. Contact your product
administrator.
108 Confidential job data was deleted when the product was turned off.
109 The received fax was already deleted (models equipped with optional fax board).
110 The job was printed 1-sided because the loaded paper does not support 2-sided printing.
111 Available memory is running low. Reduce the size of the print job.
120 Cannot communicate with a server using an open platform. Check the server or network
for errors.
130 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available memory. Reduce the size of the print
job or change the collate settings.
132 Cannot print due to a lack of available memory. Reduce the size of the print job.
133 Cannot print 2-sided due to a lack of available memory. Only one side will print. Reduce
the size of the print job.
141 HDD error. The job is canceled. Contact Epson for support.
325
Code Condition/solution
151 Cannot print because the user name associated with the confidential job does not match.
161 Page count management is set in Epson Print Admin Serverless. Could not print because
the number of remaining pages is insufficient.
201 The product's memory is full. You can send pages individually, or print received faxes and
delete them to free up memory space (models equipped with optional fax board).
202 The line was disconnected by the recipient's fax machine (models equipped with optional
fax board). Wait a moment, then try again.
203 The product cannot detect a dial tone (models equipped with optional fax board). Make
sure the phone cable is connected correctly and the phone line works. If you connected
the product to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) phone line or Terminal Adapter, change
the Line Type setting to PBX. If you still cannot send a fax, turn off the Dial Tone
Detection setting. (Turning off the Dial Tone Detection setting may cause the product to
drop the first digit of a fax number.)
204 The recipient's fax machine is busy (models equipped with optional fax board). Wait a
moment, then try again.
205 The recipient's fax machine does not answer (models equipped with optional fax board).
Wait a moment, then try again.
206 The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the product's LINE and EXT ports (models
equipped with optional fax board). Connect the phone cable correctly.
207 The phone cable is not connected (models equipped with optional fax board). Connect
the phone cable.
208 The fax could not be sent to some of the specified recipients (models equipped with
optional fax board). Print a fax log to check which recipients failed to receive the fax. If the
Save Failure Data setting is turned on, you can resend a fax by selecting Job Status in
the Job/Status menu.
301
401
There is not enough storage space available to save the data in the external memory
device. Clear space on the device or use a different device.
302
402
The external memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection.
303 No folder is available for saving the scanned file. Create a folder or use a different
memory device.
326
Code Condition/solution
304
404
The external memory device has been removed. Reinsert the device.
305
405
An error occurred while saving data to an external memory device. Reinsert the memory
device or use a different device.
306 The product's memory is full. Wait until current jobs are finished processing.
307 The scanned image size exceeds the maximum limit. Lower the scanning resolution or
increase the compression ratio to reduce the size of the scanned image.
311
321
411
421
A DNS error has occurred. From the Home screen, select Settings > General Settings >
Network Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP and check the DNS settings for the server,
computer, or access point.
312
412
An authentication error has occurred. From the Home screen, select Settings > General
Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server Settings and check
the server settings.
313
413
A communication error has occurred. From the Home screen, select Settings > General
Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server Settings and check
the server settings. Print a network connection report to check if the product is connected
to the network. The authentication method of the settings and the email server may not
match. If the authentication method is set to Off, make sure the authentication method of
the email server is set to None.
314 The data size exceeds the maximum size for the attached files. From the Home screen,
select Scan > Email > Scan Settings and scroll down to select Attached File Max Size.
Increase the setting or lower the file size of the scanned image.
315
327
The memory is full. Wait for current jobs to finish and try again.
316 A mail encryption error has occurred. Make sure the encryption certificate setting and
product time setting are correct.
317 A mail signature error has occurred. Make sure the signing certificate setting and product
time setting are correct.
318 A domain restriction error has occurred. Contact your administrator to check if the domain
of your email destination is restricted.
327
Code Condition/solution
322 An authentication error occurred while scanning. From the Home screen, select Scan >
Network Folder/FTP > Keyboard > Location and check the settings.
323
331
A communication error has occurred while scanning. From the Home screen, select Scan
> Network Folder/FTP > Keyboard > Location and check the settings. You can also
print a network status sheet to check the network connection.
324 A file with the same name already exists in the specified folder for scanning. Delete the
duplicate file or change the file name prefix. From the Home screen, select Scan >
Network Folder/FTP > Scan Settings > File Name.
325
326
There is not enough storage space available in the specified folder. Increase the storage
space in the specified folder, delete unnecessary files, or lower the file size of the
scanned image.
328 The destination for scanning was wrong or the destination does not exist. From the Home
screen, select Scan > Network Folder/FTP > Keyboard > Location and check the
settings.
329 The scanned image size exceeds the maximum limit for the Network Folder/FTP scan
option. Lower the scanning resolution or increase the compression ratio.
330 An FTPS/FTPS secure connection error has occurred. Check the location in the
destination settings. Run Web Config and update the root certificate, and import or update
the CA certificate. If the error cannot be cleared, disable certificate verification in the
destination settings.
332 There is not enough space available for saving the scanned files in the specified folder.
Delete unnecessary files from the specified folder.
333 The destination could not be found because the destination information was uploaded to
the server before sending the scanned data. Select the destination again.
334 An error occurred while sending the scanned data.
341 A communication error has occurred while scanning. Make sure the product is connected
to the computer or network correctly and that you installed Document Capture Pro or
Document Capture. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your
firewall or security software.
342 All scanned originals were detected as blank pages. Make sure that the front and back
sides of the original are correct. If some pages are skipped as black, lower the detection
level of the Skip Blank Pages > Sensitivity setting.
343 The OCR device is damaged. Contact Epson Support.
328
Code Condition/solution
350 An FTPS/HTTPS certificate error has occurred. If the error cannot be cleared, disable
certificate verification in the destination settings.
422 An authentication error has occurred while faxing (models equipped with optional fax
board). From the Home screen, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings and check the settings for the folder
selected in Destination.
423 A communication error has occurred while faxing (models equipped with optional fax
board). From the Home screen, select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings. Select the arrow icon at the end of an entry
and check the Save/Forward Destination setting. You can also print a network status
sheet to check the network connection.
425 There is not enough storage space available in the forwarding destination folder for faxing
(models equipped with optional fax board). Increase the storage space.
428 The destination for faxing was wrong or the destination does not exist (models equipped
with optional fax board). From the Home screen, select Settings > General Settings >
Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings. Select the arrow icon at the
end of an entry and check the Save/Forward Destination setting.
501 Cannot use the storage feature. Check the user permissions from Web Config.
502 The storage area is full. Delete unnecessary saved jobs from the control panel or Web
Config.
504 The number of files has reached the maximum limit. Delete unnecessary saved jobs from
the control panel or Web Config.
505 A read/write error has occurred in the product's storage. Contact Epson for support.
506 When outputting files from the storage, the maximum number of pages for a job has been
reached. The maximum size of a job from storage is 2000 pages.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Running a Product Check
Running a product check helps you determine if your product is operating properly.
1. Disconnect any interface cables connected to your product.
2. Load plain paper in the product.
329
3. Press the home button, if necessary.
4. Select Settings > Maintenance > Print Head Nozzle Check.
5. Select a paper cassette and select OK.
The nozzle pattern prints.
6. Do one of the following, depending on the results of the product check:
• If the page prints and the nozzle check pattern is complete, the product is operating properly. Any
operation problem you may have could be caused by your computer, cable, software, or selected
settings. Check the other solutions in this book or try uninstalling and reinstalling your printer
software.
• If the page prints but the nozzle check pattern has gaps, clean the print head.
• If the page does not print, the product may have a problem. Check the other solutions in this
manual. If they do not work, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Resetting Control Panel Defaults
If you have a problem with settings on the product control panel, you can reset them to their factory
defaults. You can choose which settings to reset or reset them all.
Note: This setting can be locked by an administrator. If you cannot access or change this setting,
contact your administrator for assistance.
Note: This product automatically stores names, telephone numbers, and fax data (models equipped with
an optional fax board) in its internal memory log when faxing or emailing jobs. This product also contains
an encrypted hard drive that is used for storing large and/or authenticated print, copy and scan jobs. You
may erase data stored on the encrypted hard drive by following the steps outlined in the link below. It is
recommended that data is erased before disposing or giving away the product.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Reset.
Note: You may need to enter the administrator password.
330
You see a screen like this:
3. Select one of these options:
• Network Settings: Resets all network settings
• Copy Settings: Resets all settings for copying
• Scan Settings: Resets all settings for scanning
• Fax Settings : Resets all settings for faxing
• Erase All Memory: Resets all control panel settings including the contacts list. Select from High
Speed, Overwrite, or Triple Overwrite.
• Erase All Data and Settings: Resets all control panel settings including the contacts list. Select
from High Speed, Overwrite, or Triple Overwrite.
Note: High Speed erases the data on the hard drive. The Overwrite and Triple Overwrite
options also overwrite any invalid data in the hard drive. Overwrite takes about 60 minutes to
complete and Triple Overwrite takes about 280 minutes to complete.
You see a confirmation screen.
331
4. Select Yes to reset the selected settings. (Select No if you want to cancel the operation.)
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Solving Setup Problems
Check these sections if you have problems while setting up your product.
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
Noise After Ink Installation
Software Installation Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Does Not Turn On or Off
If you cannot turn the product on or off, try these solutions:
• If you cannot turn on your product, make sure the power cord is securely connected and hold down
the power button a little longer.
• If you cannot turn off your product, hold down the power button a little longer. If you still cannot turn off
your product, unplug the power cord, plug the power cord back in, then turn your product on and off
again using the power button.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Noise After Ink Installation
If you hear noises from your product after installing ink, check the following:
• The first time you install ink, the product must charge its print head. Wait until charging finishes before
you turn off the product, or it may charge improperly and use excess ink the next time you turn it on.
• If the product's print head stops moving or making noise, and the charging process has not finished
after approximately 5 minutes, turn off your product. Turn it back on and check to see if charging is still
in progress. If it is still in progress, contact Epson for help.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Software Installation Problems
If you have problems while installing your product software, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any necessary cables are securely connected at both ends.
Also make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you still have
problems installing software, contact your system administrator.
332
• Close any other programs, including screen savers and virus protection software, and install your
product software again.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the correct port is shown in
the printer properties.
• If you see any error message or your software does not install correctly in Windows, you may not have
software installation privileges. Contact your system administrator.
Parent topic: Solving Setup Problems
Solving Network Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems setting up or using your product on a network.
Note: Breakdown or repair of this product may cause loss of fax and network data and settings. Epson is
not responsible for backing up or recovering data and settings during or after the warranty period. We
recommend that you make your own backup or print out your fax and network data and settings.
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac
USB Connection Problems
Wired Network Connection Becomes Unstable
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
Cannot Print Over a Network
Cannot Scan Over a Network
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Cannot Connect to a Wireless Router or Access Point
If your product has trouble finding or connecting to a wireless router or access point, try these solutions:
• Verify that your router or access point is operating correctly by connecting to it from your computer or
another device.
• Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine
the cause of the problem.
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
333
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router.
• Check to see if access restrictions, such as MAC address filtering, are set on the router or access
point. If access restrictions are set, add your product's MAC address to your router's address list. To
obtain your product's MAC address, print a network status sheet. Then follow the instructions in your
router or access point documentation to add the address to the list.
• If your router or access point does not broadcast its network name (SSID), follow the instructions that
came with your product to enter your wireless network name manually.
• If your router or access point has security enabled, determine the kind of security it is using and any
required password or passphrase for connection. Then make sure to enter the exact WEP key or WPA
passphrase correctly.
• Check if your computer is restricting the available wireless channels. If so, verify that your wireless
access point is using one of the usable channels and change to a usable channel, if necessary.
• If you cannot connect your product to a device using Wi-Fi Direct, you may have exceeded the
maximum number of devices connected to your product (8). Print a network status sheet or access
Web Config on the browser for your device and check the number of connected devices. If 8 devices
are already connected, disconnect a device by deleting the product's SSID from the Wi-Fi screen of
that device. If fewer than 8 devices are connected, check the accuracy of your other network settings,
move your device closer to your product, and try connecting again.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related tasks
Printing a Network Connection Report
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Network Software Cannot Find Product on a Network
If EpsonNet Setup cannot find your product on a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure you have installed and set up the optional Wireless LAN Interface.
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your network. Verify the connection using your
product control panel.
• Check if your network name (SSID) contains non-ASCII characters. Your product cannot display non-
ASCII characters.
• Make sure your product is not connected to a guest network.
334
• If necessary, reinstall your product software and try running EpsonNet Setup again:
1. Reset your product's network settings to their factory defaults.
2. Windows only: Uninstall your product software.
3. Restart your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router, so note the next step before restarting it.
4. Download your product software from the Epson website, or contact your system administrator.
• If you have replaced your router, reinstall your product software to connect to the new router.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing detection of your device over the network. See your router or access point documentation
for instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related references
Status Icon Information
Related tasks
Printing a Network Connection Report
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Wireless Network Connection is Unstable on a Mac
If you connected a device to a USB 3.0 port on your Mac, you may experience wireless network
interference between your product and your Mac.
If you cannot connect to your product over the wireless network or the connection becomes unstable,
move the device connected to your Mac USB 3.0 port further away from your Mac.
If your wireless router or access point has a 5 GHz band, connect to it (U.S. and Canada only).
Note for U.S. and Canada: If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5
GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and
Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
335
USB Connection Problems
If you used a USB cable to connect to a computer that has multiple peripherals, make sure the computer
is grounded. Otherwise, you may feel a slight electric shock when touching your product.
If the printer is not recognized while using a USB cable, make sure the cable is connected securely at
both ends, and that you are not using a USB hub. You may also need to try a different USB cable.
USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
USB 3.0 Connection is Unstable When Using a USB 2.0 Cable
If you receive a communication error or experience an unstable connection when using a SuperSpeed
USB port on your computer with a USB 2.0 cable, try these solutions:
• Use a USB 3.0 cable.
• Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on your computer, if available.
• Connect to another SuperSpeed USB port on your computer, if available.
Parent topic: USB Connection Problems
Wired Network Connection Becomes Unstable
When you connect the product to a wired network using a router or access point that supports IEEE
802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet), the connection may become unstable, you may be unable to
connect to the product, and the communication speed may become slow. If you experience any of these
issues, follow the steps below to disable IEEE 802.3az and then connect your product again.
1. Disconnect the Ethernet cables connected to the computer and your product.
2. Disable IEEE 802.3az for the computer's network adapter if it is enabled (check your operating
system's Ethernet connection settings).
3. Connect the computer and your product directly with an Ethernet cable.
4. Print a network connection report from your product.
5. On the computer, open a web browser and enter your product's IP address from the network
connection report.
6. Select Network Settings > Wired LAN.
7. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az. and click Next.
8. Click OK and remove the Ethernet cable connecting the computer and your product.
9. If you disabled IEEE 802.3az for your computer's network adapter, enable it.
336
10. Reconnect the Ethernet cables from the router or access point to your computer and product.
If problems still occur, other devices on the network may be causing them.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Product Does Not Appear in Mac Printer Window
If your product does not appear in the Mac printer window, try these solutions:
• Turn your product off, wait 30 seconds, then turn it back on again.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control
panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• If you are connecting the product wirelessly via EpsonNet Setup and you do not see the Wi-Fi antenna
icon with connection bars on your LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed
correctly. If necessary, reinstall your software.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Related tasks
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
Using WPS to Connect to a Network
Cannot Print Over a Network
If you cannot print over a network, try these solutions:
• Make sure that your product is turned on.
• Make sure you install your product's network software as described in your product documentation, or
contact your system administrator.
• Print a network status sheet and verify that the network settings are correct. If the network status is
Disconnected, check any cable connections and turn your product off and then on again.
• Print a network connection report and check the codes and messages on the report to help determine
the cause of the problem.
• If you are using TCP/IP, make sure the product's IP address is set correctly for your network. If your
network does not assign IP addresses using DHCP, set the IP address manually.
• If the IP address assigned to the product is 169.254.XX.XX and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly. Check the IP address and subnet mask assigned to the
product (Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced) then restart the wireless
router or reset the network settings for the product.
337
• Make sure your computer and product are both using the same wireless network.
• If you are trying to print using AirPrint, make sure Paper Setup Auto Display is enabled, and enable
the AirPrint setting using Web Config.
• If network printing is slow, print a network status sheet and check the signal strength. If it is poor, place
your product closer to your router or access point. Avoid placing your product near a microwave oven,
cordless phone, or large metal object, such as a filing cabinet.
Note: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual band (2.4 GHz and
5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band,
give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home Network 2.4 GHz and Home
Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet service provider for
instructions.
• Try restarting your router following the instructions in your router documentation.
Note: If you are reading these instructions online, you will lose your Internet connection when you
restart your router.
• Check to see if your wireless router or access point has an enabled Privacy Separator function that is
preventing printing from a device over the network. See your router or access point documentation for
instructions on disabling the Privacy Separator function.
• If you are connecting the product via Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) and the Wi-Fi icon on your
product's LCD screen is not lit, make sure you select one of the WPS options from the product control
panel within 2 minutes of pressing the WPS button on your router.
• Check your wired LAN router or access point to see if the LED for the port to which your product is
connected is on or flashing. If the link LED is off, try the following:
• Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your product and to your router, access
point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting your product to a different port or a different router, access point, switch, or hub.
• Try connecting with a different Ethernet cable.
• Try printing to your product from another computer on the network.
• If you are connecting the product via EpsonNet Setup and the Wi-Fi icon does not appear lit on the
LCD screen, make sure your product software was installed correctly. If necessary, reinstall your
software.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
338
Related tasks
Printing a Network Connection Report
Printing a Network Status Sheet
Cannot Scan Over a Network
If you have problems scanning over a network, try these solutions:
• If you cannot scan from your product control panel, make sure you restarted your computer after
installing the product software. Make sure the Event Manager program is not being blocked by your
firewall or security software.
Note for Latin America: If you are using a 5 GHz wireless router, set the router to operate in dual
band (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz) mode. If your router uses a single network name (SSID) for both the
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz band, give each band its own network name (SSID) instead, such as Home
Network 2.4 GHz and Home Network 5 GHz. See your router documentation or contact your internet
service provider for instructions.
• If you are scanning a large original at a high resolution, a network communication error may occur. Try
scanning again at a lower resolution.
• If network communication was interrupted while starting Epson Scan 2, exit Epson Scan 2, wait a few
seconds, and restart it. If Epson Scan 2 cannot restart, turn off your product, turn it back on, and try
restarting Epson Scan 2 again.
• Check the scanner setting and reset the connection if necessary using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure your product is
selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is
selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen, select EPSON, and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson
Scan 2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other
tab and click Reset.
Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure your product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
339
• You may need to disable the firewall and any anti-virus software on your wireless router or access
point.
• Make sure the DNS settings and domain name are correct.
Parent topic: Solving Network Problems
Solving Network Security Problems
Check these sections if you have problems using the network security features.
Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port
Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR
Cannot Import a Digital Certificate
Deleted a CA-signed Certificate
Digital Certificate Warning Messages
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port
If you cannot create the secure IPP printing port, try these solutions:
• Make sure you specified the correct server certificate for SSL/TLS communication using Web Config.
• If you are using a CA certificate, make sure it is imported to the computer that is accessing the
product.
Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
Related tasks
Importing a CA Certificate
Related topics
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Cannot Update a Certificate or Create a CSR
If you cannot update a self-signed certificate or create a CSR for a CA-signed certificate, try these
solutions:
• Make sure that you entered a Common Name setting in Web Config.
• Make sure the Common Name setting does not contain unsupported characters or is divided by a
comma. Correct the setting and update the certificate again.
Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
340
Related references
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Related tasks
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
Cannot Import a Digital Certificate
If you cannot import a digital certificate, try these solutions:
• Make sure the CA-signed certificate and the CSR have the same information. If they do not match,
import the certificate to a device that matches the information or use the CSR to obtain the CA-signed
certificate again.
• Make sure the CA-signed certificate file size is 5KB or less.
• Make sure you are entering the correct password.
Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
Related references
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Related tasks
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
Deleted a CA-signed Certificate
If you accidentally deleted a CA-signed certificate, try these solutions:
• If you retained a backup file, import the CA-signed certificate again.
• If you obtained the certificate using a CSR created in Web Config, you cannot import a deleted
certificate. Create a new CSR and obtain a new certificate.
Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
Related references
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Related tasks
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
341
Digital Certificate Warning Messages
If you see a warning message when using a digital certificate, check for solutions in this table.
Message Solution
Enter a Server Certificate. Select a certificate file and click Import.
CA Certificate 1 is not entered. Import CA certificate 1 before importing additional
certificates.
Invalid value below. Remove any unsupported characters in the file
path and password.
Invalid date and time. Set the date and time on the product using Web
Config, EpsonNet Config, or the product control
panel.
Invalid password Enter the password that matches the password set
for the CA certificate.
Invalid file Try the following:
• Import only certificate files in X509 format sent
by a trusted certificate authority.
• Make sure the file size is 5KB or less and is not
corrupted or fabricated.
• Make sure the chain in the certificate is valid;
check the certificate authority's website.
Cannot use the Server Certificates that include
more than three CA certificates.
Import certificate files in PKCS#12 format that
contains one or two CA certificates, or convert
each certificate to PEM format and import them
again.
The certificate has expired. Check if the certificate
is valid, or check the date and time on your printer.
Make sure the product time and date are set
correctly and, if the certificate is out of date, obtain
and import a new certificate.
342
Message Solution
Private key is required. Do one of the following to pair a private key with
the certificate:
• For PEM/DER format certificates obtained from
a CSR using a computer, specify the private key
file.
• For PKCS#12 format certificates obtained from
a CSR using a computer, create a file containing
the private key.
If you re-imported a PEM/DER format certificate
obtained from a CSR using Web Config, you can
only import it once. You must obtain and import a
new certificate.
Setup failed. Make sure the computer and product are
connected, and the certificate file is not corrupted,
then import the certificate file again.
Parent topic: Solving Network Security Problems
Related tasks
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server
Selecting the Date and Time
Solving Copying Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems copying with your product.
Product Cannot Copy
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Product Cannot Copy
If your product cannot make copies, try these solutions:
• If user restriction has been enabled, you may need to enter a user name and password. Contact your
administrator for assistance.
343
• If the product has an error, such as a paper jam, you cannot make copies. Check the LCD screen for
any errors, and follow the onscreen instructions to clear the error.
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Related topics
Restricting Features Available for Users
Product Makes Noise, But Nothing Copies
If your product makes a noise, but nothing copies, try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• If the nozzle check page does not print, but the product's power is on, make sure your product
software is installed correctly.
• Make sure your product is level (not tilted).
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Product Makes Noise When It Sits for a While
Your product is performing routine maintenance. This is normal.
Parent topic: Solving Copying Problems
Solving Copy Quality Problems
Check these sections if your copies have a quality problem.
Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors
Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Copies Have Incorrect or Faint Colors
If your copies have incorrect, uneven, smeared, or faint colors, try these solutions:
• Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
344
• Do not press too hard on the original when you copy from the scanner glass.
• Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
• Clean the ADF.
• Wipe any dirt or dust off of your originals.
• If the colors are smeared, try lowering the copy density setting on the LCD screen.
• Make sure your paper is not curled.
• When vertical banding appears or the paper is smeared, clean the paper path.
• When horizontal banding appears or the top or bottom of the paper is smeared, load paper in the
correct direction and slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
• When copying on thick paper, select a Thick Paper setting from the control panel (Settings >
General Settings > Printer Settings > Thick Paper). When this setting is enabled, copy quality may
decline and copy speed may decrease.
• If you see a ripple pattern in your printout and your original is a printed document, such as a magazine
or catalog, change the Reduce/Enlarge setting. If the ripple pattern still appears, place the original at
a slightly different angle.
Parent topic: Solving Copy Quality Problems
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Position, Size, or Margins of Copies are Incorrect
If the position, size, or margins of your copies are incorrect, try these solutions:
• When placing originals in the ADF, make sure the edge guides are against the edges of the paper.
• When placing originals on the scanner glass, make sure the original is placed correctly for scanning.
Align the corner of the original with the corner indicated by the symbol on the scanner glass. If
necessary, move the original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly.
• If the original is folded or wrinkled, use the scanner glass. Flatten any folds or wrinkles in the original
and try using another sheet or card to keep the original in contact with the scanner glass.
• Clean the scanner glass and ADF.
345
• Make sure the paper is loaded in the correct direction.
• Select the appropriate original size copy setting on the LCD screen.
Parent topic: Solving Copy Quality Problems
Solving Paper Problems
Check these sections if you have problems using paper with your product.
Paper Feeding Problems
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
Paper Jam Problems
Paper Ejection Problems
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Paper Feeding Problems
If you have problems feeding paper, try these solutions:
• Make sure the paper cassette is inserted all the way in the printer.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• If paper does not feed correctly, remove and reload it in the cassette and adjust the edge guides.
Make sure the paper stack is not above the tab on the edge guides inside the cassette.
• If multiple pages feed at once, remove the paper, fan the edges to separate the sheets, and reload it.
• If multiple sheets continue to feed at once, load one sheet of paper at a time or load new paper.
• Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
• If paper jams when you print on both sides of the paper, try loading fewer sheets.
• If a paper out error occurs when paper is loaded in the paper tray, reload the paper in the center of the
paper tray.
• For best results, follow these guidelines:
• Use new, smooth, high-quality paper that is not curled, creased, old, too thin, or too thick.
• Load paper in the cassette printable side down.
• Load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Follow any special loading instructions that came with the paper.
346
Note: Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place it on a flat, stable surface
that extends beyond the base of the product in all directions.
• Clean the paper rollers.
• Operate your product in the recommended environmental conditions.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Paper Specifications
Paper Loading Capacity
Originals Do Not Feed From the Automatic Document Feeder
If your originals do not feed when placed in the ADF, try these solutions:
• Make sure the ADF icon lights up on the Copy, Fax, or Scan screen on the LCD screen. If not, reload
the originals.
• Make sure the size, weight, and number of your originals are supported by the ADF.
• Make sure the originals are loaded correctly.
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the originals.
• Make sure the document is not curled or creased.
• Try cleaning the inside of the ADF.
• Do not load originals above the arrow mark on the ADF edge guide.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Paper Jam Problems
If a paper jam occurs in the product, a message appears on the LCD screen. Follow the on-screen
instructions to locate the paper jam and remove the paper.
Caution: Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the product. If the
product starts operating, it could cause an injury. Be careful not to touch the protruding parts to avoid
injury. Remove the jammed paper carefully or you may damage the product.
347
Caution: When using the optional hole punch unit with the optional staple or booklet finisher, adjust the
printed area so it does not overlap with the holes being punched. You should also set the binding margin
so that it is not printed at the hole punch position. Punching holes over any printed area may cause hole
punch failure or a paper jam.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Related references
Finishing Options - Windows
Finishing Options - Mac
Paper Ejection Problems
If you have problems with paper ejecting properly, try these solutions:
• If paper does not eject fully, you may have set the wrong paper size. Cancel printing to eject the paper.
Select the correct paper size when you reprint.
• If paper falls from the output tray, extend the paper stopper.
• If paper is wrinkled when it ejects, it may be damp or too thin. Load new paper and be sure to select
the correct paper type setting when you reprint.
• If you are using letterhead paper, select the appropriate paper type setting.
• Clean the roller inside the printer to remove any dust on the paper path.
• If you are using the staple finisher, make sure to remove any scraps of paper left inside the unit and
clear any objects around the unit.
Parent topic: Solving Paper Problems
Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Check these sections if you have problems while printing from your computer.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this
manual. See the Apple website for details.
Note: For problems while printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver or PostScript (PS3) printer
software, see the sections covering that software in this manual.
Nothing Prints
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
348
Printing is Slow
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Related topics
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Nothing Prints
If you have sent a print job and nothing prints, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and connected to your computer.
• Make sure any interface cables are connected securely at both ends.
• Make sure there are no errors or paper jams in the product.
• There may a problem with the printer's status. Click EPSON Status Monitor 3 on the printer driver's
Maintenance tab, and then check the printer status. If EPSON Status Monitor 3 is disabled, click
Extended Settings on the Maintenance tab, and then select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3.
• If you connected your product to a USB hub, make sure it is a first-tier hub. If it still does not print,
connect your product directly to your computer instead of the hub.
• If the printer cannot print using a USB connection, disconnect the USB cable from the computer, right-
click on the printer icon displayed on the computer, and select Remove Device. Then connect the
USB cable to the computer and try a test print.
• If your computer is connected using a USB cable, try a different USB port on your computer or a
different cable.
• Make sure the printer status is not offline or pending.
• Make sure you are using the Epson printer driver for your product or the available functions are
limited.
• Run a product check to see if a test page prints. If the test page prints, check to see if your product
software is installed correctly.
• Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a high-
resolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. Print the image at a lower
resolution or if necessary, increase your system's memory.
• In Windows, make sure your product is selected as the default printer and the printer port setting
matches the printer connection port.
349
• In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
• In Windows, do one of the following to open the Epson Printer Connection Checker and follow the on-
screen instructions to check the connection status:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Epson Printer Connection Checker and select it.
• Windows 10: Click and select Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select the Epson Printer Connection Checker
icon.
• Windows 7: Click and select All Programs > Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.
• On a Mac, make sure the printer is added to the printer list and the printer is not paused.
• Make sure the printing language setting on the control panel is correct.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
• You can try to clear the problem by updating the product software to the latest version. If the problem
persists, try uninstalling and reinstalling the printer driver.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related references
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Related tasks
Running a Product Check
Checking for Software Updates
Product Icon Does Not Appear in Windows Taskbar
If you do not see your product icon in the Windows taskbar, first try restarting your computer. If that does
not work, try this solution:
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , search for Settings and select it. Select Bluetooth & devices > Printers
& scanners. Select your product name and select Printing preferences.
350
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Devices > Printers & scanners. Select your
product name and select Manage > Printing preferences.
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select Printing Preferences, and select
your product name again if necessary.
• Windows 7: Click and select Devices and Printers. Right-click your product name, select
Printing Preferences, and select your product name again if necessary.
2. Click the Maintenance tab.
3. Click the Extended Settings button.
4. Select Enable EPSON Status Monitor 3 and click OK.
5. Click the Monitoring Preferences button.
6. Click the checkbox for the option that adds the shortcut icon to the taskbar.
7. Click OK to close the open program windows.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related topics
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
Printing is Slow
If printing becomes slow, try these solutions:
• Make sure your system meets the requirements for your operating system. If you are printing a high-
resolution image, you may need more than the minimum requirements. If necessary, increase your
system's memory.
• If you are using Windows 7, close the Devices and Printers window before you print.
• On a Mac, make sure you download and install the Epson printer driver.
• Make sure Quiet Mode is turned off.
• Clear space on your hard drive or run a defragmentation utility to free up existing space.
• Close any programs you are not using when you print.
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
351
• If printing becomes slower after printing continuously for a long time, the product may have
automatically slowed down to protect the print mechanism from overheating or becoming damaged.
Let the product rest with the power on for 30 minutes, then try printing again.
For the fastest printing, select the following settings in your product software:
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Turn on any high speed settings in your product software.
• Select a lower print quality setting.
• Make sure the ink drying time has not been increased for double-sided printing.
• Windows: Click the Maintenance or Utility tab, select Extended Settings or Speed and Progress,
and select the following settings:
• Always Spool RAW Datatype
• Page Rendering Mode
• Print as Bitmap
• Mac: Select System Preferences or System Settings, select Printers & Scanners, and select your
product. Select Options & Supplies, select Options (or Driver), and enable the Bidirectional
printing setting.
If printing is still slow and you are using Windows 7 or Windows Vista, try the following:
1. Click and select Computer or My Computer. Double-click the C: drive and open these folders:
ProgramData > EPSON > PRINTER.
Note: If you do not see the ProgramData folder, open the Organize menu and select Folder and
search options. In the window that appears, click the View tab, select Show hidden files, folders,
and drives in the Advanced settings list, and click OK.
2. Right-click the EPAUDF01.AUD file and select Delete.
3. Restart your computer and try printing again.
Parent topic: Solving Problems Printing from a Computer
Related topics
Printing with the Epson Universal Print Driver - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Windows
Printing with the PostScript (PS3) Printer Software - Mac
352
Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Check these sections if you have problems with the layout or content of your printed pages.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this
manual. See the Apple website for details.
Inverted Image
Too Many Copies Print
Blank Pages Print
Incorrect Margins on Printout
Incorrect Characters Print
Incorrect Image Size or Position
Slanted Printout
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Inverted Image
If your printed image is inverted unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Turn off any mirror or inversion settings in your printing application.
• Turn off the Mirror Image, Flip horizontally, or Reverse page orientation settings in your printer
software. (This option has different names, depending on your operating system version.)
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Too Many Copies Print
Make sure that the Copies setting in your printing program or printer software is not set for multiple
copies.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Blank Pages Print
If blank pages print unexpectedly, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• If a blank page exists in a document you are printing and you want to skip printing it, select the Skip
Blank Page setting in your printer software, if available.
353
• Run a print head nozzle check to see if any of the nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Make sure your product is selected as the printer in your printing program.
• Make sure your product is on a flat surface and operating in the recommended environmental
conditions or multiple sheets of paper may be fed at the same time.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related references
Environmental Specifications
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Incorrect Margins on Printout
If your printed page has incorrect margins, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size settings in your printing program and printer software.
• Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the product.
• Clean the scanner glass and the document cover. If there is dust or stains on the glass, the copy area
may extend to include the dust or stains.
• Load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Select the appropriate original size in the copy settings.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Incorrect Characters Print
If incorrect characters appear in your prints, try these solutions before reprinting:
• Make sure any cables are securely connected at both ends.
• In Windows, delete all jobs from the Windows Spooler. Click Print Queue on the Maintenance tab in
the printer settings window, and cancel any stalled print jobs.
• On a Mac, cancel any paused print jobs.
354
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• If incorrect characters still appear in your prints, try connecting your product using a different cable.
• If your computer entered sleep mode the last time you printed, the next print job after your computer
exits sleep mode may contain garbled characters. Print your document again.
• Make sure you are using the printer software for this product. Check the product name at the top of the
driver window.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, the product cannot print binary data if it is
connected to the computer using a USB cable. Try selecting ASCII or TBCP as the Output Protocol
setting on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, select the appropriate substitution fonts on
the Device Settings tab in the printer properties.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Incorrect Image Size or Position
If your printed image is the wrong size or in the wrong position, try these solutions:
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size and layout settings in your printing program and printer
software.
• Make sure you selected the correct paper size on the control panel.
• Make sure your paper is positioned correctly for feeding into the printer.
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Clean the scanner glass and document cover.
• If the edges of a copy are cropped, slightly move the original away from the edges of the scanner
glass.
• Make sure you selected the correct margins for your paper size in your printing program.
• Be sure to select the appropriate original size setting for your original in the copy settings.
You can use the preview option in your printer software to check your margins before you print.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
355
Slanted Printout
If your printouts are slanted, try these solutions:
• Make sure the paper is loaded in the correct direction.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
• Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets.
• Slide the edge guides against the edges of the paper.
• Select a higher print quality setting in your printer software.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Disable the Bidirectional Printing setting.
• Make sure the product is not printing while tilted or at an angle.
Parent topic: Solving Page Layout and Content Problems
Related references
Environmental Specifications
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper Loading Orientation
Related tasks
Loading Paper in the Cassettes and Paper Tray
Solving Print Quality Problems
Check these sections if your printouts have problems with print quality, but your image looks fine on your
computer screen.
Note: When printing using AirPrint, the available print settings are different from those covered in this
manual. See the Apple website for details.
White or Dark Lines in Printout
Blurry or Smeared Printout
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
Grainy Printout
Incorrect Colors (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Parent topic: Solving Problems
356
White or Dark Lines in Printout
If you notice white or dark lines in your prints (also called banding), try these solutions before you reprint:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Disable the bidirectional (high speed) setting.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• When horizontal banding appears or the top or bottom of the paper is smeared, load paper in the
correct direction and slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
• If you are copying from the ADF, copy from the scanner glass instead or use a higher quality setting.
• You may need to replace the ink cartridges.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related references
Paper Loading Orientation
Related tasks
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Windows
Selecting Basic Print Settings - Mac
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
Blurry or Smeared Printout
If your printouts are blurry or smeared, try these solutions:
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• Slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
• Use a support sheet with special paper, or load special paper one sheet at a time.
• Place a piece of black paper on the back of the original and copy it again.
• Make sure your paper meets the specifications for your product.
• Use Epson papers to ensure proper saturation and absorption of genuine Epson inks.
• If printouts are frequently smeared or scuffed, try using new paper.
357
• Do not load more than the recommended number of sheets. For plain paper, do not load above the
line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.
• Make sure the paper type setting in your product software matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• If you are printing on thick paper or envelopes, turn on the Thick Paper setting from the control panel
or select Thick Paper and Envelopes in the Extended Settings of the printer software. (Turning this
setting on will decrease print speed.)
• If you are printing on thick paper, select a thick paper Paper Type setting on the control panel.
• If paper is still smeared after enabling settings for thick paper, reduce the print density.
• If you are printing on thick paper or envelopes, make sure you select the appropriate settings.
• Remove each sheet from the output tray as it is printed.
• Avoid handling printouts on glossy paper right after printing to allow the ink to set.
• Dry printouts completely before filing or displaying them. When drying printouts, avoid direct sunlight,
do not use a dryer, and do not touch the printed side of the paper.
• Do not stack printouts immediately after printing.
• Turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• When vertical banding appears or the paper is smeared, clean the paper path.
• When horizontal banding appears or the top or bottom of the paper is smeared, load paper in the
correct direction and slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.
• If you print on both sides of a sheet of paper, smudges may appear on the reverse side of heavily
saturated or dark images. If one side of a sheet will contain a lighter image or text, print that side first.
Make sure the ink has dried before reloading the paper to print on the other side. Adjust the density
and/or ink drying time settings.
• Lower the copy density setting on the product control panel.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• Clean the paper path.
• Clean the paper rollers.
Note: Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place it on a flat, stable surface that
extends beyond the base of the product in all directions.
358
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related references
Paper Specifications
Paper Loading Capacity
Paper Loading Orientation
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Faint Printout or Printout Has Gaps
If your printouts are faint or have gaps, try these solutions:
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• The ink cartridge(s) may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace them.
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the type of paper you loaded.
• Make sure your paper is not damp, curled, old, or loaded incorrectly in your product.
• When copying, increase the Density setting on the product control panel.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• Clean the paper path.
• Clean the paper rollers.
• If you are printing a file that was saved in Storage from a computer, re-save the file to Storage and
select a higher quality setting in your Windows printer driver. On the Main tab, select More Settings
from the Quality drop-down menu, and then select Quality.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related tasks
Checking the Nozzles Using the Product Control Panel
Cleaning the Print Head Using the Product Control Panel
Removing and Installing Ink Cartridges
359
Grainy Printout
If your printouts are grainy, try these solutions:
• Make sure you loaded the printable side of the paper correctly for your product.
• Select a higher print quality setting and turn off any high speed settings in your product software.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• Adjust the print quality in the product software.
• You may need to increase the image resolution or print a smaller size; see your software
documentation.
Note: Images from the Internet may be low resolution and not result in a high quality printout.
• If you enlarged the image size in an image-editing program, you need to increase the image resolution
setting to retain a high image quality. Increase the image resolution by the same amount you increase
the image size. For example, if the image resolution is 300 dpi (dots per inch) and you will double the
image size for printing, change the resolution setting to 600 dpi.
Note: Higher resolution settings result in larger file sizes, which take longer to process and print.
Consider the limitations of your computer system when selecting a resolution, and select the lowest
possible resolution that produces acceptable quality to keep file sizes manageable.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Incorrect Colors (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
If your printouts have incorrect colors, try these solutions:
• Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper you loaded.
• Make sure the Grayscale setting is not selected in your printer software.
• Select EPSON Standard as the Color Mode (Windows) or Mode (Mac) setting in the printer software.
• Run a nozzle check to see if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. Then clean the print head, if
necessary.
• The ink cartridges may be old or low on ink, and you may need to replace them.
• After you print, the colors in your printout need time to set as the ink dries. During this time, the colors
may look different than you expect. To speed up drying time, do not stack your printouts on top of each
other.
360
• Your printed colors can never exactly match your on-screen colors. However, you can use a color
management system to get as close as possible. Try using the color management options in your
printer software.
• Select Custom as the Color Correction setting on the More Options tab of the printer software, then
click Advanced. Try changing the Scene Correction setting to something other than Automatic. If
changing that setting does not work, change the Color Management setting to any color correction
method other than PhotoEnhance.
• If you are using a Mac, select ColorSync from the Color Matching menu of the driver.
• If you are using the Windows PostScript printer software, try adjusting the Color Mode setting on the
Advanced tab of the printer software.
• If you are using the PostScript printer driver and the file you are printing was created in an application
that allows you to change the data format, make sure the settings in the application match the settings
in the printer driver.
• For best results, use genuine Epson paper.
• Remove any dust or dirt on the originals and clean the scanner glass.
• Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
• If you are copying an original, lower the Density setting.
Parent topic: Solving Print Quality Problems
Related references
Paper Loading Orientation
Compatible Epson Papers (U.S. and Canada)
Compatible Epson Papers (Latin America)
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Related tasks
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Solving Scanning Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems scanning with your product.
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2
Parent topic: Solving Problems
361
Scanning Software Does Not Operate Correctly
If your scanning software does not operate correctly, try these solutions:
• Make sure your computer has adequate memory and meets the system requirements for your
operating system.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart your scanning software.
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall your scanning software, try reinstalling it.
• In Windows, make sure your product is listed as a valid device in the Scanners and Cameras control
panel.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Cannot Start Epson Scan 2
If you cannot start Epson Scan 2, try these solutions:
• Make sure your product is turned on and any interface cables are securely connected at both ends.
• If your product is connected to a USB hub, connect it directly to your computer instead.
• Make sure Epson Scan 2 is selected as your scanning program.
• Make sure your computer is not running in a power-saving mode, such as sleep or standby. If so,
wake your system and restart Epson Scan 2.
• Check the connection setting and test the connection using Epson Scan 2 Utility:
Windows 11: Click , search for Epson Scan 2 Utility and select it. Make sure the correct product
is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 10: Click and select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is
selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct
product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
Windows (other versions): Click or Start > All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan
2 > Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other
tab and click Reset.
Mac: Open the Applications folder, click Epson Software, and click Epson Scan 2 Utility. Make
sure the correct product is selected. If necessary, select the Other tab and click Reset.
362
• Make sure you do not have multiple versions of Epson Scan 2 installed. If you do, uninstall both
versions and install one version.
• If you upgraded your operating system but did not reinstall Epson Scan 2, try reinstalling it.
• If the user restriction feature (Access Control) is enabled, a user ID and password are required to
scan. If you do not know the user ID or password, contact your administrator for assistance.
Parent topic: Solving Scanning Problems
Related topics
Restricting Features Available for Users
Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Check these sections if a scanned image on your computer screen has a quality problem.
Note: For solutions when using Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac)
software, see the Document Capture Pro (Windows) or Document Capture (Mac) help utility.
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
Scanned Image Quality Problems
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Image Consists of a Few Dots Only
If your scanned image consists only of a few dots, try these solutions:
• Make sure you placed your original for scanning facing the correct way.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, adjust the Threshold and scan again.
• Remove any lint or dirt from your original.
• Clean the scanner glass.
• Do not press on the original or the document cover with too much force.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
363
Related tasks
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Line of Dots Appears in All Scanned Images
If a line of dots appears in all your scanned images, try these solutions:
• Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended.
Caution: Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the scanner glass.
• Make sure any interface cables are securely connected at both ends.
• Remove any dust or dirt that may have adhered to your original.
• Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.
• Keep the document cover closed to prevent dirt or dust from getting inside.
If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You
can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related tasks
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Straight Lines in an Image Appear Crooked
If straight lines in an original appear crooked in a scanned image, make sure to place your original
straight when you scan it.
Clean the scanner glass with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth or use a small amount of glass cleaner on the
cloth, if necessary. Paper towels are not recommended.
If you are scanning from the ADF, make sure the ADF edge guides fit against the loaded originals. You
can also try cleaning the ADF and scanning again.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related tasks
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
364
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Scanned Image Quality Problems
If you encounter quality problems with your scanned image, try these solutions:
Image is Distorted or Blurry
• Make sure your original is not wrinkled or warped. This may prevent the original from laying flat on the
scanner glass.
• Do not move your original or your product during scanning.
• Clean the scanner glass and the ADF and remove any dirt or dust on your originals.
• Do not press on the document cover or the original with too much force.
• Your product will not operate properly while tilted at an angle. Place your product on a flat, stable
surface that extends beyond its base in all directions.
• Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Make sure you select the correct Image Type for your original.
• Increase the Resolution setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, adjust the Threshold setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Color or Grayscale, select the Unsharp Mask setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White, select Text Enhancement. If the Image Type setting is
Color or Grayscale, change the Text Enhancement setting to High.
Image is Too Dark
• If the Image Type is set to Color or Grayscale, adjust the Brightness setting.
• Check the brightness and contrast settings of your computer monitor.
Back of Original Image Appears in Scanned Image
• Place a piece of black paper on the back of the original and scan it again.
• Lower the copy density setting.
• Adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Make sure you select the correct Image Type for your original.
• Select the Advanced Settings tab and adjust the Brightness setting.
365
Scanned Image Colors Do Not Match Original Colors
Printed colors can never exactly match the colors on your computer monitor because printers and
monitors use different color systems: monitors use RGB (red, green, and blue) and printers typically use
CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black).
Check the color matching and color management capabilities of your computer, display adapter, and the
software you are using to see if they are affecting the palette of colors you see on your screen.
Remove any dust or dirt from your originals and clean the scanner glass. Do not press with too much
force on the original or document cover.
To adjust the colors in your scanned image, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try
scanning again:
• Make sure you select the correct Image Type for your original.
• If the Image Type setting is Color or Grayscale, adjust the Contrast setting.
• If the Image Type setting is Black & White or Grayscale, adjust the Color Enhance setting.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related tasks
Cleaning the Automatic Document Feeder
Cleaning the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Placing Originals in the Automatic Document Feeder
Image Colors are Patchy at the Edges
If you are scanning a thick or warped original, cover its edges with paper to block external light as you
scan it.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Ripple Patterns Appear in an Image
You may see a ripple pattern (called a moiré) in scanned images of printed documents. This is caused
by interference from differing pitches in the scanner's screen and your original's halftone screen. To
reduce this effect, adjust these Epson Scan 2 settings (if available) and try scanning again:
• Select the Descreening setting on the Advanced Settings tab.
• Select a lower Resolution setting.
• Place the original at a slightly different angle.
366
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Scanned Image Edges are Cropped
If the edges of a scanned image are cropped, make sure your original is placed correctly for scanning. If
necessary, move your original away from the edges of the scanner glass slightly.
Parent topic: Solving Scanned Image Quality Problems
Related tasks
Placing Originals on the Scanner Glass
Solving Faxing Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems faxing with your product.
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
Fax Quality is Poor
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
Received Fax is Not Printed
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot Send or Receive Faxes
If you cannot send or receive faxes, try these solutions:
• If an error code is displayed on the control panel, try the solutions suggested in the error code list.
• Use Check Fax Connection on the control panel (Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
Check Fax Connection) to run the automatic fax connection check. Try the solutions suggested in
the report.
• If you are faxing from a computer, use the Epson FAX Utility to send your fax.
• Make sure the recipient's fax machine is turned on and working.
• Make sure paper is loaded correctly in your product.
• Make sure you have set up your header information and have not blocked your caller ID. Otherwise,
your faxes might be rejected by the recipient's fax machine.
• Check that the cable connecting your telephone wall jack to your product's LINE port is secure.
367
• Print a fax connection report using your product control panel or fax software to help diagnose the
problem.
• Verify that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it.
• If you connected your product to a DSL phone line, you must connect a DSL filter to the phone jack to
enable faxing over the line. Contact your DSL provider for the necessary filter.
• If your telephone line uses call waiting and you have trouble receiving faxes, turn off call waiting to
prevent disruption of incoming faxes.
• If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service, the product may not be able to receive faxes.
Contact your service provider for assistance.
Note: If your product is connected to a VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) phone line, keep in mind that
fax machines are designed to work over analog phone lines. Epson cannot guarantee that fax
transmission will work when using VoIP.
If your phone line includes voice mail answering services, calls or faxes may be inadvertently received
by your voice mail service.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Related references
Job Status Error Codes
Related tasks
Loading Paper in the Cassettes and Paper Tray
Related topics
Setting Up Basic Fax Features
Cannot Receive Faxes with a Telephone Connected to Your Product
If you cannot receive faxes when a telephone is connected to your product, try these solutions:
• Make sure your telephone is connected to your product's EXT port.
• Make sure the Receive Mode is set to Manual.
Note: When answering a call that is a fax, wait until the product's LCD screen displays a message that a
connection has been made before you hang up.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
368
Fax Memory Full Error Appears
If you see an error message telling you that the product's fax memory is full, try these solutions:
• If you set the product to save received faxes in the product's memory or inbox, delete any faxes you
have already read.
• If you set the product to save received faxes on a computer, turn on the selected computer. Once the
faxes are saved on the computer, they are deleted from the product's memory.
• If the memory is full, try the following:
• Send a monochrome fax using the direct sending feature
• Send your faxes in smaller batches
• If the product cannot print a received fax due to a product error, such as a paper jam, the memory full
error may appear. Clear any product errors, then ask the sender to resend the fax.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Fax Quality is Poor
If you receive a poor quality fax, try these solutions:
• Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting.
• Contact the fax sender and ask them to send the fax in a higher resolution.
• Try reprinting the received fax.
If the sent fax quality is poor, try these solutions:
• Clean the scanner glass.
• Clean the ADF.
• Try changing the resolution or density setting on the control panel.
• If you are sending a monochrome fax to a single recipient, try sending the fax using the Direct Send
feature.
Note: If you send a high-resolution monochrome fax without using the Direct Send feature, the
product may automatically lower the resolution.
• Try enabling the error correction mode (ECM) setting.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
369
Sent Fax is Received in an Incorrect Size
If your recipient receives a fax in an incorrect size, try these solutions:
• If you are sending a fax using the scanner glass, make sure your original is placed correctly and that
the correct paper size is selected on the control panel.
• Clean the scanner glass and document cover.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Received Fax is Not Printed
If a received fax is not printed, try these solutions:
• Make sure the product is free of errors. The product cannot print received faxes if an error has
occurred with the product, such as a paper jam.
Parent topic: Solving Faxing Problems
Solving USB Device Problems
Check these solutions if you have problems using USB devices with your product.
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Cannot View or Print from a USB Device
If you cannot view or print photos or documents from a USB device connected to your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure memory devices are enabled on the product.
• Make sure your device is compatible with the product.
• Make sure the files on your device are in the correct format.
Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems
Cannot Save Files on a USB Device
If you cannot save files on a USB device connected to your product, try these solutions:
• Make sure the device is not write-protected.
370
• Make sure the device has enough available space.
• Make sure memory devices are enabled on your product.
• Make sure the device is compatible with the product.
Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems
Cannot Transfer Files To or From a USB Device
If you have problems transferring files to or from a USB device connected to your product, try these
solutions:
• Make sure your device is compatible with the product.
• Make sure your product is securely connected to your computer.
• Make sure that the file sharing setting for your product is enabled.
Parent topic: Solving USB Device Problems
Uninstall Your Product Software
If you have a problem that requires you to uninstall and re-install your software, follow the instructions for
your operating system.
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Uninstalling Product Software - Windows
You can uninstall and then re-install your product software to solve certain problems.
1. Turn off the product.
2. Close any open programs or applications.
3. Disconnect any interface cables.
4. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11: Click , then search for Settings and select it. Select Apps or System > Apps &
features. Then select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
• Windows 10: Click and select (Settings) > Apps or System > Apps & features. Then
select the program you want to uninstall and select Uninstall.
371
• Windows 8.x: Navigate to the Apps screen and select Control Panel > Programs > Programs
and Features. Select the uninstall option for your Epson product, then select Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
Select your product again, if necessary, then select OK, and click Yes to confirm the
uninstallation.
• Windows (other versions): Click or Start, and select All Programs or Programs. Select
EPSON, select your product, then click EPSON Printer Software Uninstall.
Note: If you see a User Account Control window, click Yes or Continue.
In the next window, select your product and click OK. Then follow any on-screen instructions.
5. Do one of the following to uninstall Epson Scan 2, then follow any on-screen instructions:
• Windows 11/Windows 10: Select Epson Scan 2 and click Uninstall.
• Windows 8.x/Windows 7/Windows Vista: Select Epson Scan 2 and click Uninstall/Change.
• Windows 8.x/Windows 7: Select Epson Scan 2 and click Uninstall/Change.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
Uninstalling Product Software - Mac
In most cases, you do not need to uninstall your product software before re-installing it. However, you
can download the Uninstaller utility from the Epson support website to uninstall your product software as
described here.
Note: If you find that re-installing your product software does not solve a problem, contact Epson.
1. To download the Uninstaller utility, visit and select your product.
2. Click Downloads.
3. Select your operating system, click Utilities, locate the Uninstaller utility, and click Download.
4. Run the file you downloaded.
5. Double-click the Uninstaller icon.
372
6. In the Epson Uninstaller screen, select the checkbox for each software program you want to
uninstall.
7. Click Uninstall.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
9. Reinstall your product software.
Note: If you uninstall the printer driver and your product name remains in the Print & Fax, Print & Scan,
or Printers & Scanners window, select your product name and click the – (remove) icon to remove it.
Parent topic: Uninstall Your Product Software
Where to Get Help (U.S. and Canada)
If you need to contact Epson for technical support services, use the following support options.
Internet Support
Visit Epson's support website at epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or
latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your product for solutions to common problems. You
can download drivers and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with
your questions.
Speak to a Support Representative
Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready:
• Product name
• Product serial number (located on a label on the product)
• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
• Computer configuration
• Description of the problem
Then call: (866) 212-8743, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday.
Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long distance charges may
apply.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories
You can purchase genuine Epson ink and paper at epson.com (U.S. sales), epson.ca (Canadian sales),
or latin.epson.com (Latin American sales). You can also purchase supplies from an Epson authorized
373
reseller. To find the nearest one, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in
Canada.
To purchase replacement staple cartridges, contact your dealer.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
Where to Get Help (Latin America)
If you need additional help with your Epson product, contact Epson.
Epson provides these technical support services:
Internet Support
Visit Epson's support website at latin.epson.com/support for solutions to common problems. You can
download drivers and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your
questions.
Speak to a Support Representative
Before you call Epson for support, please have the following information ready:
• Product name
• Product serial number (located on a label on the product)
• Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
• Computer configuration
• Description of the problem
Then call:
Country Telephone
Argentina 0800-288-37766
Bolivia* 800-100-116
Brazil 0800-007-5000
Chile (56 2) 2484-3400
Colombia Bogota: 601 602-4751
Other cities: 01-8000-915235
Costa Rica 800-377-6627
374
Country Telephone
Dominican Republic* 1-888-760-0068
Ecuador* 1-800-000-044
El Salvador* 800-6570
Guatemala* 1-800-835-0358
Mexico Mexico City: (52 55) 1323-2052
Other cities: 800-087-1080
Nicaragua* 00-1-800-226-0368
Panama* 00-800-052-1376
Paraguay 009-800-521-0019
Peru Lima: (51 1) 418-0210
Other cities: 0800-10126
Uruguay 00040-5210067
* Contact your local phone company to call this toll-free number from a mobile phone.
If your country does not appear in the list, contact the sales office in the nearest country. Toll or long
distance charges may apply.
Purchase Supplies and Accessories
To purchase replacement staple cartridges, contact your dealer.
Parent topic: Solving Problems
375
Administering Your Product
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's administrator settings using the Web
Config software.
Note: Before you can configure system administration settings, you must connect the product to a
network.
Accessing the Web Config Utility
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config
Configuring Product Settings
Configuring Security Settings
Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft)
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software
Accessing the Web Config Utility
You can select your product's network settings and confirm its operating status using a web browser.
You do this by accessing your product's built-in Web Config utility from a computer or other device that is
connected to the same network as your product.
1. Print a network status sheet.
2. Locate the IP address for your product that is listed on the network status sheet.
3. On a computer or other device connected to the same network as your product, open a web
browser.
4. Enter your product's IP address into the address bar.
5. On the first visit to the Web Config utility, you will be prompted to set an administrator password. The
administrator password is required to access the full capabilities of the Web Config utility.
You see the available Web Config utility options.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Changing the Administrator Password in Web Config
You can set an administrator password using your product's control panel, Web Config, or EpsonNet
Config. You use the same administrator password in all cases.
376
Note: If you forget your administrator password, contact Epson for support.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Product Security tab.
2. Select Change Administrator Password.
3. Enter a user name, if necessary.
4. Do one of the following:
• If you have set an administrator password before, enter the current password, then enter and
confirm the new password in the fields provided.
• If you have not set an administrator password before, enter a new password and confirm it in the
fields provided.
5. Click OK.
Note: To restore the administrator password to the default value, select Restore Default Settings on
the Change Administrator Password screen.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Configuring Product Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure your product's control panel settings using the Web
Config software.
Checking Status Information
Managing the Network Connection
Setting Control Panel Options
Locking Individual Settings
Using an Email Server
Using an LDAP Server
Adjusting Power Saving Settings
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
Erasing Hard Drive Data
Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Updating Firmware Using Web Config
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server
Clearing the Internal Memory
377
Adjusting the Contact List View Options
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely
Operating the Control Panel Remotely
Restoring Default Product Settings
Adjusting the Control Panel Layout
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Checking Status Information
You can check information about the printer using the Web Config interface.
Note: Depending on the features of your product, not all of the options below may be available. Some
options are not available unless you are logged in to the Web Config interface.
1. Enter the IP address of the printer to access Web Config and log in as an administrator, if necessary.
2. Select the Status tab and choose one of the following options:
• Select Product Status to view information such as ink level and maintenance box status.
• Select Network Status to view network information such as the IP address and network
connection status.
• Select Usage Status to view information about the number of prints and historical information
about the product.
• Select Hardware Status to view information about the product functions.
• Select Job History to view information about the jobs completed on the product.
• Select Panel Snapshot to view a image of the current LCD screen.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Managing the Network Connection
You can check or update the network information for your product using the Web Config interface.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log in as an administrator.
2. Select the Network tab, then select Basic.
3. Check or update the settings as necessary.
4. Select Next to see a summary of the network settings.
378
5. Select OK to accept the changes.
Note: The network connection will be temporarily interrupted to enable the new settings.
6. Select the other network options as necessary:
• Wi-Fi: Displays the current wireless network connection information. Select Setup to run the
wireless setup again or Disable Wi-Fi to turn off Wi-Fi.
• Wired LAN: Displays the current settings for the wired connection. Change the settings as
necessary and then select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to
apply the changes.
• Wi-Fi Direct: Displays the current settings for the Wi-Fi Direct network. Adjust the settings as
necessary and select Next to view the changes. Confirm the information and select OK to apply
the changes.
Network Settings
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Network Settings
The following network settings are available under the Network tab in the Web Config interface.
Basic
Setting Description
Device Name Displays the Device Name. You can enter a new name to
change the name of the device.
Location Displays a user-entered location for the printer
Obtain IP Address Sets the IP Address; if set to Manual, enter the information in
the appropriate fields
Set using BOOTP Enables IP addressing using BOOTP
Set using Automatic Private IP
Addressing (APIPA)
Enables IP addressing using APIPA
IP Address Displays the IP address. If you are manually entering the IP
address, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a
number between 0 and 255). Make sure the address is
unique and does not conflict with any other device on your
network.
379
Setting Description
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask. If you are manually entering the
subnet mask, enter it in the format xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where
xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Default Gateway Displays the default gateway address. If you are manually
setting the default gateway, enter it in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
DNS Server Setting Selects the DNS server setting. If the Obtain IP Address
setting is set to Manual, this setting is also set to Manual.
Primary DNS Server Enter the address of the primary DNS server in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
Secondary DNS Server Enter the address of the secondary DNS server in the format
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (where xxx is a number between 0 and 255).
DNS Host Name Setting Sets the DNS Host Name selection method.
DNS Host Name Displays the current DNS Host Name.
DNS Domain Name Setting Sets the DNS Domain Name selection method
DNS Domain Name Specifies the DNS domain name. The name must conform to
the following format:
• Enter between 2 and 249 characters using only the
characters "A-Z", "a-z", "0-9", hyphen "-", and a period "."
• The first character cannot be a "0-9", hyphen "-", or a
period "."
• The last character cannot be a hyphen "-" or a period "."
• Each label in the domain name must be between 1 and 63
characters and separated by a period.
• The total number of characters in the host and domain
name must not exceed 251.
Register the network interface
address to DNS
Allows you to register the host and domain names through a
DHCP server that supports Dynamic DNS
Proxy Server Setting Enables the use of a proxy server
Proxy Server Specifies the name of the proxy server in either IPv4 or
FQDN format
380
Setting Description
Proxy Server Port Number Specifies the port number for the proxy server (between 1
and 65535)
Proxy Server User Name Specifies the user name for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII
characters [0x20-0x7E])
Proxy Server Password Specifies the password for the proxy server (0-255 ASCII
characters [0x20-0x7E])
IPv6 Setting Enables the use of IPv6 addressing
IPv6 Privacy Extension Enables the use of private IPv6 addresses
IPv6 DHCP Server Setting Enables the use of a IPv6 DHCP server
IPv6 Address Specifies the IPv6 address. The address must conform to the
following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx / prefix
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits, and the
prefix is a decimal number from 1 to 128.
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
IPv6 Address Default Gateway Specifies the IPv6 address of the default gateway. The
address must conform to the following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
IPv6 Link-Local Address Displays the valid IPv6 Link-Local Address
IPv6 Stateful Address Displays the valid IPv6 Stateful Address
IPv6 Stateless Address 1 Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 1
IPv6 Stateless Address 2 Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 2
IPv6 Stateless Address 3 Displays the valid IPv6 Stateless Address 3
381
Setting Description
IPv6 Primary DNS Server Specifies the address for the IPv6 primary DNS server. The
address must conform to the following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted)
IPv6 Secondary DNS Server Specifies the address for the IPv6 secondary DNS server.
The address must conform to the following format:
• xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx: xxxx
• xxxx is a hexadecimal number from 1 to 4 digits
• If there are consecutive blocks where xxxx is all zeros, it
can be omitted as ::. (Only one block can be omitted.)
IEEE802.11k/v Enables the use of IEEE802.11k/v network environments
IEEE802.11r Enables the use of IEEE802.11r network environments
Wired LAN
Setting Description
Link Speed and Duplex Selects the communication mode for the wired connection
IEEE 802.3az Enables the use of IEEE 802.3az network environments
Wi-Fi Direct
Setting Description
Wi-Fi Direct Enables the product's Wi-Fi Direct network
SSID You can change part of the SSID for the product.
Password Specifies the password for the Wi-Fi Direct network.
Note: Changing the password will disconnect any devices
currently connected to the network.
382
Setting Description
Frequency Range Selects the frequency range used by the Wi-Fi Direct
network.
IP Address Specifies the IP address for the Wi-Fi Direct network. If set to
Manual, enter the IP address in the provided fields.
Parent topic: Managing the Network Connection
Setting Control Panel Options
You can configure the behavior of the product control panel using the Web Config interface or the menus
on the control panel.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator.
2. Select Device Management > Control Panel and set the following items as necessary:
• Language: Sets the display language
• Panel Lock: Requires an administrator login to access some menu settings on the control panel.
The administrator password must be set to enable this feature.
• Operation Timeout: Cancels operations and automatically logs out users after a selected time
period. You can select a time period between 10 seconds and 240 minutes.
• Theme Color: Sets the color scheme for the control panel. Select a theme from the list.
• Display during printing: Select an item to display on the LCD screen during printing. If you select
Custom(Message), enter a message of up to 400 characters to display while printing. If you select
Custom(Image), register or delete the images you want to display during printing.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Locking Individual Settings
If you use the Panel Lock or Lock Setting features to restrict access to certain settings, you can allow
individual settings to be changed without administrative access.
1. On the product control panel, select Settings > General Settings > System Administration >
Security Settings > Restrictions.
2. For each setting, allow access without logging in as an administrator by selecting On.
• Job Log Access: Allows users to view the status monitor's job history.
• Access to Register/Delete Contacts: Allows users to register, edit, or delete contacts.
383
• Fax Recent Access: Allows users to view recent fax destinations when sending a fax.
• Fax Transmission Log Access: Allows users to view the communication history of a fax.
• Access to Fax Report: Allows users to print the fax report.
• Access to Print Save History of Scan to Network Folder/FTP: Allows users to print a report of
previous scans saved to a network folder.
• Access to Recent of Scan to Email: Allows users to display a list of recent scan to email activity.
• Access to Show Sent History of Scan to Email: Allows users to print a list of scan to email
activity.
• Access to Print Save History of Scan to Email Folder/FTP: Allows users to print a report of
previous scan to email activity.
• Access to Language: Allows users to change the display language.
• Access to Thick Paper: Allows users to change the thick paper settings.
• Access to Quiet Mode: Allows users to enable or disable Quiet Mode.
• Access to Print Speed Priority: Allows users to change the print speed priority settings.
• Protection of Personal Data: Hides the destination folder path when saving data to a location.
• Access to Copy Output Tray: Allows users to change the location where copies are output. This
setting is only available when the staple finisher is installed.
• Accept Power Off: Allows users to turn the printer off using the power button.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Using an Email Server
Follow the instructions in these sections to use an email server to send scan and fax data by email, or
use email notification using Web Config.
Configuring an Email Server
Email Server Settings
Checking the Email Server Connection
Sending Email Notifications
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Configuring an Email Server
You can configure an email server using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab.
384
2. Select Email Server > Basic.
3. Select the email server settings.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Using an Email Server
Email Server Settings
You can configure these email server settings in Web Config.
Setting Options/Description
Authentication Method Select the authentication method that matches your email
server
Authenticated Account Enter the authenticated account name from 1 to 255
characters long in ASCII
Authenticated Password Enter the authenticated password from 1 to 20 characters long
in ASCII using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and these characters:
! # $ % ' * + - . / = ? ^ _ { ! } ~ @
Sender's Email Address Enter the sender's email address from 1 to 255 characters
long in ASCII; do not use a period (.) as the first character or
use these characters: ( ) < > [ ] ;
SMTP Server Address Enter the SMTP server address from 1 to 255 characters long
using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and "-" in IPv4 or FQDN format
SMTP Server Port Number Enter the SMTP server port number between 1 and 65535
Secure Connection Select the security method for the email server; available
choices depend on the Authentication Method setting
Certificate Validation Enable checking for a valid certificate; recommended value is
Enable
POP3 Server Address Enter the POP server address from 1 to 255 characters long
using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and "-" in IPv4 or FQDN format
POP3 Server Port Number Enter the POP server port number between 1 and 65535
Parent topic: Using an Email Server
Checking the Email Server Connection
You can test the email server connection and view a connection report using Web Config.
385
1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab.
2. Select Email Server > Connection Test.
3. Click Start.
Web Config tests the connection and displays the connection report when it is finished.
Parent topic: Using an Email Server
Sending Email Notifications
You can set up email notifications that will be sent when an event occurs on the product. You can
register up to five destinations.
Note: You must have configured a mail server before setting up notifications.
1. Enter the IP address of the product in a web browser and log into Web Config as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Email Notification.
3. Set the contents of the email subject line by selecting items from the drop-down menus.
Note: You cannot select the same item in both menus. If the Location setting is longer than 32 bytes,
it will be truncated in the Subject line.
4. Enter up to five email addresses to receive the notification emails, and select the language of the
notification email.
5. In the Notification Settings area, select one or more email addresses to receive a notification for
each event.
6. Click OK to apply the settings.
Note: To clear the email notification settings, select Restore Default Settings. This clears all email
notification settings, not just the changes made in the current session.
Parent topic: Using an Email Server
Using an LDAP Server
Follow the instructions in these sections to use an LDAP server to provide fax and email destination
information using Web Config.
Configuring the LDAP Server and Selecting Search Settings
LDAP Server Settings
386
LDAP Search Settings
LDAP Connection Report Messages
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Configuring the LDAP Server and Selecting Search Settings
You can configure the LDAP server and select search settings for it using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network tab.
2. Select LDAP Server and select Basic.
3. Select the LDAP server settings.
4. Click OK.
5. Select Search Settings.
6. Select the LDAP search settings you want to use.
7. Click OK.
Note: To check the connection to the LDAP server, select LDAP Server > Connection Check and
select Start.
Parent topic: Using an LDAP Server
LDAP Server Settings
You can configure these LDAP server settings in Web Config.
Setting Options/Description
LDAP Server Address Enter the address of the LDAP server as necessary,
depending on the format of the server:
• IPv4 or IPv6 format: Enter from 1 to 255 characters
• FQDN format: Enter from 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters
in ASCII; you can use "-", except at the beginning or end of
the address
LDAP server Port Number Enter an LDAP server port number between 1 and 65535
Secure Connection Select the encryption method for connecting to the LDAP
server
387
Setting Options/Description
Certificate Validation Select Enable to validate the certificate when connecting to
the LDAP server
Search Timeout (sec) Enter a search time interval before timeout from between 5
and 300 seconds
Authentication Method Select one of the available authentication methods listed
Kerberos Realm to be Used If you selected Kerberos Authentication as the
Authentication Method option, select the correct realm of
Kerberos authentication from the realms defined under the
Kerberos Settings menu entry.
Administrator DN/User Name Leave this blank or enter a user name for the LDAP server
from 0 to 128 characters long in Unicode (UTF-8); do not use
control characters such as 0x00-0x1F or 0X7F (not available
when you selected Anonymous Authentication as the
Authentication Method option)
Password Leave this blank or enter a password from 1 to 128 characters
long in Unicode (UTF-8) for LDAP server authentication; do
not use control characters such as 0x00-0x1F or OX7F (not
available when you selected Anonymous Authentication as
the Authentication Method option)
Kerberos Settings
Realm (Domain) If you selected Kerberos Authentication as the
Authentication Method option, enter the realm of Kerberos
authentication from 0 to 255 characters long in ASCII; you can
define up to 10 realms with associated addresses and port
numbers
KDC Address Leave this blank or, if you selected Kerberos Authentication
as the Authentication Method option, enter the Kerberos
server address from 0 to 255 characters long in IPv4, IPv6, or
FQDN format
Port Number (Kerberos) Leave this blank or, if you selected Kerberos Authentication
as the Authentication Method option, enter the Kerberos
server port number between 1 and 65535
Parent topic: Using an LDAP Server
388
LDAP Search Settings
You can configure these LDAP search settings in Web Config.
Setting Options/Description
Search Base (Distinguished Name) Leave blank or search for an arbitrary domain name on the
LDAP server using 1 to 128 characters Unicode (UTF-8)
Number of search entries Specify the maximum number of search entries before an
error message appears, from 1 to 500
User name Attribute Enter the attribute name to display when searching for users
names from 1 to 255 characters long in Unicode (UTF-8); the
first character must be a-z, or A-Z
User name Display Attribute Leave blank or enter the attribute name to display as the user
name from 1 to 255 characters long in Unicode (UTF-8); the
first character must be a-z, or A-Z
Fax Number Attribute Enter the attribute name to display when searching for fax
numbers from 1 to 255 characters long using A-Z, a-z, 0-9,
and "-" in Unicode (UTF-8); the first character must be a-z, or
A-Z
Email Address Attribute Leave blank or enter the attribute name to display when
searching for email addresses from 1 to 255 characters long in
Unicode (UTF-8); the first character must be a-z, or A-Z
Arbitrary Attribute 1 through
Arbitrary Attribute 4
Leave blank or specify other arbitrary attributes to search for
from 1 to 255 characters long in Unicode (UTF-8); the first
character must be a-z, or A-Z
Parent topic: Using an LDAP Server
LDAP Connection Report Messages
You can review the connection report messages to diagnose LDAP connection problems in Web Config.
Message Description
Connection test was successful. Connection to the server is successful
389
Message Description
Connection test failed. Check the
settings.
One of the following occurred:
• The LDAP server address or port number is incorrect
• A timeout occurred
• You selected Do Not Use as the Use LDAP Server setting
• If you selected Kerberos Authentication as the
Authentication Method setting, the Kerberos server
settings are incorrect
Connection test failed. Check the
date and time on your product or
server.
Connection failed because the time settings for the product
and the LDAP server do not match
Authentication failed. Check the
settings.
Authentication failed because the User Name and Password
settings are incorrect or, if you selected Kerberos
Authentication as the Authentication Method setting, the
time and date are not configured correctly
Cannot access the printer until
processing is complete.
The product is busy
Parent topic: Using an LDAP Server
Adjusting Power Saving Settings
The product can automatically enter sleep mode or turn off after it has not been used for a while. You
can set the delay before the product enters sleep mode or turns off.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power Saving setting.
3. Set Sleep Timer to the number of minutes before the product enters a low-power mode.
4. Select Power Off Timer to set the amount to time of inactivity before the product turns off.
Note: If you are using a printer with the fax feature enabled, select None.
Note: You can also configure the power saving settings using the control panel by selecting Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings and selecting the feature you want to change.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
390
Adjusting Control Panel Sounds
You can adjust the sound level heard when you press buttons on the control panel.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Sound setting.
3. Select volume and sound settings as necessary for Normal Mode and Quiet Mode. You can also
create different sound settings for fax operations.
Note: You can also configure the sound settings using the control panel by selecting Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Erasing Hard Drive Data
You can create settings to erase the contents of the internal hard drive (HDD). The product uses the
hard drive to store printing, copying, and scanning data including authenticated print jobs. You can
enable sequential deletion, which erases data when it is no longer needed after scanning or printing is
completed; or you can format the hard drive to erase all data.
Note: When formatting the hard drive, you can choose from the following options:
• High Speed: Erases all data with a dedicated erase command
• Overwrite: Erase all data and then overwrites all areas with data
• Triple Overwrite: Erases all data and then overwrites all areas with data three times
1. Determine the method you want to use to erase data from the hard drive.
2. Depending on your choice, do one of the following:
• To enable sequential deletion, log into Web Config as an administrator, then select Device
Management > Stored Data > Sequential Deletion from Hard Disk and set it to On.
• To format the hard drive, select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > HDD
Erase Settings > Erase All Memory. Select the method of formatting the drive.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
391
Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to import and export your product's settings using the Web
Config software.
Exporting Settings Using Web Config
Importing Settings Using Web Config
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Exporting Settings Using Web Config
You can export your product's settings and optionally encrypt the settings file with a password.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Export under Export and Import Setting Value.
3. Select the settings you want to export.
Note: If you select a parent category, the child categories are also selected. By default, items that
are unique on the network, such as IP address, cannot be selected. If you want to export these
items, select Enable to select the individual settings of device. It is recommended that you
export only unique items when replacing a product on the network, otherwise you may encounter
conflicts on the network.
4. Enter an encryption password, if desired.
5. Click Export and save the file.
Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Importing Settings Using Web Config
You can import settings to your product that you have exported previously. If encryption was used when
the settings were exported, obtain the necessary password before you import.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select Import under Export and Import Setting Value.
3. Click Browse and select the exported settings file.
4. If necessary, enter the decryption password.
5. Click Next.
6. Select the settings to import and click Next.
7. Click OK.
392
The selected settings are imported to the product.
Parent topic: Importing and Exporting Product Settings
Updating Firmware Using Web Config
If your product is connected to the Internet, you can update the product firmware using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config and select Device Management > Firmware Update.
2. Click Start to check for the latest firmware.
3. If there is a firmware update, click Start to begin the update.
Note: Make sure the product is not in use and clear any errors on the LCD screen before starting the
update. You can also schedule a firmware update by selecting Automatic Firmware Update from
the menu.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Synchronizing the Date and Time with a Time Server
You can synchronize the product with an NTP time server to set the date and time on the product.
Note: If you are using a CA certificate or Kerberos authentication, it is recommended to use a time
server to set the date and time.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Date and Time > Time Server setting.
3. Set Use Time Server to Use.
4. Enter the time server address in Time Server Address. You can use the IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN
format for the address. You are limited to 252 characters.
5. Enter an update interval (up to 10080 minutes) in Update Interval (min).
6. Click OK to update the settings.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Clearing the Internal Memory
You can delete the contents of the product's internal memory, such as password-protected print jobs and
downloaded PCL fonts and macros using the Web Config interface. You cannot select individual items to
delete.
393
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Clear Internal Memory Data setting.
3. Select Delete and confirm your selection.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Adjusting the Contact List View Options
You can adjust the way contacts are listed on the product's LCD screen. You can also configure the way
searches are performed when searching the contact list.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Contacts Manager setting.
3. Select either Tile View or List View to control how the contacts are displayed on the product's LCD
screen.
4. Select a search option from the Search Options drop-down list.
5. Select OK to apply your changes.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Powering Off or Rebooting the Product Remotely
You can power off or reboot the product using the Web Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Power setting.
3. Select a power option from the drop down menu and select Execute.
Note: After turning off the product, you cannot access Web Config until the product is turned on again.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Operating the Control Panel Remotely
You can operate the control panel remotely using the Web Config interface. To remotely control the
product, you must install the Epson Remote Service. See the online Remote Control Panel Operation
Guide for more details.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
394
Restoring Default Product Settings
You can reset the product to the default settings using the Web Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Restore Default Settings setting.
3. Select an option from the drop-down list. You can either restore network settings or all data and
settings.
4. Select Execute and confirm your selection to restore the product settings.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Adjusting the Control Panel Layout
You can edit the layout and icons displayed on the home screen.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Device Management tab, then select the Edit Home setting.
3. Select Layout and then select the icons and their position. The pagination of the home screen varies
depending on the selections.
Note: If you have registered any presets, you can select them to be displayed on the home screen.
Parent topic: Configuring Product Settings
Configuring Security Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure internal security features for your product using the
Web Config software.
Connecting an Authentication Device
Restricting Features Available for Users
Disabling the External Interface
Setting Up Password Encryption
Working with Audit Logs
Setting a Password Policy
Restricting Application Access
Restricting PDL File Operations
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up
395
Restricting Domain Access
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Connecting an Authentication Device
You can connect an authentication device such as an IC card reader using a USB cable, and check the
functionality of the reader using the Web Config interface.
1. Connect the card reader’s USB cable to the service port on the product.
2. Access Web Config and log in using the administrator name and password.
3. Select Device Management > Card Reader.
4. Set the card reader parameters as necessary.
5. Select Check to verify the connection status of the authentication device.
Note: To confirm that the authentication device can recognize an authentication card, hold the card
over the reader while you select Check.
6. Click Next.
7. Click OK to confirm the settings.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting Features Available for Users
Follow the instructions in these sections to restrict users from using certain product features and create
an administrator password to lock the restrictions using the Web Config software.
User Feature Restriction
Configuring User Feature Restrictions
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
User Feature Restriction
You can restrict available product features for individual users, with different features available to each
user. This requires users to log into the product control panel with their user name and password before
they can use control panel features.
With Windows, you can also restrict printing and scanning from the product software. This requires users
to log into the printing or scanning software, and allows the software to authenticate the users before
printing or scanning proceeds. For instructions on setting up software restrictions, see the help utility in
the printing or scanning software.
396
Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
Configuring User Feature Restrictions
You can create up to 10 user accounts and restrict access to control panel features separately for each
one.
Note: If you are using an authentication system, it uses the number one user account. If you create other
user accounts, use the number two to number 10 user accounts.
1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab.
2. Select the Enables Access Control checkbox.
3. If you have configured the product for an LDAP server, you can deselect the Allows printing and
scanning without authentication information from a computer checkbox to prevent the product
from receiving jobs sent from these sources:
• The default operating system driver
• A PCL or PostScript printer driver
• Web services such as Epson Connect
• Smartphones and other mobile devices
4. Click OK.
5. Select User Settings.
6. Click Add.
7. Enter a name for a user in the User Name field following the guidelines on the screen. Use ASCII
(0x20-0x7E) characters.
8. Enter a password for the user in the Password field following the guidelines on the screen.
Note: If you need to reset a password, leave the password field blank.
9. Select the checkbox for each function you want the user to be able to perform, and deselect the
checkbox for each function you want to restrict access to.
10. Click Apply.
Note: When you edit a completed user account, you see a Delete option. Click it to delete a user, if
necessary.
397
Note: You can import and export a list of user features using EpsonNet Config. See the help utility in the
software for instructions.
Parent topic: Restricting Features Available for Users
Disabling the External Interface
You can restrict the ability to connect from a computer using a USB connection or accessing a
connected USB device or memory card.
Note: Depending on your product features, not all of the options listed below may be available.
1. Access Web Config and select Product Security > External Interface.
2. Select Memory Device and do one of the following:
• Select Disable to prevent access to a USB device or memory card.
• Select Enable to allow access to a USB device or memory card.
3. Click OK to save your setting.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Setting Up Password Encryption
You can set up password encryption to protect confidential information stored in the product. You can
also back up the encryption key that is stored in your product's Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chip to a
USB flash drive.
Note: Make sure you have a USB flash drive with at least 1MB of storage space to back up the
encryption key.
Caution: If the TPM chip fails, you cannot replace it or access any confidential information stored on
your product. Printer functions are still available, but the password encryption feature cannot be used.
Contact Epson for support.
1. Press the home button, if necessary.
2. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings.
3. Select Password Encryption.
4. Select Password Encryption again.
398
5. Select On.
A message appears about restarting the product. Select OK.
6. Select Proceed to Backup.
You see the encryption key backup screen.
7. Insert your USB flash drive into the external USB port on the front of the product.
8. Select Start Backup.
The product begins backing up the encryption key to the USB flash drive. Any previously stored
encryption key is overwritten.
9. When the backup completion message appears, select Close.
10. Turn the product off and then on again to apply the password encryption setting.
Note: The product may take longer than usual to turn on. This is normal.
Restoring the Password Encryption Key
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restoring the Password Encryption Key
If the TPM chip fails, you can restore the encryption key from its backup stored on your USB flash drive.
1. If you see a message on the control panel that the TPM has been replaced when you turn on the
product, select Restore from Backup. Enter the administrator password, if necessary.
2. Insert your USB flash drive containing the stored encryption key into the external USB port on the
front of the product.
3. Select Restore from Backup.
The stored encryption key is restored to the TPM chip.
4. When the completion message appears, select OK.
The product restarts.
Parent topic: Setting Up Password Encryption
Working with Audit Logs
You can enable the Audit Log feature or export audit log data using the Web Config interface. Audit logs
can be used to track security issues or identify improper usage.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
399
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Audit Log setting.
3. Select ON to enable the audit log feature.
4. Select Export to export the audit log data to a CSV file, or select Delete to delete all audit logs.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Setting a Password Policy
You can increase the strength of user passwords by setting constraints on password length and content
through a password policy.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Password Policy setting.
3. Set the Password Policy setting to Enable, then set the following settings:
• Minimum Password Length: Sets the minimum number of characters for the password.
• Include Uppercase Alphabet: When enabled, the password must include one or more
uppercase characters.
• Include Lowercase Alphabet: When enabled, the password must include one or more lowercase
characters.
• Include Number: When enabled, the password must include one or more numbers.
• Include Punctuation Mark: The password must include one or more punctuation marks.
4. Select OK to save your settings.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting Application Access
You can restrict applications from accessing the printer using the Web Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Application setting.
3. If you do not want an application to access the printer, clear the checkbox next to the application
name. The list of applications depends on the printer model.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting PDL File Operations
You can protect files from unauthorized PDL operations using the Web Config interface.
400
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the File Operations from PDL setting.
3. Select Allowed or Not Allowed to enable or disable PDL file operations and select OK to apply your
setting.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Enabling Program Verification on Start Up
Your product automatically checks whether unauthorized third parties have tampered with the program
when the product starts up. If it detects that the product has been rewritten with invalid firmware, it will
stop and update the firmware.
If you enable Do not start if tampering is detected, the printer will display an error and stop booting. It
is not recommended to enable the Do not start if tampering is detected setting as the default setting.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select Program Verification on Start Up.
3. Enable the Do not start if tampering is detected setting.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
Restricting Domain Access
You can set up restrictions on the email domains that can be used for email notifications using the Web
Config interface.
1. Log in to the Web Config interface as an administrator.
2. Select the Product Security tab, then select the Domain Restrictions setting.
3. Select a restriction method for the Restriction Rule setting. Select Allow Sending to limit sending
emails to the listed domains or select Deny Sending to prevent emails from being sent to the listed
domains.
4. Add the necessary domains to the list by entering them in the Domain Name field and selecting
Add.
The domain is added to the list. To delete a domain, select the checkbox next to the domain name
and select Delete.
5. Select OK to apply your changes.
Parent topic: Configuring Security Settings
401
Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure security features for your product on the network
using the Web Config software.
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Configuring S/MIME Settings
Using a Digital Certificate
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
You can enable or disable protocols using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator, select Network Security, and select Protocol.
2. Select or deselect the checkbox next to the service name to enable or disable a protocol.
3. Configure any other available protocol settings.
4. Click Next.
5. Click OK.
6. Select and configure services and protocol settings as necessary.
After the protocols restart, the changes are applied.
Protocol Settings
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Protocol Settings
Protocols
Name Description
Bonjour Bonjour is used to search for devices and AirPrint
SLP SLP is used for push-scanning and network searching in
EpsonNet Config
WSD Add WSD devices, or print and scan from the WSD port
402
Name Description
LLTD Displays the product on the Windows network map
LLMNR Use name resolution without NetBIOS even if you cannot use
DNS
LPR Print from to the LPR port
RAW(Port9100) Print from the RAW port (Port 9100)
RAW(Custom Port) Print from the RAW port (custom port)
IPP Print over the Internet, including AirPrint
FTP Print over FTP
SNMPv1/v2c Remotely set up and monitor your product
SNMPv3 Remotely set up and monitor your product with the SNMPv3
protocol
Bonjour Settings
Setting Options/Description
Use Bonjour Search for or use devices through Bonjour (you cannot use
AirPrint if disabled)
Bonjour Name Displays the Bonjour name
Bonjour Service Name Displays the Bonjour service name
Location Displays the Bonjour location name
Top Priority Protocol Selects the protocol that is the top priority for Bonjour printing
Wide-Area Bonjour Enables the Wide-Area Bonjour protocol; register all products
on the DNS server to locate them over the segment
SLP Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable SLP Enable the SLP function to use the Push Scan function and
network searching in EpsonNet Config
403
WSD Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable WSD Enable adding devices using WSD, and printing and scanning
from the WSD port
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD printing
between 3 and 3,600 seconds
Scanning Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD scanning
between 3 and 3,600 seconds
Device Name Displays the WSD device name
Location Displays the WSD location name
LLTD Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable LLTD Enable LLTD to display the product in the Windows network
map
Device Name Displays the LLTD device name
LLMNR Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable LLMNR Enable LLMNR to use name resolution without NetBIOS, even
if you cannot use DNS
LPR Settings
Setting Options/Description
Allow LPR Port Printing Allow printing from the LPR port
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for LPR printing between 0 and 3,600
seconds
404
RAW (Port9100) Settings
Setting Options/Description
Allow RAW (Port9100) Printing Allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100)
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW port (Port 9100) printing
between 0 and 3,600 seconds
RAW (Custom Port) Settings
Setting Options/Description
Allow RAW (Custom Port) Printing Allow printing from the RAW port (custom port)
Port Number Enter the port number for RAW printing between 1024 and
65535 (except 9100, 1865, and 2968)
Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW port (custom port) printing
between 0 and 3,600 seconds
IPP Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable IPP Enable IPP communication for products that support IPP are
displayed (you cannot use AirPrint if disabled)
Allow Non-secure Communication Allow the printer to communicate without any security
measures (IPP)
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for IPP printing between 0 and 3,600
seconds
Require PIN Code when using IPP
printing
Select whether or not to require a PIN code when using IPP
printing. If you select Yes, IPP print jobs without PIN codes
are not saved in the product.
URL(Network) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is
connected using wired LAN or Wi-Fi (the URL is a combined
value of the product’s IP address, Port number, and IPP
printer name)
405
Setting Options/Description
URL(Wi-Fi Direct) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the product is
connected using Wi-Fi Direct (the URL is a combined value of
the product’s IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name)
Printer Name Displays the IPP printer name
Location Displays the IPP location
FTP Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable FTP Server Enable FTP printing for products that support FTP printing
Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for FTP communication between 0
and 3,600 seconds
SNMPv1/v2c Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable SNMPv1/v2c Enable SNMPv1/v2c for products that support SNMPv3
Access Authority Set the access authority when SNMPv1/v2c is enabled to
Read Only or Read/Write
Community Name (Read Only) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters
Community Name (Read/Write) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII characters
Allow access from Epson tools Allow information to be written from Epson tools such as
Epson Device Admin
SNMPv3 Settings
Setting Options/Description
Enable SNMPv3 Enable SNMPv3 for products that support SNMPv3
User Name Enter 1 to 32 characters
Authentication Settings Select an algorithm and set a password for authentication
Encryption Settings Select an algorithm and set a password for encryption
406
Setting Options/Description
Context Name Enter 1 to 32 characters in Unicode (UTF-8)
Parent topic: Configuring Protocols and Services in Web Config
Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure SSL/TLS communication using Web Config.
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Configuring SSL/TLS Settings
If your product supports HTTPS, you can configure SSL/TLS to encrypt communications with your
product.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab.
2. Select SSL/TLS > Basic.
3. Select one of the options for the Encryption Strength setting.
4. Select Enable or Disable for the Redirect HTTP to HTTPS setting as necessary.
5. If necessary, enable a TLS version.
6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
7. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring a Server Certificate for the Product
You can configure a server certificate for your product.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under SSL/TLS, select Certificate.
3. Select one of the following options:
• CA-signed Certificate: Select Import if you have obtained a CA-signed certificate. Choose the
file to import and click OK.
407
• Self-signed Certificate: Select Update if you have not obtained a CA (Certificate Authority)-
signed certificate and want the product to generate a self-signed certificate.
4. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring SSL/TLS Communication
Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
About IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy
Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
About IPsec/IP Filtering
You can filter traffic to the product over the network based on IP address, service, and port by
configuring a default policy that applies to every user or group connecting to the product. For control of
individual users or user groups, you can configure group policies.
Note: IPsec is supported only by computers running Windows Vista or later, or Windows Server 2008 or
later.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring the Default IPsec/IP Filtering Policy
You can configure the default policy for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic.
3. Select Enable to enable IPsec/IP filtering.
4. Select the filtering options you want to use for the default policy.
5. Click Next.
408
You see a confirmation message.
6. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring the Group IPsec/IP Filtering Policies
You can configure group policies for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Basic.
3. Click a tab number for the policy number you want to configure.
4. Select the Enable this Group Policy checkbox.
5. Select the filtering options you want to use for this group policy.
6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
7. Click OK.
8. If you want to configure additional group policies, click the next tab number and repeat the
configuration steps as necessary.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
IPsec/IP Filtering Policy Settings
Default Policy Settings
Setting Options/Description
Access Control Permit Access to permit IP packets to pass through
Refuse Access to prevent IP packets from passing
through
IPsec to permit IPsec packets to pass through
IKE Version Select the version of the Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
protocol that matches your network environment
Authentication Method Select an authentication method, or select Certificate if
you have imported a CA-signed certificate
Pre-Shared Key If necessary, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and 127
characters long
409
Setting Options/Description
ID Type If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, select
the ID type from the list.
ID If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, enter
the necessary ID information
Encapsulation If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the
same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internet-
capable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and
data of IP packets are encrypted
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode) If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation
option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39
characters long
Security Protocol If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data,
and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if
data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
Algorithm Settings Select the encryption algorithm settings for the security
protocol you selected
Group Policy Settings
Setting Options/Description
Access Control Permit Access to permit IP packets to pass through
Refuse Access to prevent IP packets from passing
through
IPsec to permit IPsec packets to pass through
410
Setting Options/Description
Local Address(Printer) Select an IPv4 or IPv6 address that matches your network
environment; if the IP address is assigned automatically,
select Use auto-obtained IPv4 address
Remote Address(Host) Enter the device's IP address (between 0 and 43
characters long) to control access, or leave blank to
control all addresses; if the IP address is assigned
automatically, such as by DHCP, the connection may be
unavailable, so configure a static address instead
Method of Choosing Port Select the method you want to used for specifying ports
Service Name If you selected Service Name as the Method of
Choosing Port option, select a service name option here;
see the next table for more information
Transport Protocol If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, select one of these encapsulation modes:
Any Protocol
TCP
UDP
ICMPv4
See the Group Policy Guidelines table for more
information.
Local Port If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol
option, enter the port numbers that control receiving
packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for
example 20,80,119,5220; leave this setting blank to
control all ports; see the next table for more information
Remote Port If you selected Port Number as the Method of Choosing
Port option, and TCP or UDP for the Transport Protocol
option, enter the port numbers that control sending
packets (up to 10 ports), separated by commas, for
example 25,80,143,5220; leave this setting blank to
control all ports; see the next table for more information
411
Setting Options/Description
IKE Version Select IKEv1 or IKEv2 depending on the device that the
product is connected to
Authentication Method If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select an authentication method here
Pre-Shared Key If you selected Pre-Shared Key as the Authentication
Method option, enter a pre-shared key between 1 and
127 characters long here and in the Confirm Pre-Shared
Key field
ID Type If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, select
the ID type from the list
ID If you selected IKEv2 as the IKE Version setting, enter
the necessary ID information
Encapsulation If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these encapsulation modes:
Transport Mode: if you are using the product on the
same LAN; IP packets of layer 4 or later are encrypted
Tunnel Mode: if you are using the product on an Internet-
capable network, such as IPsec-VPN; the header and
data of IP packets are encrypted
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode) If you selected Tunnel Mode as the Encapsulation
option, enter a gateway address between 1 and 39
characters long
Security Protocol If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option,
select one of these security protocols:
ESP: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data,
and encrypt data
AH: to ensure the integrity of authentication and data; if
data encryption is prohibited, you can use IPsec
Algorithm Settings Select the encryption algorithm settings for the security
protocol you selected
Combinations of Local Address (Printer) and Remote Address (Host) on Group Policy
412
Setting of Remote
Address (Host)
Settng of Local Address (Printer)
IPv4 IPv6
*2
Any addresses
*3
IPv6
*1 *2
— Yes Yes
Blank Yes Yes Yes
*1
: If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, you cannot specify a prefix length
*2
: If you selected IPsec as the Access Control option, you can select a link-local address (fe80::), but
the group policy will be disabled.
*3
: You cannot use IPv6 link-local addresses.
Group Policy Guidelines
Service name Protocol type Local/Remote port
number
Controls these operations
ENPC UDP 3289/Any port Searching for a product from
applications such as printer or
scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config
SNMP UDP 161/Any port Acquiring and configuring MIB from
applications such as printer or
scanner drivers, or EpsonNet Config
LPR TCP 515/Any port Forwarding LPR data
RAW (Port9100) TCP 9100/any port Forwarding RAW data
IPP/IPPS TCP 631/Any port Forwarding AirPrint data (IPP/IPPS
printing)
WSD TCP Any port/5357 Controlling WSD
WS-Discovery UDP 3702/Any port Searching for a product from WSD
Network Scan TCP 1865/Any port Forwarding scan data from
Document Capture Pro
Network Push Scan TCP Any port/2968 Acquiring job information on push
scanning from Document Capture
Pro
413
Service name Protocol type Local/Remote port
number
Controls these operations
Network Push Scan
Discovery
UDP 2968/Any port Searching for a computer during
push scanning from Document
Capture Pro
FTP Data (Local) TCP 20/Any port Forwarding FTP printing data to FTP
server
FTP Control (Local) TCP 21/Any port Controlling FTP printing to FTP
server
FTP Data (Remote) TCP Any port/20 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to FTP client; controls only
an FTP server that uses remote port
20
FTP Control
(Remote)
TCP Any port/21 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to FTP client
CIFS (Local)* TCP 445/Any port Sharing a network folder on CIFS
server
CIFS (Remote)* TCP Any port/445 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to a folder on CIFS server
NetBIOS Name
Service (Local)
UDP 137/Any port Sharing a network folder on CIFS
server
NetBIOS Datagram
Service (Local)
UDP 138/Any port
NetBIOS Session
Service (Local)
TCP 139/Any port
NetBIOS Name
Service (Remote)
UDP Any port/137 Forwarding scan data and received
fax data to a folder on CIFS server
NetBIOS Datagram
Service (Remote)
UDP Any port/138
NetBIOS Session
Service (Remote)
TCP Any port/139
HTTP (Local) TCP 80/Any port Forwarding Web Config and WSD
data to a HTTP or HTTPS server
HTTPS (Local) TCP 443/Any port
414
Service name Protocol type Local/Remote port
number
Controls these operations
HTTP (Remote) TCP Any port/80 Communicating with Epson Connect,
firmware update, and root certificate
update on a HTTP or HTTPS client
HTTPS (Remote) TCP Any port/443
* To control forwarding of scan and received fax data, share a network folder, or receive fax data from
PC-Fax, select Port Number as the Method of Choosing Port option and specify the port numbers for
CIFS and NetBIOS.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
IPsec/IP Filtering Configuration Examples
You can configure IPsec and IP filtering in a variety of ways, as shown in the examples here.
Receiving IPsec Packets Only
Use this example only for configuring a default policy.
• IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
• Access Control: IPsec
• Authentication Method: Pre-Shared Key
• Pre-Shared Key: Enter a key up to 127 characters long
Receiving Printing Data and Printer Settings
Use this example to allow communication of printing data and printer settings from specified services.
Default policy:
• IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
• Access Control: Refuse Access
Group policy:
• Access Control: Permit Access
• Remote Address(Host): Client IP address
• Method of Choosing Port: Service Name
• Service Name: Select ENPC, SNMP, HTTP (Local), HTTPS (Local), and RAW (Port9100)
415
Receiving Access from Only a Specified Address for Product Access
In these examples, the client will be able to access and configure the product in any policy configuration.
Default policy:
• IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
• Access Control: Refuse Access
Group policy:
• Access Control: Permit Access
• Remote Address (Host): Administrator's client IP address
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Configuring an IPsec/IP Filtering Certificate
You can configure a certificate for IPsec/IP traffic filtering using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IPsec/IP Filtering, select Client Certificate.
3. Click Import to add a new client certificate and enter any necessary settings.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering
Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Follow the instructions in these sections to connect the product to an IEEE 802.1X network using Web
Config.
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Status
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Configuring an IEEE 802.1X Network
If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can use it on a network with authentication provided by a
RADIUS server with a hub as an authenticator using Web Config.
Note: TLS version 1.3 does not support this function.
416
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Basic.
3. Select Enable as the IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) setting.
4. To use the product on a Wi-Fi network, enable your product's Wi-Fi settings. (This requires the
optional Wi-Fi module to be installed.)
The status of the connection is shown as the IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) setting.
Note: You can share the network settings for Ethernet and Wi-Fi networking.
5. Select the IEEE 802.1X setting options you want to use.
6. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
7. Click OK.
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Settings
You can configure these IEEE 802.1X network settings in Web Config.
Setting Options/Description
IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) Enable or disable settings (IEEE802.1X > Basic)
IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) Displays the IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) connection status
Connection Method Displays the current network connection method
EAP Type Select one of these authentication methods for connections
between the product and a RADIUS server:
EAP-TLS or PEAP-TLS: You must obtain and import a CA-
signed certificate
PEAP/MSCHAPv2 or EAP-TTLS: You must configure a
password
User ID Enter an ID between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for
authentication on a RADIUS server
417
Setting Options/Description
Password Enter a password between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for
authentication of the product. If you are using Windows as a
RADIUS server, enter up to 127 ASCII characters.
Confirm Password Enter the authentication password again
Server ID Enter a server ID between 1 and 128 ASCII characters for
authentication on a specified RADIUS server; server ID is
verified in the subject/subjectAltName field of a server
certificate sent from the RADIUS server
Certificate Validation Select a valid certificate regardless of the authentication
method; import the certificate using the CA Certificate option
Anonymous Name If you selected EAP-TTLS, PEAP-TLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2
as the Authentication Method setting, you can configure an
anonymous name between 1 and 128 ASCII characters
instead of a user ID for phase 1 of a PEAP authentication
Encryption Strength Select one of the following encryption strengths:
High for AES256/3DES
Middle for AES256/3DES/AES128/RC4
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Configuring a Certificate for an IEEE 802.1X Network
If your product supports IEEE 802.1X, you can configure a certificate for the network using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under IEEE802.1X, select Client Certificate.
3. Click Import to add a new client certificate.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
IEEE 802.1X Network Status
You can check the status of the IEEE 802.1X network settings by printing a status sheet from your
product.
The network status sheet displays the information in this table for IEEE 802.1X networks.
418
Status ID Status description
Disable IEEE 802.1X is disabled
EAP Success IEEE 802.1X authentication is confirmed and the network connection is
available
Authenticating IEEE 802.1X authentication in progress
Config Error Authentication failed because the user ID was not set
Client Certificate Error Authentication failed because the client certificate is out of date
Timeout Error Authentication failed because there is no answer from the RADIUS server
and/or authenticator
User ID Error Authentication failed because the product's user ID and/or certificate
protocol is incorrect
Server ID Error Authentication failed because the server ID on the server certificate and
the server's ID do not match
Server Certificate Error Authentication failed because the server certificate is out of date or the
chain of the server certificate is incorrect
CA Certificate Error Authentication failed because the CA certificate is incorrect, not imported,
or out of date
EAP Failure Authentication failed because the client certificate is incorrect (EAP-TLS
or PEAP-TLS), or the user ID or password is incorrect
(PEAP/MSCHAPv2)
Parent topic: Connecting the Product to an IEEE 802.1X Network
Configuring S/MIME Settings
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure S/MIME settings using Web Config.
Configuring S/MIME Basic Settings
S/MIME Settings
Configuring a Certificate for S/MIME
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
Configuring S/MIME Basic Settings
You can configure the email encryption and digital signature attachment to emails as necessary.
419
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
2. Under S/MIME, select Basic.
3. Select a setting for each option.
4. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring S/MIME Settings
S/MIME Settings
Mail Encryption
You need to import an encryption certificate for each destination registered in the contacts list.
Unencrypted emails are sent to destinations that do not have an imported encryption certificate.
Setting Options/Description
Scan to Email Select settings for scanning to email
Encrypt: to configure email encryption
Do not encrypt: scan to an email destination without
encryption
Select at runtime: decide whether or not to encrypt the
email before you send it
Default at runtime: select the default action when Select
at runtime is selected
Box to Email Select settings for uploading files to email
Encrypt: configure email encryption
Do not encrypt: upload a file to an email destination
without encryption
Select at runtime: decide whether or not to encrypt the
email before you send it
Default at runtime: select the default action when Select
at runtime is selected
Fax to Email Configure email encryption when sending a fax to email
420
Setting Options/Description
Algorithm Select the algorithm for email encryption
Digital Signature
You need to configure the client certificate to include a digital signature.
Setting Options/Description
Scan to Email Select settings for scanning to email
Add signature: add a digital signature to emails
Do not add signature: scan to an email destination
without a digital signature
Select at runtime: decide whether or not to add a digital
signature to the email before you send it
Default at runtime: select the default action when Select
at runtime is selected
Box to Email Select settings for uploading files to email
Add signature: add a digital signature to emails
Do not add signature: upload a file to an email
destination without a digital signature
Select at runtime: decide whether or not to add a digital
signature to the email before you send it
Default at runtime: select the default action when Select
at runtime is selected
Fax to Email Configure the digital signature when sending a fax to
email
Algorithm Select the algorithm for the digital signature
Parent topic: Configuring S/MIME Settings
Configuring a Certificate for S/MIME
You can configure a client certificate to use the S/MIME signature feature.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network Security tab.
421
2. Under S/MIME, select Client Certificate.
3. Select one of the following options:
• CA-signed Certificate: Select Import if you have obtained a CA-signed certificate. Choose the
file to import and click OK.
• Self-signed Certificate: Select Update if you have not obtained a CA (Certificate Authority)-
signed certificate and want the product to generate a self-signed certificate.
You can use the self-signed certificate instead of a CA-signed certificate. You can use S/MIME
functions without the cost of obtaining a CA-signed certificate, for example in a network
environment that does not have an external connection (Internet connection), such as an
enterprise network. However, it is recommended to use a CA-signed certificate when using
external connections because a self-signed certificate is low-security.
4. Click Next.
You see a confirmation message.
5. Click OK.
Parent topic: Configuring S/MIME Settings
Using a Digital Certificate
Follow the instructions in these sections to configure and use digital certificates using Web Config.
About Digital Certification
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate
Updating a Self-signed Certificate
Importing a CA Certificate
Deleting a CA Certificate
Parent topic: Using Your Product on a Secure Network
About Digital Certification
You can configure the following digital certificates for your network using Web Config:
CA-signed Certificate
You can ensure secure communications using a CA-signed certificate for each security feature. The
certificates must be signed by and obtained from a CA (Certificate Authority).
422
Self-signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate is issued and signed by the product itself. You can use the certificate for only
SSL/TLS communication, however security is unreliable and you may see a security alert in the
browser during use.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Obtaining and Importing a CA-signed Certificate
You can obtain a CA-signed certificate by creating a CSR (Certificate Signing Request) using Web
Config and submitting it to a certificate authority. The CSR created in Web Config is in PEM/DER format.
You can import one CSR created from Web Config at a time.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security.
2. Select one of the available network security options and select a certificate option.
3. In the CSR section, select Generate.
4. Select the CSR setting options you want to use.
5. Click OK.
You see a completion message.
6. Select Network Security, select your network security option, and select Certificate again.
7. In the CSR section, click the Download option that matches the format specified by your certificate
authority to download the CSR.
Caution: Do not generate another CSR or you may not be able to import a CA-signed certificate.
8. Submit the CSR to the certificate authority following the format guidelines provided by that authority.
9. Save the issued CA-signed certificate to a computer connected to the product.
Before proceeding, make sure the time and date settings are correct on your product.
10. Select Network Security, select your network security option, and select Certificate or Client
Certificate as necessary.
11. In the CA Certificate section, click Import.
12. Select the format of the certificate as the Server Certificate setting.
13. Select the certificate import settings as necessary for the format and the source from which you
obtained it.
14. Click OK.
You see a confirmation message.
423
15. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Related references
CSR Setup Settings
CSR Import Settings
CSR Setup Settings
You can select these settings when setting up a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The available key length and abbreviations vary by certificate authority, so follow the rules of that
authority when entering information in the CSR.
Setting Options/Description
Key Length Select a key length for the CSR
Common Name Enter a name or static IP address from 1 to 128
characters long; for example, Reception printer
or https://10.152.12.225
Organization, Organizational Unit, Locality,
State/Province
Enter information in each field as necessary, from
0 to 64 characters long in ASCII; separate any
multiple names with commas
Country Enter a two-digit country code number as specified
by the ISO-3166 standard
Sender's Email Address Enter the sender's email address for the mail
server setting
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
CSR Import Settings
You can configure these settings when importing a CSR in Web Config.
Note: The import setting requirements vary by certificate format and how you obtained the certificate.
424
Certificate format Setting descriptions
PEM/DER format obtained from Web Config Private Key: Do not configure because the
product contains a private key
Password: Do not configure
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional
PEM/DER format obtained from a computer Private Key: Configure a private key
Password: Do not configure
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional
PKCS#12 format obtained from a computer Private Key: Do not configure
Password: Optional
CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Do not
configure
CA-signed Certificate Import Settings
Setting Description
Server Certificate or Client Certificate Select the certificate format.
For an SSL/TLS connection, the Server Certificate
is displayed.
For an IPsec/IP Filtering, IEEE802.1x, or S/MIME
connection, the Client Certificate is displayed.
Note: Depending on your product, not all
connection types may be available.
Private Key If you obtain a certificate of the PEM/DER format
by using a CSR created from a computer, specify a
private key file that matches the certificate.
Password If the file format is Certificate with Private Key
(PKCS#12), enter the password for encrypting the
private key that is set when you obtain the
certificate.
425
Setting Description
CA Certificate 1 If your certificate’s format is Certificate
(PEM/DER), import a certificate from a certificate
authority that issues a CA-signed Certificate to be
used as the server certificate. Specify a file if
necessary.
CA Certificate 2 If your certificate’s format is Certificate
(PEM/DER), import a certificate from the same
certificate authority that issued CA Certificate 1.
Specify a file if necessary.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Deleting a CA-signed Certificate
You can delete an imported CA-signed certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you
have no more need for an encrypted connection.
Note: If you obtained a CA-signed certificate from Web Config, you cannot import a deleted certificate;
you must obtain and import a new certificate.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security.
2. Select one of the following network security options and corresponding certificate:
• SSL/TLS and select Certificate
• IPsec/IP Filtering and select Client Certificate
• IEEE802.1X and select Client Certificate
• S/MIME and select Client Certificate
3. Click Delete.
You see a completion message.
4. Click OK.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Updating a Self-signed Certificate
If your product supports the HTTPS server feature, you can update a self-signed certificate using Web
Config.
1. Access Web Config and select Network Security, select SSL/TLS, and select Certificate.
426
2. Click Update.
3. Enter an identifier for your product from 1 to 128 characters long in the Common Name field.
Note: You can add up to 5 IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, host names, or FQDNs; separated by
commas. The first value is assigned to the Common Name field, and the rest are added to the Alias
field of the certificate subject. You cannot enter a space before or after a comma.
4. Select a validity period for the certificate as the Certificate Validity (year) setting.
5. Click Next.
You see a completion message.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Confirm to verify the certificate information.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Importing a CA Certificate
You can import a CA certificate using Web Config.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security.
2. Select CA Certificate.
3. Select Import.
4. Select the CA certificate you want to import.
5. Click OK.
When you see the CA Certificate page and the imported certificate is displayed, the import is finished.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Deleting a CA Certificate
You can delete an imported CA certificate with Web Config when the certificate expires or if you have no
more need for an encrypted connection.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select Network Security .
2. Select CA Certificate.
3. Locate the certificate you want to remove and click the Delete button next to it.
4. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
427
5. Click Reboot Network, and then check that the deleted CA Certificate is not listed on the updated
screen.
Parent topic: Using a Digital Certificate
Setting Up Universal Print (Microsoft)
You can set up your product for use with Universal Print if you are using Microsoft 365 and Azure Active
Directory.
Note: This feature is supported on Windows 10 2004 (20H1) or later. Visit the Microsoft website for more
information.
1. Access Web Config as an administrator and select the Network tab.
2. Select Universal Print.
3. Select Register.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to register your product.
If Web Config shows Registered as the registration status, then setup is complete.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
Using Epson Device Admin Configuration Software
With Windows, you can discover and monitor remote devices, and configure network settings in a batch
operation. See the Epson Device Admin help for instructions.
To install Epson Device Admin, download the software from the support page at epson.com/support
(U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Parent topic: Administering Your Product
428
Technical Specifications
These sections list the technical specifications for your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Windows System Requirements
Mac System Requirements
Paper Specifications
Printable Area Specifications
Scanning Specifications
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Fax Specifications
Ink Cartridge Specifications
Dimension Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Interface Specifications
External USB Device Specifications
Storage Specifications
Network Interface Specifications (U.S. and Canada)
Network Interface Specifications (Latin America)
Safety and Approvals Specifications (U.S. and Canada)
Staple Finisher Specifications
Inner Finisher Specifications
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board Specifications
10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet Specifications
Inner Tray Specifications
High-Capacity Unit Specifications
Optional Dual Cassette Specifications
HDD Specifications
429
Windows System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your computer should use one of these Microsoft operating
systems:
• Windows 11
• Windows 10
• Windows 8.x
• Windows 7
• Windows Server 2019
• Windows Server 2016
• Windows Server 2012
• Windows Server 2008
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America),
select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Mac System Requirements
To use your product and its software, your Mac should use one of these operating systems:
• macOS 15.x
• macOS 14.x
• macOS 13.x
• macOS 12.x
• macOS 11.x
• macOS 10.15.x
• macOS 10.14.x
• macOS 10.13.x
• macOS 10.12.x
• OS X 10.11.x
430
• OS X 10.10.x
• OS X 10.9.5.x
• OS X 10.9.x (AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000)
Note: Mac OS may not support some applications and features; the UNIX File System (UFS) for Mac
OS is not supported.
Note: For the latest product software available for your operating system, visit the Epson support site at
epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America),
select your product, and select Downloads.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Paper Specifications
Note: Since the quality of any particular brand or type of paper may be changed by the manufacturer at
any time, Epson cannot guarantee the quality of any non-Epson brand or type of paper. Always test a
sample of paper stock before purchasing large quantities or printing large jobs.
431
Single-sheets
Size
12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
Oficio 9 (8.46 × 12.4 inches [215 × 315 mm])
Mexico-Oficio (8.5 × 13.4 inches [216 × 340 mm])
Paper types Plain paper and thick paper
Note: Your product also supports compatible papers distributed by
Epson. See the link at the end of this topic for a list of compatible
Epson papers.
Weight Plain paper: 16 lb (60 g/m
2
) to 24 lb (90 g/m
2
)
Thick paper: 24 lb (91 g/m
2
) to 66 lb (250 g/m
2
)
Extra-thick paper: 67 lb (251 g/m
2
) to 80 lb (300 g/m
2
)
Envelopes
Size No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
433
1 Left/right margin: 0.12 inch (3 mm)
2 Top/bottom margin: 0.12 inch (3 mm)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Scanning Specifications
Scanner type Flatbed
Photoelectric device CIS
Effective pixels 7020 × 10200 pixels at 600 dpi
Maximum scan area 11.7 × 17 inches (297 × 431.8 mm)
Maximum document size A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
Scanning resolution 600 dpi (main scan)
600 dpi (sub scan)
Output resolution 50 to 9600 dpi in 1 dpi increments
Image data Color:
30 bits per pixel internal (10 bits per pixel per color internal)
24 bits per pixel external (8 bits per pixel per color external)
Grayscale:
10 bits per pixel internal
8 bits per pixel external
Black and white:
10 bits per pixel internal
1 bit per pixel external
Light source LED
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
434
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) Specifications
Paper size A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm]) to A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches
[297 × 420 mm])/11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm) (Maximum 11.7 ×
17 inches [297 × 431.8 mm])
Paper type Plain paper, high quality paper, recycled paper
Paper weight 14 lb (52 g/m
2
) to 35 lb (128 g/m
2
)
Sheet feeding capacity Total thickness: 0.65 inch (16.5 mm)
Approximately 150 sheets at 22 lb (80 g/m
2
)
Note: Depending on the quality of the paper, originals that meet the ADF specifications still may not feed
or scan correctly.
Caution: Do not load the following types of originals in the ADF, or they may be damaged or may
damage the scanner. Use the scanner glass for these types:
• Photos or valuable original artwork
• Thermal paper
• Originals containing staples or paper clips
• Originals with carbon paper backing
• Originals that are bound
• Originals with labels, stickers, or sticky notes
• Originals that are ripped, curled, folded, deteriorated, or wrinkled
• Originals with holes
• Originals that are irregularly cut or shaped
• Originals that have not dried or cooled from printing
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Fax Specifications
Specifications only applicable to models with optional fax board installed.
435
Fax type Walk-up black-and-white and color fax capability (ITU-T Super
Group 3)
Support line Standard analog telephone lines
PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone systems
Speed Up to 33.6 kbps
Resolution Monochrome
Standard: 203 pixels per inch × 98 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 3.85 lines per mm)
Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 196 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 7.7 lines per mm)
Super Fine: 203 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch
(8 pixels per mm × 15.4 lines per mm)
Ultra Fine: 406 pixels per inch × 392 lines per inch
(16 pixels per mm × 15.4 lines per mm)
Color
200 × 200 dpi
Page memory Up to 550 pages (ITU-T No. 1 chart; monochrome draft mode)
Redial 2 times (with 1 minute interval)
Interface RJ-11 Phone Line
RJ-11 Telephone set connection
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Ink Cartridge Specifications
Note: We recommend that you use genuine Epson maintenance boxes and cartridges and do not refill
them. The use of other products may affect your print quality and could result in printer damage.
Part of the ink from the included set of cartridges is used for charging the printer. Yields vary
considerably based on images printed, print settings, paper type, frequency of use, and temperature. For
print quality, a variable amount of ink remains in the cartridge after the "replace cartridge" indicator
comes on.
436
Color AM-C4000/AM-C5000/AM-C6000:
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black
AM-M5500:
Black
Ink cartridge life
Unopened package: do not use if the date on the package has
expired
Temperature Storage: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
Ink may freeze if it is stored below 0°C (32°F)
Ink thaws and is usable after approximately 3 hours at 77 °F (25 °C)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Dimension Specifications
All dimensions are for the main unit only.
Storage:
Height 37.9 inches (963 mm)
Width 21.9 inches (555 mm)
Depth 24.4 inches (620 mm)
Printing:
Height 37.9 inches (963 mm)
Width 36.5 inches (926 mm)
Depth 26.8 inches (680 mm)
All covers, trays, cassettes, and the ADF open:
Height 52.6 inches (1336 mm)
Width 41.9 inches (1065 mm)
437
Depth 48.7 inches (1238 mm)
Weight (without consumables) Approx. 219.2 lb (99.4 kg)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Power supply rating 100 to 240 V
Rated frequency range 50/60 Hz
Rated current 4.0 to 2.0 A
Power consumption
(with LAN connection)
Standalone copying: Approx. 115 W (ISO/IEC24712)
Ready mode: 46 W
Sleep mode: 0.9 W
Power off mode: 0.1 W
Maximum power consumption: 190 W
Typical Energy Consumption
(TEC)*
AM-C6000: 0.25
AM-C5000: 0.22
AM-C4000: 0.21
* TEC is an abbreviation of Typical Electricity Consumption and is the power consumption (kWh) for a
standard week (5 days of repeated operation and sleep/off and two days of sleep/off). This value is used
as a reference value to comply with the "International Energy Star Program".
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Operating: 50 to 95 °F (10 to 35 °C)
Storage: –4 to 104 °F (–20 to 40 °C)
1 month at 104 °F (40 °C)
438
Humidity
(without condensation)
Operating: 15 to 85% RH
Storage: 5 to 85% RH
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Interface Specifications
Interface type SuperSpeed USB (Device Class for computers)
Hi-Speed USB (for external USB devices)
Note: Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally connected devices.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
External USB Device Specifications
Do not use devices with the following requirements:
• Dedicated driver
• Security settings
Note: Use only external storage devices with independent AC power sources. External storage devices
that are powered via USB are not recommended. Epson cannot guarantee the operation of externally
connected devices.
USB flash drive 2TB (formatted in FAT, FAT32, or exFAT)
You can use USB devices with your product containing files that meet these specifications.
File format JPEG with the Exif version 2.31 standard taken by digital cameras
with the DCF (Design Rule for Camera File system) version 1.0 or
2.0 standard
1
TIFF 6.0-compliant uncompressed images: RGB full-color or binary
(not CCITT-encoded)
PDF version 1.7 compliant data
Image size 80 × 80 pixels to 10200 × 10200 pixels
439
File size Up to 2GB
Number of files JPEG: Up to 9990
2
TIFF: Up to 999
PDF: Up to 999
1
Files stored on digital cameras with built-in memory are not supported.
2
If the number of files exceeds 999, the files are displayed in groups.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Storage Specifications
Storage capacity 90 GB
Number of folders Shared Folder: 1
Shared folders: 0 to 199
Personal folders: Unlimited
Maximum number of files in a
folder
3,000 files
Maximum pages of files saved
in a folder
15,000 pages
Maximum number of saved
jobs*
Printing: 100
Sending by email, saving in the folder, or cloud service: 10
*: The number of jobs that can be executed before the first job finishes.
Note: You may not be able to save new files after the memory usage rate reaches 100%. When the
memory usage rate is less than 100%, and the number of files saved or number of pages saved in the
folder reaches the limit, you may not be able to save the entire job. Delete as many unnecessary files as
possible.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
440
Network Interface Specifications (U.S. and Canada)
Wi-Fi
(Only available with optional Wireless LAN interface)
Standard IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac; IEEE802.11n available only on the 20 MHz
channel
Frequency ranges IEEE802.11a/n/ac: 5 GHz
IEEE802.11b/g/n: 2.4 GHz
Wi-Fi channels 5 GHz*:
W52 (36/40/44/48)
W53 (52/56/60/64)
W56 (100/104/108/112/116/120/124/128/132/136/140/144)
W58 (149/153/157/161/165)
2.4 GHz:
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11
Wi-Fi Direct channels 5 GHz*:
W52 (36/40/44/48)
W58 (149/153/157/161/165)
2.4 GHz:
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11
Maximum radio-frequency
power transmitted
20 dBm (EIRP)
Connection modes Infrastructure mode
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) mode not available for IEEE
802.11b.
441
Wireless security protocols WEP (64/128 bit)
WPA2-PSK (AES); complies with WPA2 standards with support for
WPA/WPA2 Personal
WPA3-SAE (AES)
WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
Note: Wi-Fi Direct supports only WPA2-PSK (AES).
*The availability of outdoor use over these channels varies by location, as described in the table below.
Limitations for Using 5GHz Frequencies Outdoors
Frequency
range
W52 W53 W56 W58
Frequency 5150-5250 MHz 5250-5350 MHz 5470-5725 MHz 5725-5850 MHz
Channel 36/40/44/48 52/56/60/64 100/104/108/112/116/
120/124/128/132/136/1
40
149/153/157/161/
165
U.S. Outdoor use
allowed
Outdoor use
allowed
Outdoor use allowed Outdoor use
allowed
Canada Outdoor use
prohibited
Outdoor use
allowed
Outdoor use allowed Outdoor use
allowed
Ethernet
Standards IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)
IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)
Note: To prevent risk of radio interference, use a Category-5e or
higher shielded twisted pair cable.
IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet); connected device should
be IEEE802.3az compliant
442
Communication mode Auto, 10Mbps Full duplex, 10Mbps Half duplex, 100Mbps Full
duplex, 100Mbps Half duplex
Connector RJ-45
Security Protocol
• IEEE802.1X (requires a connected device compliant with IEEE802.1X)
• IPsec/IP Filtering
• SSL/TLS; HTTPS Server/Client and IPPS
• SMTPS; STARTTLS and SSL/TLS
• SNMPv3
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Network Interface Specifications (Latin America)
Note: Wireless LAN standard complies with either IEEE802.11b/g or IEEE802.11 b/g/n, depending on
purchase location.
Wi-Fi
(Only available with the optional Wireless LAN interface.)
Standard IEEE802.11b/g/n; complies with either IEEE802.11b/g or
IEEE802.11b/g/n, depending on purchase location
Frequency range 2.4 GHz
Channels 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13
Maximum radio-frequency
power transmitted
20 dBm (EIRP)
Connection modes Infrastructure mode
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
Note: Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) mode not available for IEEE
802.11b.
443
Wireless security protocols WEP (64/128 bit)
WPA2-PSK (AES) compliant with WPA2 standards with support for
WPA/WPA2 Personal
WPA3-SAE (AES)
WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise
Ethernet
Standards IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)
IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)
Note: To prevent risk of radio interference, use a Category-5e or
higher shielded twisted pair cable.
IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet); connected device should
be IEEE802.3az compliant
Communication mode Auto, 10Mbps Full duplex, 10Mbps Half duplex, 100Mbps Full
duplex, 100Mbps Half duplex
Connector RJ-45
Security Protocol
• IEEE802.1X (requires a connected device compliant with IEEE802.1X)
• IPsec/IP Filtering
• SSL/TLS; HTTPS Server/Client and IPPS
• TLS Version; 1.3, 1.2, 1.1, and 1.0 (1.1 and 1.0 are disabled by default)
• SMTPS; STARTTLS and SSL/TLS
• SNMPv3
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
444
Safety and Approvals Specifications (U.S. and Canada)
United States Safety: UL62368-1
EMC: FCC Part15 Subpart B Class B
Canada Safety: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 62368-1
EMC: CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)
This product conforms to Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and
away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed
outdoors is subject to licensing.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment
and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102
of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated so that
the radiator is kept at least 7.9 inches (20 cm) or more away from a person's body (excluding extremities:
hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Staple Finisher Specifications
Paper weight 14 to 80 lb (52 to 300 g/m
2
)
Note: When the paper thickness is 14 to 16 lb (52 to 59 g/m
2
) or 67
to 80 lb (251 to 300 g/m
2
), only standard (stacked) paper can be
ejected to the tray under the finisher.
Paper type Same as the paper loaded in the main unit
445
Available paper sizes A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
All sizes are in landscape orientation. Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]), and B5
(7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) size papers also support portrait
orientation.
Only user-defined sizes with a width between 4.13 and 11.7 inches
(104.8 to 297 mm) and a length between 7.2 and 18 inches (182 to
457.2 mm) can use the finisher tray.
Only user-defined sizes with a width between 10.1 and 11.7 inches
(257 to 297 mm) and a length between 7.1 and 47.2 inches (182 to
1200 mm) can use the top output tray.
446
Ejecting Capacity Finisher tray
(17 to 21 lb [64 to 80g/m
2
])
Standard (Stack) Ejecting /Shift Ejecting /Punch
Without saddle stitch unit:
• A4/B5/Letter: 4000 sheets or less depending on the print pattern
• A3/B4/Legal 1-sided/2-sided: 1500 sheets
• A5/B6 1-sided/2-sided: 500 sheets
With saddle stitch unit:
• A4/B5/Letter: 3000 sheets or less depending on the print pattern
• A3/B4/Legal 1-sided/2-sided: 1500 sheets
• A5/B6 1-sided/2-sided: 500 sheets
Staple
Without saddle stitch unit:
• A4/B5/Letter: 80 sets or 4000 sheets (whichever occurs first)
• A3/B4/Legal 1-sided/2-sided: 50 sets or 1500 sheets (whichever
occurs first)
With saddle stitch unit:
• A4/B5/Letter: 60 sets or 3000 sheets (whichever occurs first)
• A3/B4/Legal 1-sided/2-sided: 50 sets or 1500 sheets (whichever
occurs first)
Output tray
200 sheets (17 to 21 lb [64 to 80g/m
2
])
Can only be specified as the fax output destination.
Top output tray
1 sheet (14 to 80 lb [52 to 300 g/m
2
])
Cannot be specified as the output tray. The output tray is specified
automatically based on the settings.
Booklet tray (With auxiliary tray attached)
Saddle stitch
447
• Staple up to 5 sheets: 20 sets
• 6 to 20 sheets binding: 10 sets
Half fold
• 1 to 3 sheets: 20 sets
Tri fold
• 1 to 3 sheets: 20 sets
Shift Ejecting Up to two sheets of 28 to 67 lb (106 to 250 g/m
2
) (one front cover and
one back cover).
Tray: Finisher Tray
Available paper sizes
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
All sizes are in landscape orientation. Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]), and B5
(7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) size papers also support portrait
orientation.
448
Staple
Tray: Finisher Tray
Available paper sizes
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• 12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
Note: A4 and Letter-sized paper is also compatible in portrait
orientation. B5-sized paper is only available in portrait orientation.
Staple position: One at the front, one at the back, and two at the
edges
Note: B5 paper is not supported
Amount of available paper
16 to 24 lb (60 to 90 g/m
2
)
• A4/B5/Letter: 50 sheets
• A3/B4/Legal/11 × 17/12 × 18: 30 sheets
24 to 28 lb (91 to 105 g/m
2
)
• A4/B5/Letter: 40 sheets
• A3/B4/Legal/11 × 17/12 × 18: 20 sheets
28 to 67 lb (106 to 250 g/m
2
)
You can only use one sheet for the front and back cover.
449
Saddle stitch
(requires the bookbinder unit)
Tray: Booklet tray
Available paper sizes
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
All sizes are in landscape orientation. Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]), and B5
(7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) size papers also support portrait
orientation.
16 to 24 lb (60 to 90 g/m
2
): 20 sheets
24 to 28 lb (91 to 105 g/m
2
): 10 sheets
28 to 67 lb (106 to 250 g/m
2
): You can only use one sheet for the
front cover.
Half fold
(requires the bookbinder unit)
Tray: Booklet tray
Available paper sizes (in landscape orientation)
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
16 to 28 lb (60 to 105 g/m
2
): 3 sheets
28 to 67 lb (106 to 250 g/m
2
): You can only use one sheet for the
front cover.
450
Tri fold
(requires the bookbinder unit)
Tray: Booklet tray
Available paper sizes (in landscape orientation)
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
16 to 24 lb (60 to 90 g/m
2
): 20 sheets
24 to 28 lb (91 to 105 g/m
2
): 10 sheets
Punch
(requires the punch unit)
Tray: Finisher tray
Available paper sizes
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
*1
• A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
*1
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
*2
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
*1*2
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
*1
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
*1
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• 12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
Punch position: 2-hole/4-hole, 2-hole/3-hole
Punch hole interval
• 2/4-Hole punch unit: 3.1 inches (80 mm)
• 2/3-Hole punch unit: 2.8 inches (70 mm) (2holes); 4.3 inches (108
mm) (3 holes)
Power supply rating DC 24 V
Maximum power consumption Staple Finisher: 209 W
Staple Finisher with Punch unit and Saddle stitch unit: 220 W
451
Dimensions Width: 26.8 inches (681 mm)
Depth: 26.3 inches (669 mm)
Height: 41.8 inches (1062 mm)
Weight Approximately 92.6 lbs (42 kg)
*1
: Paper size in landscape orientation supports 2-hole punch only.
*2
: B5 paper in portrait orientation and B4 paper in landscape orientation support 2-hole punch only.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Inner Finisher Specifications
Paper weight 14 to 80 lb (52 to 300 g/m
2
)
Paper type Same as the paper loaded in the main unit
452
Available paper sizes A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
A6 (4.1 × 5.8 inches [105 × 148 mm])
B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
B6 (5 × 7.2 inches [128 × 182 mm])
Executive (7.25 × 10.5 inches [184 × 267 mm])
Half Letter (5.5 × 8.5 inches [140 × 216 mm])
Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
No. 10 (4.1 × 9.5 inches [105 × 241 mm])
All sizes are in landscape orientation. Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]), and B5
(7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) size papers also support portrait
orientation.
Only user-defined sizes with a width between 4.13 and 11.7 inches
(104.8 to 297 mm) and a length between 7.2 and 18 inches (182 to
457.2 mm) can use the inner finisher.
Ejecting Capacity
(17 to 21 lb [64 to 80g/m
2
])
Length less than 11.5 inches (298 mm): 500 sheets
Length more than 11.5 inches (298 mm): 300 sheets
453
Shift Ejecting
Available paper sizes
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
All sizes are in landscape orientation. Letter (8.5 × 11 inches
[216 × 279 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm]), and B5
(7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm]) size papers also support portrait
orientation.
454
Staple
Available paper sizes
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• 12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
Note: A4 and Letter-sized paper is also compatible in portrait
orientation. B5-sized paper is only available in portrait orientation.
Staple position: One at the front, one at the back, and two at the
edges
Note: B5 paper is not supported
Amount of available paper
16 to 24 lb (60 to 90 g/m
2
)
• A4/B5/Letter: 50 sheets
• A3/B4/Legal/11 × 17/12 × 18 : 30 sheets
24 to 28 lb (91 to 105 g/m
2
)
• A4/B5/Letter: 40 sheets
• A3/B4/Legal/11 × 17/12 × 18 : 20 sheets
28 to 67 lb (106 to 250 g/m
2
)
You can only use one sheet for the front and back cover.
455
Punch
(requires the punch unit)
Tray: Finisher tray
Available paper sizes
• A3 (11.7 × 16.5 inches [297 × 420 mm])
• A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches [210 × 297 mm])
*1
• A5 (5.8 × 8.2 inches [148 × 210 mm])
*1
• B4 (13.9 × 9.84 inches [353 × 250 mm])
*2
• B5 (7.2 × 10.1 inches [182 × 257 mm])
*1*2
• Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm])
• Legal (8.5 × 14 inches [216 × 356 mm])
*1
• 8.5 × 13 inches (216 × 330 mm)
*1
• 11 × 17 inches (279 × 432 mm)
• 12 × 18 inches (305 × 457 mm)
Punch position: 2-hole/4-hole, 2-hole/3-hole
Punch hole interval
• 2/4-Hole punch unit: 3.1 inches (80 mm)
• 2/3-Hole punch unit: 2.8 inches (70 mm) (2 holes); 4.3 inches (108
mm) (3 holes)
Power supply rating DC 24 V
Maximum power consumption Inner Finisher: 167 W
Inner Finisher with Punch unit: 200 W
Dimensions Width: 18.3 inches (466 mm)
Depth: 20.2 inches (512 mm)
Height: 8.3 inches (210 mm)
Weight Approximately 28.7 lbs (13 kg)
*1
: Paper size in landscape orientation supports 2-hole punch only.
*2
: B5 paper in portrait orientation and B4 paper in landscape orientation support 2-hole punch only.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
456
Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board Specifications
Possible number of
expansions
2 (3 in total with standard)
Note: Other specifications are the same as standard faxing. Follow the link below for more information.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet Specifications
Follow the link below for more information.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Inner Tray Specifications
Available paper sizes The same as the paper sizes that can be loaded from the paper tray.
Ejecting capacity 100 sheets
Power supply rating DC 24 V
Maximum power consumption 16 W
Weight Approximately 4.0 lb (1.8 kg)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
High-Capacity Unit Specifications
Available paper sizes Letter (8.5 × 11 inches [216 × 279 mm]), A4 (8.3 × 11.7 inches
[210 × 297 mm])
Ejecting capacity 3000 sheets at 21 lb (80 g/m
2
)
Power supply rating DC 24 V
Maximum power consumption 18 W
457
Dimensions Width: 13.8 inches (351 mm)
Depth: 23.0 inches (585 mm)
Height: 18.3 inches (465 mm)
Weight Approximately 55.2 lb (25 kg)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
Optional Dual Cassette Specifications
Available paper sizes Follow the link below for available paper sizes.
Capacity Maximum 550 sheets
Power supply rating DC 24 V
Maximum power consumption 11 W
Dimensions Width: 21.9 inches (555 mm)
Depth: 23.3 inches (593 mm)
Height: 12.1 inches (307 mm)
Weight Approximately 54.9 lb (24.9 kg)
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
HDD Specifications
Purpose Mirroring the internal storage
Immediately after installing the additional HDD, a preparation message is displayed at the bottom right of
the control panel. You can use the printer while it is displayed, but we recommend that you wait about
one to two hours until it disappears.
The specifications are the same as the internal storage. See the link below for details.
Parent topic: Technical Specifications
458
Notices
Check these sections for important notices about your product.
Note: Epson offers a recycling program for end of life Epson products. Please go to this site (U.S.) or
this site (Canada) for information on how to return your Epson products for proper disposal.
Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
Trademarks
Copyright Notice
Important Safety Instructions
Before using your Epson product, read and follow these safety instructions.
General Product Safety Instructions
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
Parent topic: Notices
General Product Safety Instructions
• Be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
• Use only the type of power source indicated on the product's label.
• Use only the power cord that comes with the product. Do not use the cord with any other equipment.
Using another cord or using the provided cord with other equipment may cause fires or shock.
• Make sure the AC power cord meets the relevant local safety standard.
• Place the product near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
• Avoid plugging the product into an outlet on the same circuit as a photo copier or air control system
that regularly switches on and off, or on an outlet controlled by a wall switch or timer.
459
• Do not let the power cord become damaged or frayed. Place it to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying,
crimping, and kinking. Do not place objects on top of it and do not allow it to be stepped on or run over.
Be careful to keep the cord straight at each end.
• If you use an extension cord with the product, make sure the total ampere rating of the devices
plugged into the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure the total
ampere rating of all devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere
rating.
• Always turn off the product using the power button, and wait until the power light stops flashing before
unplugging the product or cutting off power to the electrical outlet.
• If you will not be using the product for a long period, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
• Place the product on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond its base in all directions. It will not
operate properly if it is tilted or at an angle.
• Allow space behind the product for the cables, and space above the product so that you can fully raise
the document cover.
• Leave enough space in front of the product for the paper to be fully ejected.
• Leave enough space in front and on the sides of the product for printing and maintenance.
• Allow enough space above the unit to fully raise the ADF.
• Avoid locations that are subject to rapid changes in heat or humidity, shocks or vibrations, or dust.
• Do not place or store the product outdoors.
• Do not place the product near excessive heat sources or in direct sunlight.
• Leave enough room around the product for sufficient ventilation. Do not block or cover openings in the
case or insert objects through the slots.
• Keep the product away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as loudspeakers
or the base units of cordless telephones.
• When connecting the product to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct
orientation of the connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector
in the wrong orientation may damage both devices connected by the cable.
• Do not sit or lean on the product. Do not place heavy objects on the product.
• Do not move the printhead by hand; this may damage the product.
• Do not put your hands inside the product while it is printing.
• Do not spill liquid on the product or use the product with wet hands.
460
• Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the product. Doing so may
cause fire.
• Do not press too hard on the scanner glass when placing originals.
• Do not open the scanner section while the product is copying, printing, scanning, or performing any
other functions.
• Be careful not to trap your fingers when opening the covers, trays, cassettes, or when performing
operations inside the product.
• Avoid touching the components inside the product unless as specifically instructed to do so in this
guide.
• Except as specifically explained in your documentation, do not attempt to service or disassemble the
product yourself.
• Unplug the product and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: if
the power cord or plug is damaged; if liquid has entered the product; if the product has been dropped
or the case damaged; if the product does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in
performance. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions.
• When storing or transporting the product, do not tilt it, stand it on its side, or turn it upside down;
otherwise, ink may leak.
• Do not attempt to move the product by yourself.
• Do not touch the areas indicated by caution labels inside the product and any optional items.
For California customers only: The lithium batteries in this product contain Perchlorate Material -
special handling may apply. Click here for details.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Ink Cartridge Safety Instructions
• Keep ink cartridges out of the reach of children and do not drink the ink.
• Be careful when you handle used ink cartridges; there may be ink remaining around the ink supply
port. If ink gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If it gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately with water.
• Do not put your hand inside the product or touch any cartridges during printing.
• Install a new ink cartridge immediately after removing an expended one. Leaving cartridges
uninstalled can dry out the print head and may prevent the product from printing.
• Do not remove or tear the label on the cartridge; this can cause leakage.
461
• Do not remove the transparent seal from the bottom of the cartridge. This may cause the cartridge to
become unusable.
• Do not break the hooks on the side of the cartridge when removing it from the packaging.
• Do not touch the green IC chip on the side of the cartridge. This may prevent normal operation.
• If you remove an ink cartridge for later use, protect the ink supply area from dirt and dust and store it in
the same environment as the product. Note that there is a valve in the ink supply port, making covers
or plugs unnecessary, but care is needed to prevent the ink from staining items that the cartridge
touches. Do not touch the ink cartridge ink supply port or surrounding area.
• Use an ink cartridge before the date printed on its package.
• Do not dismantle an ink cartridge. This could damage the print head.
• Store ink cartridges in a cool, dark place; do not store the ink cartridges in high or freezing
temperatures.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Wireless Connection Safety Instructions
Radio waves from this product may adversely affect the operation of medical equipment or automatically
controlled devices, such as pacemakers, automatic doors or fire alarms. When using this product near
such devices or inside a medical facility, follow the directions from authorized staff members at the
facility, and follow all posted warnings and directions on the device to avoid causing an accident.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
LCD Screen Safety Instructions
• Use only a dry, soft cloth to clean the LCD screen. Do not use liquid or chemical cleansers.
• If the LCD screen is damaged, contact Epson. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash
them thoroughly with soap and water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems remain after a thorough flushing, see a doctor
immediately.
• Do not press too hard on the LCD screen or subject it to heavy impacts.
• Do not use a pointy or sharp object, such as a pen or your fingernail, to operate the LCD screen.
• If the LCD screen chips or cracks, do not touch or attempt to remove the broken pieces; contact Epson
for support.
• Do not subject your product to sudden changes in temperature or humidity; this may cause
condensation to develop inside the LCD screen and degrade its performance.
462
• The LCD screen may contain a few small bright or dark spots, and may display uneven brightness.
These are normal and do not indicate that the screen is damaged in any way.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
Telephone Equipment Safety Instructions
When using telephone equipment, you should always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock, and personal injury, including the following:
• Do not use the Epson product near water.
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Caution: To reduce the risk of fire, use only a No. 26 AWG or larger telecommunication line cord.
Parent topic: Important Safety Instructions
FCC Compliance Statement
For United States Users
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the
Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments ("ACTA"). On the surface of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If
requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
Applicable certification jack Universal Service Order Codes ("USOC") for the equipment: RJ11C.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must
comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant
telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a
compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation instructions for details.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming
call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number
of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone
company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product
identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a
decimal point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
463
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in
advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn't practical,
the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your
right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that
could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance
notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you have problems with this product and require technical or customer support, please visit
www.epson.com for more information.
This product is not intended to be repaired by the customer. If you experience trouble connecting this
equipment to a telephone line, please contact:
Name: Epson America, Inc.
Address: 3131 Katella Ave., Los Alamitos, CA 90720 U.S.A.
Telephone: (562) 981-3840
If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to
party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the
installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what
will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or
other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly
contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business or other entity, or other
individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business,
other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or any other
number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
To comply with this law, you must enter the following information in your fax unit. See the Faxing section
of this guide for instructions on doing this.
• Date and time
• Name and telephone number which identify the source of your fax transmission
464
According to the FCC's electrical safety advisory, we recommend that you may install an AC surge
arrester in the AC outlet to which this equipment is connected. Telephone companies report that
electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer terminal equipment
connected to AC power sources and that this is a major nationwide problem.
The following module is not included with the printer and is an optional accessory:
Fax Module: EU-237
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in
a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
WARNING
The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC
Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits
established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded
equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do
not leave cables connected to unused interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
For Canadian Users
1. This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada technical
specifications.
2. The Ringer Equivalence Number indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected
to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed five.
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
465
Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d’Innovation, Sciences et
Développement économique Canada.
L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs qui peuvent
être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une interface peut consister en une
combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme des IES de tous les dispositifs
n’excède pas cinq.
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
Parent topic: Notices
Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver
1. DISPUTES, BINDING INDIVIDUAL ARBITRATION, AND WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND
CLASS ARBITRATIONS
1.1 Disputes. The terms of this Section 1 shall apply to all Disputes between you and Epson. The term
"Dispute" is meant to have the broadest meaning permissible under law and includes any dispute, claim,
controversy or action between you and Epson arising out of or relating to this Agreement, Epson
branded products (hardware and including any related software), or other transaction involving you and
Epson, whether in contract, warranty, misrepresentation, fraud, tort, intentional tort, statute, regulation,
ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. "DISPUTE" DOES NOT INCLUDE IP CLAIMS, or more
specifically, a claim or cause of action for (a) trademark infringement or dilution, (b) patent infringement,
(c) copyright infringement or misuse, or (d) trade secret misappropriation (an "IP Claim"). You and Epson
also agree, notwithstanding Section 1.6,that a court, not an arbitrator, may decide if a claim or cause of
action is for an IP Claim.
1.2 Binding Arbitration. You and Epson agree that all Disputes shall be resolved by binding arbitration
according to this Agreement. ARBITRATION MEANS THAT YOU WAIVE YOUR RIGHT TO A JUDGE
OR JURY IN A COURT PROCEEDING AND YOUR GROUNDS FOR APPEAL ARE LIMITED.
Pursuant to this Agreement, binding arbitration shall be administered by JAMS, a nationally recognized
arbitration authority, pursuant to its code of procedures then in effect for consumer related disputes, but
excluding any rules that permit joinder or class actions in arbitration (for more detail on procedure, see
Section 1.6 below). You and Epson understand and agree that (a) the Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C.
§1, et seq.) governs the interpretation and enforcement of this Section 1, (b) this Agreement
memorializes a transaction in interstate commerce, and (c) this Section 1 shall survive termination of this
Agreement.
1.3 Pre-Arbitration Steps and Notice. Before submitting a claim for arbitration, you and Epson agree to
try, for sixty (60) days, to resolve any Dispute informally. If Epson and you do not reach an agreement to
resolve the Dispute within the sixty (60) days), you or Epson may commence an arbitration. Notice to
Epson must be addressed to: Epson America, Inc., ATTN: Legal Department, 3131 Katella Ave., Los
Alamitos, CA 90720 (the "Epson Address"). The Dispute Notice to you will be sent to the most recent
466
address Epson has in its records for you. For this reason, it is important to notify us if your address
changes by emailing us at [email protected] or writing us at the Epson Address above. Notice of
the Dispute shall include the sender's name, address and contact information, the facts giving rise to the
Dispute, and the relief requested (the "Dispute Notice"). Following receipt of the Dispute Notice, Epson
and you agree to act in good faith to resolve the Dispute before commencing arbitration.
1.4 Small Claims Court. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may bring an individual action in the small
claims court of your state or municipality if the action is within that court's jurisdiction and is pending only
in that court.
1.5 WAIVER OF CLASS ACTIONS AND CLASS ARBITRATIONS. YOU AND EPSON AGREE THAT
EACH PARTY MAY BRING DISPUTES AGAINST THE OTHER PARTY ONLY IN AN INDIVIDUAL
CAPACITY, AND NOT AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR
REPRESENTATIVE PROCEEDING, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FEDERAL OR STATE
CLASS ACTIONS, OR CLASS ARBITRATIONS. CLASS ACTION LAWSUITS, CLASS-WIDE
ARBITRATIONS, PRIVATE ATTORNEY-GENERAL ACTIONS, AND ANY OTHER PROCEEDING
WHERE SOMEONE ACTS IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY ARE NOT ALLOWED.
ACCORDINGLY, UNDER THE ARBITRATION PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION, AN
ARBITRATOR SHALL NOT COMBINE OR CONSOLIDATE MORE THAN ONE PARTY'S CLAIMS
WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL AFFECTED PARTIES TO AN ARBITRATION
PROCEEDING.
1.6 Arbitration Procedure. If you or Epson commences arbitration, the arbitration shall be governed by
the rules of JAMS that are in effect when the arbitration is filed, excluding any rules that permit arbitration
on a class or representative basis (the "JAMS Rules"), available at http://www.jamsadr.com or by calling
1-800-352-5267, and under the rules set forth in this Agreement. All Disputes shall be resolved by a
single neutral arbitrator, and both parties shall have a reasonable opportunity to participate in the
selection of the arbitrator. The arbitrator is bound by the terms of this Agreement. The arbitrator, and not
any federal, state or local court or agency, shall have exclusive authority to resolve all disputes arising
out of or relating to the interpretation, applicability, enforceability or formation of this Agreement,
including any claim that all or any part of this Agreement is void or voidable. Notwithstanding this broad
delegation of authority to the arbitrator, a court may determine the limited question of whether a claim or
cause of action is for an IP Claim, which is excluded from the definition of "Disputes" in Section 1.1
above. The arbitrator shall be empowered to grant whatever relief would be available in a court under
law or in equity. The arbitrator may award you the same damages as a court could, and may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only in favor of the individual party seeking relief and only to the extent
necessary to provide relief warranted by that party's individual claim. In some instances, the costs of
arbitration can exceed the costs of litigation and the right to discovery may be more limited in arbitration
than in court. The arbitrator's award is binding and may be entered as a judgment in any court of
competent jurisdiction.
467
You may choose to engage in arbitration hearings by telephone. Arbitration hearings not conducted by
telephone shall take place in a location reasonably accessible from your primary residence, or in Orange
County, California, at your option.
a) Initiation of Arbitration Proceeding. If either you or Epson decides to arbitrate a Dispute, both parties
agree to the following procedure:
(i) Write a Demand for Arbitration. The demand must include a description of the Dispute and the amount
of damages sought to be recovered. You can find a copy of a Demand for Arbitration at
http://www.jamsadr.com ("Demand for Arbitration").
(ii) Send three copies of the Demand for Arbitration, plus the appropriate filing fee, to: JAMS, 500 North
State College Blvd., Suite 600 Orange, CA 92868, U.S.A.
(iii) Send one copy of the Demand for Arbitration to the other party (same address as the Dispute
Notice), or as otherwise agreed by the parties.
b) Hearing Format. During the arbitration, the amount of any settlement offer made shall not be disclosed
to the arbitrator until after the arbitrator determines the amount, if any, to which you or Epson is entitled.
The discovery or exchange of non-privileged information relevant to the Dispute may be allowed during
the arbitration.
c) Arbitration Fees. Epson shall pay, or (if applicable) reimburse you for, all JAMS filings and arbitrator
fees for any arbitration commenced (by you or Epson) pursuant to provisions of this Agreement.
d) Award in Your Favor. For Disputes in which you or Epson seeks $75,000 or less in damages exclusive
of attorney's fees and costs, if the arbitrator's decision results in an award to you in an amount greater
than Epson's last written offer, if any, to settle the Dispute, Epson will: (i) pay you $1,000 or the amount
of the award, whichever is greater; (ii) pay you twice the amount of your reasonable attorney's fees, if
any; and (iii) reimburse you for any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing the Dispute in arbitration. Except as
agreed upon by you and Epson in writing, the arbitrator shall determine the amount of fees, costs, and
expenses to be paid by Epson pursuant to this Section 1.6d).
e) Attorney's Fees. Epson will not seek its attorney's fees and expenses for any arbitration commenced
involving a Dispute under this Agreement. Your right to attorney's fees and expenses under Section
1.6d) above does not limit your rights to attorney's fees and expenses under applicable law;
notwithstanding the foregoing, the arbitrator may not award duplicative awards of attorney's fees and
expenses.
1.7 Opt-out. You may elect to opt-out (exclude yourself) from the final, binding, individual
arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this
Agreement by sending a written letter to the Epson Address within thirty (30) days of your assent
to this Agreement (including without limitation the purchase, download, installation of the
Software or other applicable use of Epson Hardware, products and services) that specifies (i)
your name, (ii) your mailing address, and (iii) your request to be excluded from the final, binding
468
individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in
this Section 1. In the event that you opt-out consistent with the procedure set forth above, all
other terms shall continue to apply, including the requirement to provide notice prior to litigation.
1.8 Amendments to Section 1. Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, you
and Epson agree that if Epson makes any future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and
class action waiver provisions (other than a change to Epson's address) in this Agreement, Epson will
obtain your affirmative assent to the applicable amendment. If you do not affirmatively assent to the
applicable amendment, you are agreeing that you will arbitrate any Dispute between the parties in
accordance with the language of this Section 1 (or resolve disputes as provided for in Section 1.7, if you
timely elected to opt-out when you first assented to this Agreement).
1.9 Severability. If any provision in this Section 1 is found to be unenforceable, that provision shall be
severed with the remainder of this Agreement remaining in full force and effect. The foregoing shall not
apply to the prohibition against class or representative actions as provided in Section 1.5. This
means that if Section 1.5 is found to be unenforceable, the entire Section 1 (but only Section 1)
shall be null and void.
Parent topic: Notices
Trademarks
EPSON
®
and Epson Smart Panel are registered trademarks, the EPSON logo is a registered logomark,
and Epson Connect
TM
and Remote Print
TM
are trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.
Mac, macOS, OS X, Bonjour, ColorSync, AirPrint, iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically
with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
The Mopria
TM
wordmark and the Mopria
TM
Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
Google
®
is a registered trademark and Android
TM
, Gmail
TM
, Google Chrome
TM
, Google Drive
TM
, and
Google Play
TM
are trademarks of Google LLC.
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies.
Wi-Fi Direct
®
is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance
®
.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be
trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
469
Parent topic: Notices
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation. The information contained herein is
designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as
applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser or lessee of this product
or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or lessee or third parties
as a result of: accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or
alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson
Corporation's operating and maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any
options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic
interference that occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson
approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
This information is subject to change without notice.
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
Copyright Attribution
Parent topic: Notices
libTIFF Software Acknowledgment
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose
is hereby granted without fee, provided that (I) the above copyright notices and this permission notice
appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and
470
Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the
specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
A Note Concerning Responsible Use of Copyrighted Materials
Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any
Epson product. While some countries' laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in
certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume. Contact your
legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Default Delay Times for Power Management for Epson Products
This product will enter sleep mode after a period of nonuse. This is to ensure that the product meets
Energy Star standards of energy efficiency. More energy savings can be achieved by setting the time to
sleep to a shorter interval.
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
Copyright Attribution
© 2025 Epson America, Inc.
12/25
CPD-62840R3
Parent topic: Copyright Notice
